Legislation · Family and children
Civil Code
Unofficial machine translation of the Spanish BOE text, downloaded on 8 November 2026. It is provided for information and is not the authoritative Spanish legal text. Historical amendment annotations are omitted from this English reading copy. Verify the current official version before relying on it.
Contents
Consolidated text: «Last updated, published on 03/01/2025»
Bearing in mind the provisions of the law of 26 May last; in accordance with the proposal of the Minister of Grace and Justice, and in accordance with the opinion of my Council of Ministers;
In the name of my Augustus Son King D. Alfonso XIII, and as Queen Regent of the Kingdom,
I have come to decree that the attached text of the new edition of the Civil Code, made with the amendments and additions proposed by the Civil Affairs Section of the General Codification Commission, according to the outcome of the discussion held in both Co-legislator Bodies, and in compliance with the provisions of the aforementioned law of 26 May last.
Given in San Ildefonso to twenty-four of July of one thousand eight hundred and eighty-nine.
Maria Cristina
The Minister of Grace and Justice,
JOSENE CANALEJAS AND MENDEZ
PRELIMINARY TITLE
Legal standards, their application and effectiveness
CHAPTER I
Sources of law
Text added, published on 09/07/1974, in force from 29/07/1974.
Article 1.
1. The sources of the Spanish legal order are law, custom and general principles of law.
2. Provisions contradicting a higher ranking provision shall be invalid.
3. Custom shall only apply in the absence of applicable law, provided that it is not contrary to morals or public order and is proved.
Legal practices which are not merely interpretative of a declaration of will shall be considered customary.
4. The general principles of law shall be applied in the absence of law or custom, without prejudice to their informative nature in the legal system.
5. The legal rules contained in international treaties shall not apply directly in Spain until they have become part of the domestic law by being published in full in the Official Gazette of the State.
6. Jurisprudence will complement the legal system with the doctrine repeatedly established by the Supreme Court in interpreting and applying the law, custom and general principles of law.
7. Judges and tribunals have an inexcusable duty to resolve in any case the cases they hear, in accordance with the established system of sources.
Article 2.
1. The laws shall enter into force on the twentieth day following their full publication in the Official State Gazette, if they do not provide otherwise.
2. The laws are only repealed by later laws. The derogation shall have the scope expressly provided for and shall always extend to anything which is incompatible with the former in the new law on the same subject. By simple repeal of a law, those that have been repealed by the law do not regain force.
3. The laws shall have no retroactive effect, unless otherwise provided.
CHAPTER II
Application of legal rules
Text added, published on 09/07/1974, in force from 29/07/1974.
Article 3.
1. The rules will be interpreted according to the proper meaning of their words, in relation to the context, the historical and legislative background, and the social reality of the time in which they are to be applied, with a fundamental focus on the spirit and purpose of those.
2. Equity must be weighed in the application of the rules, although the Tribunals ' decisions may rest exclusively on it only when the law expressly permits.
Article 4.
1. Analogue of rules shall apply where they do not provide for a specific case, but regulate a similar case among those who appreciate the identity of reason.
2. Criminal, exceptional and temporary laws shall not apply to cases or at times other than those expressly covered by them.
3. The provisions of this Code shall apply as supplementary to matters governed by other laws.
Article 5.
1. Provided that nothing else is established, within the time limits specified by days, after a given one, it shall be excluded from the calculation, which shall begin on the following day; and if the time limits are fixed by months or years, they shall be counted from date to date. Where there is no day in the month of expiry equivalent to the initial calculation, the period shall be deemed to expire on the last of the month.
2. The civil calculation of the time limits does not exclude inoperable days.
CHAPTER III
Overall effectiveness of legal norms
Text added, published on 09/07/1974, in force from 29/07/1974.
Article 6.
1. Ignorance of laws does not excuse their fulfillment. The error of law will produce only those effects that the laws determine.
2. The voluntary exclusion from and waiver of the rights recognized in the applicable law shall be valid only if they do not conflict with the public interest or order or harm third parties.
3. Acts contrary to peremptory and prohibitive norms are null and void, unless they establish a different effect in the event of contravention.
4. Acts carried out under or contrary to the text of a rule that pursue a result prohibited by or contrary to the legal system shall be deemed to have been executed in the form of a fraud of law and shall not prevent the proper application of the rule that has been attempted to circumvent.
Article 7.
1. The rights must be exercised in accordance with the requirements of good faith.
2. The Act does not protect the abuse of the right or the antisocial exercise thereof. Any act or omission which, by the intention of the perpetrator, by its object or by the circumstances in which it is carried out, clearly exceeds the normal limits of the exercise of a right, with damage to the third party, shall result in compensation and the adoption of judicial or administrative measures that prevent the persistence of the abuse.
CHAPTER IV
Rules of private international law
Text added, published on 09/07/1974, in force from 29/07/1974.
Article 8.
1. Criminal, police and public security laws bind all those who are in Spanish territory.
Article 9.
1. The personal law applicable to natural persons is that determined by their nationality. This law shall govern the capacity and marital status, the rights and duties of the family and the succession by reason of death.
The change of personal law shall not affect the age of majority acquired in accordance with the previous personal law.
2. The effects of marriage shall be governed by the common personal law of the spouses at the time of the marriage; in the absence of this law, by the personal law or the habitual residence of either of them, chosen by both of them in authentic document issued before the marriage; in the absence of this choice, by the law of the common habitual residence immediately after the celebration, and, in the absence of such residence, by that of the place of marriage.
Invalidity, separation and divorce shall be governed by the law established by article 107.
3. Covenants or capitulations establishing, modifying or replacing the economic regime of marriage shall be valid if they are in conformity with the law governing the effects of marriage, either with the law of nationality or with the habitual residence of any of the parties at the time of the grant.
4. The determination and character of filiation by nature shall be governed by the law of the habitual residence of the child at the time of establishment of filiation. In the absence of the child ' s habitual residence, or if this law does not permit the establishment of filiation, the national law of the child shall apply at that time. If this law does not permit the establishment of filiation or if the child lacks habitual residence and nationality, the Spanish substantive law shall apply. As regards the establishment of filiation by adoption, paragraph 5 shall apply.
The law applicable to the content of filiation, by nature or by adoption, and the exercise of parental responsibility, shall be determined in accordance with the Hague Convention of 19 October 1996 on Jurisdiction, Applicable Law, Recognition, Enforcement and Cooperation in Respect of Parental Responsibility and Measures for the Protection of Children.
5. Intercountry adoption shall be governed by the rules contained in the Intercountry Adoption Act. Similarly, adoptions constituted by foreign authorities shall take effect in Spain in accordance with the provisions of the above-mentioned Law on Intercountry Adoption.
6. The law applicable to the protection of minors shall be determined in accordance with the Hague Convention of 19 October 1996 referred to in paragraph 4 of this Article.
The law applicable to support measures for persons with disabilities shall be that of their habitual residence. In the case of a change of residence to another State, the law of the new habitual residence shall apply, without prejudice to the recognition in Spain of the support measures agreed in other States. However, the Spanish law will apply to the adoption of temporary or urgent support measures.
7. The law applicable to maintenance obligations between relatives shall be determined in accordance with the Hague Protocol of 23 November 2007 on the law applicable to maintenance obligations or legal text replacing it.
8. Succession by death shall be governed by the National Law of the deceased at the time of his death, regardless of the nature of the property and the country in which it is located. However, the provisions made in the will and the succession agreements ordered under the National Law of the Testator or the Ensign at the time of their granting shall remain valid, even if the law governing the succession is another law, although the legitimate ones shall be in accordance with the latter, where appropriate. The rights conferred on the surviving spouse by the law shall be governed by the same law governing the effects of marriage, except in all cases that are legitimate to the descendants.
9. For the purposes of this chapter, in respect of the situations of dual nationality provided for in Spanish law, it is to be determined by international treaties, and, if they do not establish anything, nationality that coincides with the last habitual residence and, failing that, the last acquired nationality will be preferred.
In any case, Spanish nationality will prevail, and another nationality will prevail, which is not provided for in our laws or in international treaties. If you have two or more nationalities and none of them are Spanish, you will be at what the following paragraph states.
10. The law of the place of their habitual residence shall be considered as the personal law of those who lack nationality or have an indeterminate nationality.
11. The personal law applicable to legal persons is that determined by their nationality, and shall govern all matters relating to capacity, constitution, representation, operation, transformation, dissolution and extinction.
In the merger of companies of different nationality, the respective personal laws shall be taken into account.
Article 10.
1. Possession, ownership, and other rights to immovable property, as well as their publicity, shall be governed by the law of the place where they are located.
The same law shall apply to movable property.
For the purpose of the creation or assignment of rights in goods in transit, they shall be deemed to be located at the place of dispatch, unless the sender and the consignee have expressly or tacitly agreed that they are deemed to be located at the place of destination.
2. Ships, aircraft and means of transport by rail, as well as all rights established over them, shall be subject to the law of the place where they are flagged, registered or registered. Automobiles and other means of road transport shall be subject to the law of the place where they are located.
3. The issuance of securities shall be in accordance with the law of the place where it is produced.
4. Intellectual and industrial property rights shall be protected within Spanish territory in accordance with Spanish law, without prejudice to the provisions of international conventions and treaties to which Spain is a party.
5. The law to which the parties have expressly submitted themselves shall apply to contractual obligations, provided that it has any connection with the business in question; failing that, the national law common to the parties; in the absence of such law, the law of the common habitual residence; and, ultimately, the law of the place of conclusion of the contract.
Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding paragraph, in the absence of express submission, the law of the place where they are located shall apply to contracts relating to immovable property, and to the sale of tangible furniture in commercial establishments, the law of the place where they are located.
6. Obligations arising from the employment contract, in the absence of an express submission by the parties and without prejudice to Article 8(1), shall be subject to the law of the place where the services are provided.
7. Donations shall, in any event, be governed by the national law of the donor.
8. In contracts concluded between persons in Spain, natural persons who enjoy capacity under Spanish law may only invoke their disability resulting from the law of another country if, at the time of the conclusion of the contract, the other party had known or ignored such disability by virtue of negligence on its part.
9. Non-contractual obligations shall be governed by the law of the place where the event occurred.
Business management shall be regulated by the law of the place where the manager carries out the main activity.
The law under which the transfer of the value of wealth in favour of the enriched is carried out shall apply in the case of enrichment without cause.
10. The law regulating an obligation extends to the requirements of compliance and the consequences of non-compliance, as well as its termination. However, the law of the place of performance shall apply to the modalities of execution requiring judicial or administrative intervention.
11. Legal representation shall be subject to the law regulating the legal relationship from which the powers of the representative arise, and to the voluntary authority, if it is not expressly submitted, to the law of the country in which the powers conferred are exercised.
Article 11.
1. The forms and solemnities of contracts, wills and other legal acts shall be governed by the law of the country in which they are granted. However, those concluded in the forms and solemnities required by the law applicable to its content, as well as those concluded under the personal law of the landlord or the common law of the grantor, shall also be valid. Acts and contracts relating to immovable property granted in accordance with the forms and solemnities of the place where they are located shall also be valid.
If such acts are granted on board ships or aircraft during their navigation, they shall be deemed to be concluded in the country of their flag, registration or registration. Military vessels and aircraft are considered as part of the territory of the State to which they belong.
2. If the law regulating the content of the acts and contracts requires a certain form or solemnity for their validity, it shall always apply, even if those acts and contracts are granted abroad.
3. Spanish law shall apply to contracts, wills and other legal acts authorized by diplomatic or consular officials of Spain abroad.
Article 12.
1. The qualification for determining the applicable conflict rule shall always be made in accordance with Spanish law.
2. Referral to foreign law shall be deemed to be made to its material law, without regard to the referral that its conflict rules may make to any law other than the Spanish law.
3. Under no circumstances shall foreign law apply when it is contrary to public order.
4. The use of a conflict rule in order to circumvent a mandatory Spanish law shall be considered as a fraud of law.
5. Where a conflict rule refers to the law of a State in which different legislative systems coexist, the determination of which is applicable between them shall be made in accordance with the law of that State.
6. The courts and authorities shall apply the conflict rules of Spanish law ex officio.
CHAPTER V
Scope of application of the civil legal regimes coexisting in the national territory
Text added, published on 09/07/1974, in force from 29/07/1974.
Article 13.
1. The provisions of this preliminary title, insofar as they determine the effects of laws and general rules for their application, as well as those of Title IV of Book I, with the exception of the latter's rules concerning matrimonial property regime, will have general and direct application throughout Spain.
2. In addition, and with full respect for the special or foral rights of the provinces or territories in which they are in force, the Civil Code as a supplementary right, in the absence of the right in each of those according to its special rules.
Article 14.
1. Subjection to common civil law or special or foral law is determined by the civil neighbourhood.
2. They have a civil neighbourhood in common law territory, or in one of those of special or foral law, those born to parents who have such a neighbourhood.
By adoption, the non-emancipated adoptee acquires the civil neighbourhood of the adopters.
3. If at the birth of the child, or upon adoption, the parents have different civil neighbourhoods, the child shall have that corresponding to that of the two with respect to which the filiation has been determined before; failing that, the child shall have that of the place of birth and, ultimately, the common law neighbourhood.
However, the parents, or the parent who exercises or has been granted parental authority, may attribute to the child the civil neighbourhood of any of them until six months after birth or adoption.
Deprivation or suspension of parental authority, or the change of the parents ' neighbourhood, shall not affect the civil neighbourhood of the children.
In any case, the child from the age of fourteen and until one year after his emancipation may choose either the civil neighbourhood of the place of his birth or the last neighbourhood of any of his parents. If he is not emancipated, he must be assisted in the option by the legal representative.
4. Marriage does not alter the civil neighbourhood. However, any of the spouses who are not separated, whether legally or in fact, may at any time opt for the civilian neighbourhood of the other spouse.
5. The civil neighbourhood is acquired:
1. By continuous residence for two years, provided that the person concerned declares to be his will.
2. Per continuous residence of ten years, without statement to the contrary during this period.
Both statements shall be recorded in the Civil Registry and need not be repeated.
6. In case of doubt, the civil neighbourhood corresponding to the place of birth shall prevail.
Article 15.
1. An alien who acquires Spanish nationality shall, upon registration of the acquisition of nationality, opt for any of the following neighbourhoods:
(a) The place of residence.
(b) The place of birth.
(c) The last neighbourhood of either parent or adopter.
(d) The spouse ' s.
This declaration of option shall be made, as appropriate, by the elector himself, alone or with such support as the person with disabilities may require, or by his legal representative. Where the acquisition of nationality is made by declaration or at the request of the legal representative, the necessary authorization shall determine the civil neighbourhood to be chosen.
2. An alien who acquires nationality by letter of nature shall have the civil neighbourhood determined by the Royal Decree of concession, taking into account the option of the latter, in accordance with the provisions of the preceding paragraph or other circumstances prevailing with the petitioner.
3. The recovery of Spanish nationality carries with it that of that civil neighbourhood that the person concerned held at the time of his loss.
4. Personal dependence on a region or locality with its own or distinct civil speciality, within the special or external legislation of the relevant territory, shall be governed by the provisions of this article and those of the preceding article.
Article 16.
1. Conflicts of laws that may arise from the coexistence of different civil laws in the national territory shall be resolved according to the rules contained in chapter IV with the following particularities:
1.a Personal law shall be the law determined by the civil neighbourhood.
2.a Article 12(1), (2) and (3) on qualification, referral and public policy shall not apply.
2. The right of widowhood regulated in the Aragonese Compilation belongs to the spouses subject to the matrimonial property regime of the said Compilation, even if they later change their civil neighbourhood, excluding in this case the legitimate one established by the successor law.
The prospective right of widowhood may not oppose the acquirer for a consideration and in good faith of property which does not reside in territory where such right is recognized, if the contract has been concluded outside that territory, without having stated the matrimonial property regime of the transferee.
The widow's usufruct also belongs to the surviving spouse when the pre-dead had Aragonese civilian neighbourhood at the time of his death.
3. The effects of marriage between Spaniards shall be regulated by Spanish law which is applicable in accordance with the criteria of Article 9 and, failing that, by Civil Code.
In the latter case, the system of separation of assets from the Civil Code if a system of separation was to be governed by one and the other personal law of the contracting parties.
BOOK FIRST
People
TITLE I
From Spanish and foreigners
Article 17.
1. They are Spanish of origin:
(a) Those born to a Spanish father or mother.
(b) Those born in Spain to foreign parents if at least one of them was also born in Spain. The children of a diplomatic or consular official accredited in Spain are excluded.
(c) Those born in Spain of foreign parents, if both are without nationality or if the legislation of neither of them confers a nationality on the child.
(d) Those born in Spain whose filiation is not determined. For this purpose, minors whose first known place of stay is Spanish territory are presumed to have been born in Spanish territory.
2. Filiation or birth in Spain, the determination of which occurs after the age of eighteen, is not by itself a reason for acquiring Spanish nationality. The person concerned is then entitled to opt for Spanish nationality of origin within two years of that determination.
Article 18.
The possession and continued use of Spanish nationality for ten years, in good faith and based on a title entered in the Civil Registry, is a cause of consolidation of nationality, although the title that originated it is annulled.
Article 19.
1. An alien under the age of eighteen who has been adopted by a Spanish national has acquired Spanish nationality of origin since adoption.
2. If the adopted person is more than eighteen years of age, he may opt for Spanish nationality of origin within two years of the adoption.
3. Without prejudice to paragraph 1, if, in accordance with the legal system of the country of origin, the adopted child retains his or her nationality, he or she shall also be recognised in Spain.
Article 20.
1. They have the right to choose Spanish nationality:
(a) Persons who are or have been subject to the parental authority of a Spanish citizen.
(b) Those whose father or mother was originally Spanish and was born in Spain.
(c) Those falling within the second subparagraph of Articles 17 and 19.
2. The choice statement shall be made:
(a) By the legal representative of the elector under fourteen years of age. In the event of a discrepancy between the legal representatives of a child under fourteen years of age on the processing of the declaration of option, the voluntary jurisdiction file provided for this purpose shall be processed.
(b) The person concerned, assisted by his legal representative, if he is over fourteen years of age.
(c) By the person concerned, alone, if he or she is emancipated or over eighteen years of age. The option will expire at twenty years of age, but if the elector is not emancipated according to his personal law at the age of eighteen, the period of eligibility will be extended until two years from emancipation.
(d) By the person with disabilities with any procedural support and adjustments that may be required.
(e) The person concerned alone within two years of the termination of support measures which would have prevented him from exercising it previously.
3. By way of derogation from the preceding subparagraph, the exercise of the right of option provided for in paragraph 1(b) of this Article shall not be subject to any age limit.
Article 21.
1. Spanish nationality is acquired by letter of nature, granted at the discretion of Royal Decree, when exceptional circumstances occur in the person concerned.
2. Spanish nationality is also acquired by residence in Spain, under the conditions set out in the following article and by the concession granted by the Minister of Justice, which may deny it on reasoned grounds of public order or national interest.
3. In either case, the request may be made by:
(a) An emancipated person or person over eighteen years of age.
(b) A person over fourteen years of age assisted by his legal representative.
(c) The legal representative of a child under fourteen years of age. In the event of a discrepancy between the legal representatives on the application for nationality by residence, the file of voluntary jurisdiction provided for in this regard shall be processed.
(d) The person with disabilities with the procedural support and adjustments that may be required.
In this case and in the previous case, the legal representative may make the application only if he has previously obtained authorisation in accordance with the provisions of Article 2(2)(a).
4. Concessions by letter of nature or by residence expire one hundred and eighty days after their notification, if the person concerned does not appear before an official competent to comply with the requirements of Article 23.
Article 22.
1. The granting of nationality by residence requires a period of 10 years. Five years will be sufficient for those who have obtained refugee status and two years for nationals of origin from Ibero-American countries, Andorra, Equatorial Guinea, the Philippines or Portugal or Sephardic countries.
2. The one-year residence time will be sufficient for:
(a) A person born in Spanish territory.
(b) Those who have not exercised the option in a timely manner.
(c) Anyone who has been legally subject to guardianship, curatorship with full representation, guardianship or care of a Spanish citizen or institution for two consecutive years, even if he continues in this situation at the time of the application.
(d) A person who, at the time of the application, has been married to Spanish or Spanish and is not legally or de facto separated.
(e) A widow or widower of Spanish or Spanish, if there is no legal or de facto separation upon the death of the spouse.
(f) The child born outside Spain to a father or mother, grandfather or grandmother, who originally had been Spanish.
3. In all cases, the residence must be legal, continuous and immediately prior to the request.
For the purposes of paragraph (d) of the preceding subparagraph, a spouse living together with a Spanish diplomatic or consular official accredited abroad shall be deemed to have legal residence in Spain.
4. The person concerned must justify, in the file regulated by the law of the Civil Registry, good civic conduct and sufficient degree of integration into Spanish society.
5. The granting or refusal of nationality by residence leaves the judicial, administrative and contentious procedure safe.
Article 23.
Common requirements for the validity of the acquisition of Spanish nationality by choice, letter of nature or residence are:
(a) That the person over fourteen years of age and capable of making a declaration by himself shall swear or promise allegiance to the King and obedience to the Constitution and the law.
(b) The same person declares that he renounces his previous nationality. The nationals of countries referred to in Article 24(1) and Sephardis originating in Spain shall be protected from this requirement.
(c) The acquisition is registered in the Spanish Civil Registry.
Article 24.
1. Emancipated persons who, habitually residing abroad, voluntarily acquire another nationality or exclusively use foreign nationality that they had assigned prior to emancipation, lose Spanish nationality. The loss will occur after three years, respectively, from the acquisition of foreign nationality or from emancipation. However, the persons concerned may avoid loss if within the time limit indicated they declare their willingness to retain Spanish nationality to the registrar.
The acquisition of the nationality of Ibero-American countries, Andorra, Equatorial Guinea, the Philippines or Portugal is not enough to result in the loss of the Spanish nationality of origin under this subparagraph.
2. In any case, emancipated Spaniards who expressly renounce Spanish nationality lose their Spanish nationality, if they have another nationality and habitually reside abroad.
3. Those who, having been born and residing abroad, have Spanish nationality because they are children of a Spanish father or mother, also born abroad, when the laws of the country where they reside attribute the nationality of the same, will in any case lose Spanish nationality if they do not declare their willingness to keep it before the registrar within three years, starting from their majority or emancipation.
4. Spanish nationality is not lost under this provision if Spain is at war.
Take into account the Convention on Nationality between the Kingdom of Spain and the French Republic, done at Montauban on 15 March 2021, Ref. BOE-A-2022-4916as well as the Instruction of 31 March 2022 of the Directorate-General for Legal Security and Public Faith, agreeing on the criteria for the application of the Convention on Nationality between the Kingdom of Spain and the French Republic. Ref. BOE-A-2022-5573
For the purposes of paragraph 3, take into account additional provision 2 of the Act.
Article 25.
1. Spaniards who are not of origin shall lose their nationality:
(a) When, for a period of three years, they use exclusively the nationality to which they have declared that they have renounced upon acquiring Spanish nationality.
(b) When voluntarily entering the service of arms or exercising political office in a foreign State against the express prohibition of the Government.
2. A final judgment declaring that the person concerned has committed falseness, concealment or fraud in the acquisition of Spanish nationality results in the nullity of such acquisition, although no harmful effects on bona fide third parties will arise therefrom. An action for annulment must be brought by the Public Prosecutor's Office on its own initiative or by way of a complaint within 15 years.
Article 26.
1. A person who has lost Spanish nationality may recover it by fulfilling the following requirements:
(a) Be a legal resident in Spain. This requirement shall not apply to migrants or children of migrants. In other cases, it may be waived by the Minister of Justice in exceptional circumstances.
(b) To declare before the registrar his will to recover Spanish nationality.
(c) To register recovery in the Civil Registry.
2. They may not recover or acquire, if necessary, Spanish nationality without prior authorization granted at the discretion of the Government, those who are in any of the situations provided for in the preceding article.
Take into account the Convention on Nationality between the Kingdom of Spain and the French Republic, done at Montauban on 15 March 2021, Ref. BOE-A-2022-4916as well as the Instruction of 31 March 2022 of the Directorate-General for Legal Security and Public Faith, agreeing on the criteria for the application of the Convention on Nationality between the Kingdom of Spain and the French Republic. Ref. BOE-A-2022-5573
Article 27
Foreigners in Spain enjoy the same civil rights as Spaniards, except as provided for in special laws and treaties.
Article 28.
Corporations, foundations and associations, recognized by law and domiciled in Spain, shall enjoy Spanish nationality, provided that they have the concept of legal persons in accordance with the provisions of this Code.
Associations domiciled abroad shall have the consideration and rights determined by special treaties or laws in Spain.
TITLE II
From the birth and extinction of the civilian personality
CHAPTER I
Natural persons
Article 29.
The birth determines the personality; but the conceived one is considered to be born for all the effects that are favorable to him, provided that it is born with the conditions expressed in the following article.
Article 30.
Personality is acquired at the time of life birth, once it produces the entire detachment of the mother's womb.
Article 31.
The priority of birth, in the case of double births, gives the first child the rights recognized by law to the firstborn.
Article 32.
The civilian personality is extinguished by the death of people.
Article 33.
If it is doubted, between two or more people called to succeed, who of them has died first, who sustains the previous death of one or another, must prove it; in the absence of proof, they are presumed dead at the same time and there is no transfer of rights from one to another.
Article 34.
With regard to the presumption of death of the absent person and its effects, it will be subject to the provisions of Title VIII of this book.
CHAPTER II
Legal persons
Article 35.
They are legal persons:
1. Corporations, associations and foundations of public interest recognized by law.
His personality begins from the very moment when, according to law, they were validly constituted.
2. Associations of particular interest, whether civil, commercial or industrial, to which the law grants their own personality, independent of that of each of the partners.
Article 36.
The associations referred to in number 2 of the preceding article shall be governed by the provisions relating to the contract of company, depending on the nature of the contract.
Article 37.
The civil capacity of corporations shall be regulated by the laws which they have created or recognized; that of associations by their statutes; and that of foundations by the rules of their institution, duly approved by administrative provision, when this requirement is necessary.
Article 38
Legal persons may acquire and possess property of all kinds, as well as enter into obligations and pursue civil or criminal actions, in accordance with the laws and rules of their constitution.
The Church will be governed at this point by the agreement between the two powers, and the establishments of instruction and beneficence according to the special laws.
Article 39.
If, because the period during which they functioned legally or because they had fulfilled the purpose for which they were constituted, or because it was already impossible to apply to it the activity and means at their disposal, corporations, associations and foundations cease to function, their property shall be given the application that the laws, or the statutes, or the founding clauses, would have given them in this assigned forecast. If nothing has been established previously, those assets shall be applied to the realization of similar purposes, in the interest of the region, province or municipality which should primarily collect the benefits of the extinguished institutions.
TITLE III
From the home
Article 40.
For the exercise of rights and the fulfilment of civil obligations, the domicile of natural persons is the place of their habitual residence, and, where appropriate, the place of residence determined by Civil Procedure Act.
The domicile of diplomats residing on account of their position abroad, who enjoy the right of extraterritoriality, shall be the last that they have had in Spanish territory.
Article 41.
Where neither the law which created or recognized them nor the statutes or the rules of foundation fix the domicile of legal persons, it shall be understood that they have it in the place where their legal representation is established, or where they exercise the principal functions of their institute.
TITLE IV
Marriage
CHAPTER I
From the promise of marriage
Article 42.
The promise of marriage does not result in an obligation to enter into marriage or to fulfil what was stipulated for the event of its non-celebration.
The application for compliance shall not be admissible.
Article 43.
Failure without cause to fulfil a certain promise of marriage made by an adult or an emancipated minor will only result in an obligation to compensate the other party for the expenses incurred and obligations incurred in consideration of the promised marriage.
This action shall expire in the year counted from the day of the refusal to celebrate the marriage.
CHAPTER II
The requirements of marriage
Text added, published on 20/07/1981, in force from 09/08/1981.
Article 44.
Every person has the right to enter into marriage under the provisions of this Code.
Marriage shall have the same requirements and effects when both parties are of the same or of different sex.
Article 45.
There is no marriage without marriage consent.
The condition, term or mode of consent shall be deemed not to be given.
Article 46.
They may not marry:
1. Unemancipated minors.
2. Those who are linked with a marriage bond.
Article 47.
Nor can they enter into marriage with one another:
1. Relatives in a straight line by blood or adoption.
2. Collaterals by consanguinity until third grade.
3. Convicted persons for having participated in the wrongful death of the spouse or person with whom he or she would have been bound by a similar relationship of affection to the conjugal.
Article 48.
The judge may, with due cause and at the request of a party, by means of a preliminary decision issued in the file of voluntary jurisdiction, dispense the impediments to the wrongful death of the spouse or person with whom he or she had been bound by a similar relationship of affection to the conjugal and third-degree kinship between collaterals. The subsequent waiver is valid, since its conclusion, for a marriage whose nullity has not been ordered by a court.
CHAPTER III
The way in which marriage is celebrated
Text added, published on 20/07/1981, in force from 09/08/1981.
Section 1.a General provisions
Text added, published on 20/07/1981, in force from 09/08/1981.
Article 49.
Any Spaniard may enter into marriage within or outside Spain:
1. In the manner regulated by this Code.
2. In the religious form legally provided.
It may also enter into marriage outside Spain in accordance with the manner established by the law of the place of celebration.
This amendment enters into force on the date of the full entry into force of Law 20/2011 of 21 July 2011 on the Civil Registry Ref. BOE-A-2011-12628, as set out in the final provision 21.3 of Law 15/2015, in the wording given by Law 4/2017, of 28 June. Ref. BOE-A-2017-7483
Article 50.
If both spouses are foreigners, the marriage may take place in Spain in accordance with the form prescribed for the Spaniards or in compliance with that established by the personal law of either of them.
Section 2.ª The celebration of marriage
Text added, published on 20/07/1981, in force from 09/08/1981.
Article 51.
1. The competence to verify by record or record the compliance with the requirements of the capacity of both parties and the absence of impediments or their exemption, or any kind of obstacles to entering into marriage, shall be vested in the judicial, notary or registrar of the place of residence of one of the parties or the diplomatic or consular officer in charge of the civil registry if they reside abroad.
2. The following shall be competent to celebrate the marriage:
1. The mayor of the municipality where the marriage or councillor is celebrated to whom the marriage delegates.
2. The court or notary Secretary freely chosen by both parties who are competent at the place of celebration.
3. The diplomatic or consular official in charge of the civil registry abroad.
This amendment enters into force on the date of the full entry into force of Law 20/2011 of 21 July 2011 on the Civil Registry Ref. BOE-A-2011-12628, as set out in the final provision 21.3 of Law 15/2015, in the wording given by Law 4/2017, of 28 June. Ref. BOE-A-2017-7483
Article 52.
They may celebrate the marriage of a person in danger of death:
1. The Mayor or Councillor to whom he delegates, counsel or counsel from the Administration of Justice, notary or notary, or official personnel referred to in article 51.
2. The immediate Officer or Chief of Staff in respect of the military in the field.
3. The Captain or Commander in respect of marriages on board a ship or aircraft.
Marriage in danger of death shall not require for its conclusion the prior processing of the marriage record or record, but the presence, at its conclusion, of two adult witnesses and, where the danger of death results from illness or physical condition of any of the contracting parties, a medical opinion as to their ability to give consent and the gravity of the situation, unless it is impossible to prove it, without prejudice to the provisions of article 65.
This amendment enters into force on the date of the full entry into force of Law 20/2011 of 21 July 2011 on the Civil Registry Ref. BOE-A-2011-12628, as set out in the final provision 21.3 of Law 15/2015, in the wording given by Law 4/2017, of 28 June. Ref. BOE-A-2017-7483
Article 53.
The validity of the marriage shall not be affected by the incompetence or non-appointment of the Mayor, Councillor, lawyer or lawyer of the Administration of Justice, notary or notary, or official staff to whom it is held, provided that at least one of the spouses has acted in good faith and those who perform their duties publicly.
This amendment enters into force on the date of the full entry into force of Law 20/2011 of 21 July 2011 on the Civil Registry Ref. BOE-A-2011-12628, as set out in the final provision 21.3 of Law 15/2015, in the wording given by Law 4/2017, of 28 June. Ref. BOE-A-2017-7483
Article 54.
In the event of a sufficiently substantiated serious case, the Minister of Justice may authorize secret marriage. In this case, the file shall be processed in a reserved manner, without publication of edicts or proclamations.
Article 55.
One of the spouses may enter into marriage by proxy, to whom he shall have granted special power in a genuine manner, and the personal assistance of the other contracting party is always necessary.
The power of attorney shall determine the person with whom the marriage is to take place, with the expression of the personal circumstances necessary to establish his or her identity, and the validity of his or her validity shall be assessed by the judicial secretary, notary, registrar or civil servant who processes the marriage record or record prior to the marriage.
Power shall be extinguished by the revocation of the power of attorney, by the resignation of the proxy or by the death of any of them. In the event of revocation by the power of attorney, their manifestation in authentic form shall be sufficient before the celebration of the marriage. The revocation shall be immediately notified to the judicial secretary, notary, registrar or civil servant who processes the act or record prior to marriage, and if the person who is to perform it is already completed.
This amendment enters into force on the date of the full entry into force of Law 20/2011 of 21 July 2011 on the Civil Registry Ref. BOE-A-2011-12628, as set out in the final provision 21.3 of Law 15/2015, in the wording given by Law 4/2017, of 28 June. Ref. BOE-A-2017-7483
Article 56.
Those wishing to enter into marriage shall first prove in the record or record processed in accordance with the law of the Civil Registry, that they meet the requirements of capacity or the absence of impediments or their exemption, in accordance with the provisions of this Code.
The Legal Counsel of the Administration of Justice, Notary, in charge of the Civil Registry or official processing the record or file, when necessary, may seek from the Administrations or entities of social initiative for the promotion and protection of the rights of persons with disabilities, the provision of human, technical and material support to facilitate the issuance, interpretation and receipt of the consent of the contracting party. Only in the exceptional case where one of the parties presents a health condition which, clearly, categorically and substantially, may prevent him from giving consent to marriage despite the support measures, shall a medical opinion be sought as to his ability to give consent.
This amendment enters into force on the date of the full entry into force of Law 20/2011 of 21 July 2011 on the Civil Registry Ref. BOE-A-2011-12628, as set out in the final provision 21.3 of Law 15/2015, in the wording given by Law 4/2017, of 28 June. Ref. BOE-A-2017-7483
Article 57.
A marriage processed by the lawyer or lawyer of the Administration of Justice or by consular or diplomatic staff may be held before the same or other person, or before the mayor or councillor to whom he delegates, at the choice of the spouses. If the marriage has been processed by the registrar or registrar, the marriage must be held before the mayor or councillor to whom the council delegate designates the parties.
Finally, if the notary or notary has issued the marriage certificate, the contracting parties may give consent, at their choice, to the same notary or notary or other than the one who has processed the previous act, Mayor or Councillor to whom he delegates.
This amendment enters into force on the date of the full entry into force of Law 20/2011 of 21 July 2011 on the Civil Registry Ref. BOE-A-2011-12628, as set out in the final provision 21.3 of Law 15/2015, in the wording given by Law 4/2017, of 28 June. Ref. BOE-A-2017-7483
Article 58.
The mayor, councillor, lawyer or lawyer of the Administration of Justice, notary or notary, or official staff, after reading articles 66, 67 and 68, shall ask each of the spouses whether he consents to marry the other and if he does in fact marry the other and, in response to both of them, shall declare that they are united in marriage and shall extend the act or authorize the corresponding deed.
This amendment enters into force on the date of the full entry into force of Law 20/2011 of 21 July 2011 on the Civil Registry Ref. BOE-A-2011-12628, as set out in the final provision 21.3 of Law 15/2015, in the wording given by Law 4/2017, of 28 June. Ref. BOE-A-2017-7483
Section 3.a of the celebration in religious form
Text added, published on 20/07/1981, in force from 09/08/1981.
Article 59.
Matrimonial consent may be given in the manner provided for by a registered religious denomination, in accordance with the terms agreed with the State or, failing that, authorized by its law.
Article 60.
1. Marriage concluded in accordance with the rules of canon law or in any of the other religious forms provided for in the cooperation agreements between the State and religious denominations produces civil effects.
2. Civil effects are also recognized when a marriage is celebrated in the religious form provided for by the churches, denominations, religious communities or federations which, registered in the Register of Religious Entities, have obtained the recognition of a notorious root in Spain.
In this case, recognition of civil effects will require compliance with the following requirements:
(a) The processing of a prior record or record of matrimonial capacity in accordance with the rules of the Civil Registry.
(b) Free expression of consent before a duly accredited minister of worship and two adult witnesses.
The status of minister of worship shall be accredited by certification issued by the church, confession or religious community which has obtained recognition as a notorious arraigo in Spain, with the agreement of the federation which, if any, has applied for such recognition.
3. For the full recognition of the civil effects of a marriage celebrated in religious form, the following Chapter shall be provided for.
CHAPTER IV
Registration of marriage in the Civil Registry
Text added, published on 20/07/1981, in force from 09/08/1981.
Article 61.
Marriage has had civil effects since its celebration.
Full recognition of these will require their registration in the Civil Registry.
Unregistered marriage shall not prejudice the rights acquired in good faith by third parties.
Article 62.
The celebration of the marriage shall be recorded by public record or deed, signed by the person before whom it is celebrated, the spouses and two witnesses.
With the act or authorization of the public deed, a copy of the marriage will be sent by the authorizing officer to the competent civil registry for registration, subject to a qualification by the registrar.
This amendment enters into force on the date of the full entry into force of Law 20/2011 of 21 July 2011 on the Civil Registry Ref. BOE-A-2011-12628, as set out in the final provision 21.3 of Law 15/2015, in the wording given by Law 4/2017, of 28 June. Ref. BOE-A-2017-7483
Article 63.
The registration of a marriage celebrated in Spain in religious form shall be carried out with the simple presentation of the certification of the church, or confession, religious community or respective federation, which shall express the circumstances required by the law of the Civil Registry.
The practice of entry shall be refused if the documents submitted or the entries in the Register show that the marriage does not meet the requirements for its validity required by this Title.
Article 64.
For the recognition of a secret marriage, registration in the special book of the Central Civil Registry is sufficient, but it will not prejudice the rights acquired in good faith by third parties but since its publication in the ordinary Civil Registry.
Article 65.
In cases where the marriage has been concluded without the relevant record or prior record being processed, if necessary, the judicial secretary, notary, or the diplomatic or consular officer in charge of the civil registry who conducted the marriage, before carrying out the relevant registration proceedings, shall verify whether the legal requirements for its validity are met, by processing the record or record referred to in this article.
If the conclusion of the marriage has been carried out before a competent authority or person other than those referred to in the preceding paragraph, the minutes of the marriage shall be sent to the registrar of the place of celebration in order to verify the requirements of validity, by means of the relevant file. After such verification, the Registrar shall register the matter.
This amendment enters into force on the date of the full entry into force of Law 20/2011 of 21 July 2011 on the Civil Registry Ref. BOE-A-2011-12628, as set out in the final provision 21.3 of Law 15/2015, in the wording given by Law 4/2017, of 28 June. Ref. BOE-A-2017-7483
CHAPTER V
The rights and duties of spouses
Text added, published on 20/07/1981, in force from 09/08/1981.
Article 66.
Spouses are equal in rights and duties.
Article 67.
Spouses must respect and assist each other and act in the interest of the family.
Article 68.
Spouses are obliged to live together, to keep fidelity and to help each other. They shall also share domestic responsibilities and care and care for ascendants and descendants and other dependants.
Article 69.
It is presumed, unless there is proof otherwise, that the spouses live together.
Article 70.
The spouses shall determine by mutual agreement the matrimonial domicile and, in the event of disagreement, the judge shall decide, taking into account the interests of the family.
Article 71.
Neither of the spouses can be attributed the representation of the other without having been conferred on him.
Article 72.
(Deleted)
CHAPTER VI
The nullity of marriage
Text added, published on 20/07/1981, in force from 09/08/1981.
Article 73.
It is null and void whatever the form of its celebration:
1. Marriage concluded without marriage consent.
2. Marriage between the persons referred to in articles 46 and 47, except in cases of dispensation under article 48.
3. Any person who contracts without the intervention of the Mayor or Councillor, lawyer or lawyer of the Administration of Justice, notary or notary, or official personnel to whom it is to be held, or without that of witnesses.
4. The person who is wrongly held in the identity of the other person or in those personal qualities which, by their entity, have been decisive for the provision of consent.
5.o The contracted by coercion or serious fear.
This amendment enters into force on the date of the full entry into force of Law 20/2011 of 21 July 2011 on the Civil Registry Ref. BOE-A-2011-12628, as set out in the final provision 21.3 of Law 15/2015, in the wording given by Law 4/2017, of 28 June. Ref. BOE-A-2017-7483
Article 74.
The action for annulment of marriage is the responsibility of the spouses, the Public Prosecutor ' s Office and any person who has a direct and legitimate interest in marriage, except as provided in the following articles.
Article 75.
If the cause of invalidity is a lack of age, the minor is a minor, only any of his parents, guardians or guardians and, in any case, the Public Prosecutor ' s Office may bring proceedings.
Upon reaching the age of majority, only the minor contracting party may bring an action, unless the spouses have lived together for one year after the age of majority.
Article 76.
In cases of error, coercion or serious fear, only a spouse who has suffered the vice may institute an action for annulment.
The action lapses and the marriage is validated if the spouses had lived together for one year after the error disappeared or the force or cause of fear ceased.
Article 77.
(Deleted)
Article 78.
The judge shall not agree to the nullity of a marriage by default if at least one of the spouses entered into it in good faith, except as provided for in article 73 (3).
Article 79.
The declaration of nullity of the marriage shall not invalidate the effects already produced with respect to the children and the contracting party or parties in good faith.
Good faith is presumed.
Article 80.
Decisions rendered by ecclesiastical courts on the annulment of canonical marriage or pontifical decisions on marriage for a long time and not completed shall be effective in civil order, at the request of either party, if they are declared in accordance with the law of the State in a decision issued by the competent civil court in accordance with the conditions referred to in Article 954 of the Constitution. Civil Procedure Act.
CHAPTER VII
From separation
Text added, published on 20/07/1981, in force from 09/08/1981.
Article 81.
Separation shall be ordered by court if there are unemancipated minor children or older children in respect of whom legal support measures attributed to their parents have been established, regardless of the form of marriage:
1. At the request of both spouses or one with the consent of the other, after three months after the marriage. The application shall be accompanied by a proposal for a regulatory agreement drawn up in accordance with Article 90 of this Code.
2. At the request of only one of the spouses, three months after the marriage. The length of this period shall not be required for the filing of the application where it is established that there is a risk to the life, physical integrity, liberty, moral integrity or sexual freedom and compensation of the claimant spouse or of the children of both or of any of the members of the marriage.
The application shall be accompanied by a well-founded proposal for measures to regulate the effects of separation.
Article 82.
1. The spouses may agree to their separation by mutual agreement three months after the conclusion of the marriage by means of a regulatory agreement before the legal counsel of the Administration of Justice or in a public deed before Notary, in which, together with the unequivocal will to separate, they shall determine the measures to regulate the effects of the separation in the terms set out in Article 90. Diplomatic or consular officials, in the exercise of their assigned notary functions, may not authorize the public deed of separation.
Spouses must intervene in the granting of the contract in a personal manner, without prejudice to the fact that they must be assisted by acting counsel, giving their consent to the counsel of the Administration of Justice or notary. Also, the elderly or emancipated children must give consent to the legal counsel of the Administration of Justice or Notary regarding measures that affect them because they lack their own income and live together in the family home.
2. The provisions of this article shall not apply where there are children in the situation referred to in the preceding article.
Article 83.
The judgement or decree of separation or the granting of the public deed of the regulatory agreement that determines it results in the suspension of the common life of the married and ceases the possibility of linking property of the other spouse in the exercise of domestic power.
The effects of marriage separation shall occur from the finality of the judgment or decree declaring it or from the expression of the consent of both spouses granted in public deed in accordance with article 82. Testimony of the sentence or decree, or copy of the public deed, shall be transmitted to the Civil Registry for registration, without the fact that, until such time as it takes place, full effect shall be produced against bona fide third parties.
Article 84.
Reconciliation terminates the separation procedure and renders the decision in it ineffective, but both spouses separately must bring it to the attention of the judge who understands or understands the dispute. However, by court decision, the measures taken in relation to the children shall be maintained or modified, where there is a case to justify it.
Where separation has taken place without judicial intervention, in the manner provided for in article 82, reconciliation shall be formalised in public deed or in the act of demonstrations.
Reconciliation must be registered in the relevant Civil Registry for third-party effectiveness.
CHAPTER VIII
The dissolution of marriage
Text added, published on 20/07/1981, in force from 09/08/1981.
Article 85.
Marriage is dissolved, regardless of the form and time of its celebration, by the death or declaration of death of one of the spouses and by divorce.
Article 86.
Divorce, whatever the form of the marriage, shall be ordered by a court at the request of only one of the spouses, both of them or one with the consent of the other, where the requirements and circumstances required by article 81 are met.
Article 87.
The spouses may also agree to divorce by mutual agreement by formulating a regulatory agreement before the judicial secretary or in public deed before the notary, in the form and content of article 82, the same requirements and circumstances as are required by it. Diplomatic or consular officials, in the exercise of their assigned notary functions, may not authorize a public deed of divorce.
Article 88.
The divorce action is extinguished by the death of either spouse and by his reconciliation, which must be expressed when it occurs after the application has been filed.
Reconciliation after divorce has no legal effect, although divorced persons may enter into a new marriage with each other.
Article 89.
The effects of the dissolution of the marriage by divorce shall occur from the finality of the judgment or decree declaring it or from the expression of the consent of both spouses granted in public deed in accordance with article 87. It shall not prejudice third parties in good faith except on the basis of their respective registration in the Civil Registry.
CHAPTER IX
From the effects common to nullity, separation and divorce
Text added, published on 20/07/1981, in force from 09/08/1981.
Article 90.
1. The regulatory agreement referred to in Articles 81, 82, 83, 86 and 87 shall contain, at least and where applicable, the following points:
(a) The care of children subject to parental authority, the exercise of parental authority and, where appropriate, the regime of communication and stay of children with the parent who does not normally live with them.
(b) If deemed necessary, the regime of visits and communication of grandchildren with their grandparents, taking into account, always, their interests.
(b) bis The destination of pet animals, if they exist, taking into account the interest of family members and the welfare of the animal; the sharing of the times of coexistence and care if necessary, as well as the burdens associated with the care of the animal.
(c) The allocation of the use of housing and family troweling.
(d) The contribution to the burden of marriage and maintenance, as well as the basis for updating and guarantees as appropriate.
(e) Settlement, where appropriate, of the property regime of marriage.
(f) The pension to be paid, if any, to one of the spouses under article 97.
2. The agreement of the spouses adopted to regulate the consequences of the nullity, separation and divorce presented to the judicial body shall be approved by the judge unless they are harmful to the children or seriously harmful to one of the spouses.
If they are seriously detrimental to the welfare of pet animals, the judicial authority shall order the measures to be taken, without prejudice to the approved agreement.
If the parties propose a regime of visits and communication of the grandchildren with the grandparents, the judge may approve it at the hearing of the grandparents in which they give their consent. The refusal of the agreements must be made by reasoned decision and in this case the spouses must submit, for the consideration of the judge, a new proposal for approval, if appropriate.
Where the spouses formalize the agreements before the counsel of the Administration of Justice or notary and they consider that, in their opinion, any of them could be harmful or seriously harmful to one of the spouses or to the elderly or emancipated children affected, or seriously detrimental to the welfare of the pets, they shall notify the grantors and terminate the file. In this case, the spouses may only appeal to the judge for approval of the proposal for a regulatory agreement.
Since the adoption of the regulatory agreement or the granting of the public instrument, the agreements may be implemented by means of an urgent procedure.
3. The measures which the judge takes in the absence of agreement or those agreed by the spouses may be amended by a court or by a new agreement approved by the judge, where this is advised by the new needs of the children or the change of the circumstances of the spouses.
The convention may also be amended or the measures on pet animals may be amended if their circumstances have been seriously altered.
Measures that have been agreed to before the counsel of the Administration of Justice or in public deed may be amended by a new agreement, subject to the same requirements as those laid down in this Code.
4. The judge or the parties may establish the security or personal rights required by the agreement.
Article 91.
In decisions of nullity, separation or divorce, or in execution thereof, the judicial authority shall, failing the agreement of the spouses or in the event of their non-approval, determine in accordance with the following articles the measures to be taken to replace those already adopted in relation to the children, the family home, the destination of the pets, the burdens of marriage, the liquidation of the economic regime and the respective safeguards or safeguards, establishing those that apply if none of these concepts has been adopted for any of these purposes. These measures may be amended where circumstances are substantially altered.
Where, at the time of invalidity, separation or divorce, there were common children over 16 years of age who were in a position to require support measures on the basis of their disability, the relevant judgement, after hearing the minor, shall also rule on the establishment and manner of their exercise, which, where appropriate, shall enter into force when the child reaches the age of eighteen years. In such cases, the right to appeal, the special features of the evidence and the content of the judgment shall be governed by the provisions of the Civil Procedure Act on the judicial provision of support measures for persons with disabilities.
Article 92.
1. Separation, nullity and divorce do not relieve parents of their obligations towards children.
2. When the judge is required to take any measure concerning the custody, care and education of minor children, he or she shall ensure that his or her right to be heard is fulfilled and shall issue a reasoned decision in the best interests of the minor on this matter.
3. The judgement shall agree to the deprivation of parental rights when the proceedings reveal cause for the deprivation of parental rights.
4. The parents may agree in the regulatory agreement or the judge may decide, for the benefit of the children, that parental authority shall be exercised in whole or in part by one of the spouses.
5. The sharing of custody of children shall be agreed upon when requested by the parents in the proposal for a regulatory agreement or when both parents reach this agreement in the course of the proceedings.
6. In any event, before agreeing to the custody and custody regime, the judge shall seek a report from the Public Prosecutor's Office, hear minors who have sufficient trial when deemed necessary ex officio or at the request of the Prosecutor, the parties or members of the Judicial Technical Team, or of the minor himself, and assess the arguments of the parties, the evidence given, and the relationship between the parents and their children to determine their suitability with the custody regime.
7. Joint custody shall not be exercised when either parent is in criminal proceedings initiated for attempting to infringe upon the life, physical integrity, liberty, moral integrity or sexual freedom and compensation of the other spouse or of the children living together with them. It shall also not proceed when the judge warns of the allegations of the parties and the evidence given, the existence of well-founded evidence of domestic or gender-based violence. The existence of or threat of animal abuse as a means of controlling or victimizing any of these persons shall also be appreciated for this purpose.
8. Exceptionally, even if the circumstances of paragraph 5 of this article are not fulfilled, the judge may, at the request of one of the parties, with a report from the Public Prosecutor's Office, agree on custody and joint custody on the grounds that only in this way is the best interests of the child adequately protected.
9. Before taking any of the decisions referred to in the preceding paragraphs, the judge may, ex officio or at the request of a party, the prosecutor or members of the judicial technical team, or of the minor himself, seek the opinion of duly qualified specialists concerning the suitability of the manner of exercising parental authority and the custody regime of minors in order to ensure their best interests.
10. The judge shall adopt, by duly agreeing on the rules governing custody and custody, as well as the rules governing stay, relationship and communication, the necessary, appropriate and appropriate precautions for the effective implementation of the established regimes, with a view not to separating the brothers and sisters.
Article 93.
In any event, the judge shall determine the contribution of each parent to the maintenance and shall take appropriate measures to ensure the effectiveness and accommodation of the benefits to the economic circumstances and needs of the children at any time.
If the family home is home to children who have reached the age of majority or are emancipated and who have no income of their own, the judge shall, in the same decision, fix such maintenance as is due under articles 142 et seq. of this Code.
Article 94.
The judicial authority shall determine the time, manner and place in which the parent who does not have the minor children with him or her may exercise the right to visit, communicate with and have them in his or her company.
With regard to children with disabilities who are of legal age or emancipated who require support in making the decision, the parent who does not have them in his company may request, in the same proceedings for annulment, separation or divorce, that the manner in which the right provided for in the preceding paragraph shall be exercised be established.
The judicial authority shall adopt the decision provided for in the preceding paragraphs, after hearing the child and the Public Prosecutor. Likewise, the judicial authority may limit or suspend the rights provided for in the preceding paragraphs if relevant circumstances so advise or serious or repeated breaches of the duties imposed by the judicial decision occur.
The establishment of a visit or stay regime shall not take place and, if it exists, shall be suspended in respect of the parent who is in criminal proceedings initiated for endangering the life, physical integrity, liberty, moral integrity or sexual freedom and compensation of the other spouse or his or her children. Nor shall it proceed when the judicial authority warns, from the allegations of the parties and the evidence given, of the existence of well-founded evidence of domestic or gender-based violence. However, the judicial authority may establish a regime of visitation, communication or stay in a resolution motivated in the best interests of the child or in the will, wishes and preferences of the disabled adult in need of support and after assessing the situation of the parental relationship.
In no case shall a visiting regime be established with respect to the parent in custody, on remand or by final judgement, agreed in criminal proceedings for the offences referred to in the preceding paragraph.
The judicial authority may also grant the right of communication and visitation provided for in Article 160, paragraph 2, after hearing the parents and the person who has applied for it on the grounds of his or her status as a brother, grandfather, relative or close friend of the minor or of the elderly person with disabilities who needs support in making the decision, who must give his or her consent. The judicial authority shall always decide on the interest of the minor or the will, wishes and preferences of the disabled adult.
Article 94 bis.
The judicial authority shall entrust one or both spouses to care for the pets and shall determine, where appropriate, the manner in which the spouse to whom they have not been entrusted may have them in his or her company, as well as the sharing of the burdens associated with the care of the animal, taking into account the interest of the members of the family and the welfare of the animal, irrespective of the Sunday ownership of the animal and of the person entrusted to him or her for care. This shall be recorded in the relevant animal identification register.
Text added, published on 16/12/2021, in force from 05/01/2022.
Article 95.
A final judgement, a final decree or a public deed formalizing the regulatory agreement, if any, shall, in respect of the property of the marriage, cause the dissolution or termination of the matrimonial property regime and shall approve its liquidation if there is mutual agreement between the spouses on the matter.
If the judgment of invalidity declares the bad faith of only one of the spouses, the person who has acted in good faith may choose to apply in the liquidation of the matrimonial property regime the provisions relating to the system of participation and the one in bad faith shall not be entitled to participate in the profits obtained by his consort.
Article 96.
1. In the absence of agreement of the spouses approved by the judicial authority, the use of the family home and objects of ordinary use of the family shall be the responsibility of the common minor children and the spouse in whose company they remain, until all such children reach the age of majority. If there is a disability situation among the minor children that makes it desirable to continue using the family home after their majority, the judicial authority shall determine the duration of this right, depending on the circumstances involved.
For the purposes of the preceding paragraph, ordinary adult children who, at the time of invalidity, separation or divorce, were in a situation of disability which made it desirable to continue using family housing, are equated with minor children in a similar situation.
With the end of the use provided for in the first subparagraph, the housing needs of those who lack economic independence shall be met as provided for in Title VI of this Book, concerning maintenance between relatives.
When some of the children are in the company of one of the spouses and the others in that of the other, the judicial authority shall decide as appropriate.
2. In the absence of children, it may be agreed that the use of such property shall be the responsibility of the non-owner spouse for the period of time which is prudently determined provided that, in the circumstances, it is advisable and his interest is the most in need of protection.
3. In order to dispose of all or part of the housing and property described above, the use of which has been attributed in accordance with the above paragraphs, the consent of both spouses or, failing that, judicial authorization shall be required. This restriction on family housing shall be recorded in the Register of Property. The wrong or false manifestation of the owner's use of the dwelling shall not harm the acquirer in good faith.
Article 97.
A spouse to whom the separation or divorce results in an economic imbalance in relation to the position of the other, which implies a worsening of his previous situation in marriage, shall be entitled to compensation which may consist of a temporary or indefinite pension, or a single benefit, as determined by the regulatory agreement or the judgment.
In the absence of agreement by the spouses, the judge shall, in judgment, determine the amount of such agreement in the light of the following circumstances:
1.a The agreements reached between the spouses.
2.a Age and state of health.
3.a Vocational qualifications and the chances of access to employment.
4.a Past and future dedication to the family.
5.a Collaboration with their work in the commercial, industrial or professional activities of the other spouse.
6.a The duration of marriage and conjugal coexistence.
7.a The possible loss of a pension right.
8.a The wealth and economic means and the needs of both spouses.
9.a. Any other relevant circumstances.
The court decision or the regulatory agreement formalized before the judicial secretary or notary shall establish the periodicity, the form of payment, the basis for updating the pension, the duration or time of termination and the guarantees for its effectiveness.
Article 98.
A bona fide spouse whose marriage has been declared null and void shall be entitled to compensation in the event of conjugal cohabitation, in the circumstances provided for in article 97.
Article 99.
At any time, it may be agreed to replace the pension established by the courts or by a regulatory agreement formalised in accordance with Article 97 by the creation of a life income, the use of certain goods or the delivery of capital in goods or money.
Article 100.
The pension and the basis for its updating in the separation or divorce order may be amended only by changes in the fortune of one or the other spouse who so advises.
The pension and the basis for updating laid down in the regulatory agreement formalized before the judicial secretary or notary may be amended by new agreement, subject to the same requirements laid down in this Code.
Article 101.
The right to a pension is extinguished by the cessation of the cause that motivated it, by contracting a new marriage creditor or by living with another person.
The right to a pension is not extinguished by the fact that the debtor has died. However, the heirs of the latter may request the judge to reduce or abolish the debt, if the estate could not meet the debt requirements or affect their rights in the legitimate debt.
CHAPTER X
Provisional measures for annulment, separation and divorce
Text added, published on 20/07/1981, in force from 09/08/1981.
Article 102.
In the light of the application for annulment, separation or divorce, the following effects shall occur by ministry of the Act:
1. Spouses may live separately and the presumption of conjugal coexistence ceases.
2. The consents and powers given by either spouse to the other shall be revoked.
Likewise, unless otherwise agreed, the possibility of linking the private property of the other spouse in the exercise of domestic power ceases.
For this purpose, either party may request the appropriate entry in the Civil Registry and, where appropriate, in the Property and Commercial Registry.
Article 103.
If the application is granted, the judge shall, in the absence of agreement by both spouses who have been approved by the court, take the following measures with a hearing of the spouses:
1. To determine, in the interests of the children, with which of the spouses the parents of both spouses are to remain subject to parental authority and to take appropriate measures in accordance with the provisions of this Code and, in particular, how the spouse who does not exercise the custody and custody of the children may fulfil the duty to care for them and the time, manner and place in which he may communicate with them and have them in his company.
Exceptionally, children may be entrusted to grandparents, relatives or other persons who so consent and, if they do not, to an appropriate institution, with the guardianship functions which they shall exercise under the authority of the judge.
Where there is a risk of the child being taken away by one of the spouses or by third parties, the necessary measures may be taken, in particular:
(a) Prohibition of leaving the national territory, unless previously authorized by the courts.
(b) Prohibition of issuing or withdrawing from the child ' s passport if it has already been issued.
(c) Prior authorization of any change of domicile by the minor.
1.a bis Determine, in the interest of family members and the welfare of the animal, whether the pets are entrusted to one or both spouses, how the spouse to whom they have not been entrusted may have them in his company, as well as the appropriate precautionary measures to preserve the right of each spouse.
2.a To determine, taking into account the family interest most in need of protection, which of the spouses is to continue in the use of the family home and also, after inventory, the property and objects of the trowel that continue in the family and those that are to be carried by the other spouse, as well as the appropriate precautionary measures to preserve the right of each spouse.
3.a To lay down, the contribution of each spouse to the burden of marriage, including where appropriate “litis expense”, lay down the basis for updating the amounts and provide guarantees, deposits, retentions or other appropriate precautionary measures, in order to ensure the effectiveness of what one spouse is to pay to the other.
The work which one of the spouses shall devote to the care of the common children subject to parental authority shall be considered a contribution to these burdens.
4.a To indicate, in the light of the circumstances, common or common property to be handed over to one or the other spouse, the rules to be observed in the administration and disposition, as well as the mandatory accountability for the common property or part thereof received and acquired thereafter.
5.a To determine, where appropriate, the regime of administration and disposition of private property that by capitulations or public deed was particularly affected by the burden of marriage.
Article 104.
A spouse who intends to sue for the annulment, separation or divorce of his marriage may apply for the effects and measures referred to in the two preceding articles.
Such effects and measures shall only be maintained if, within 30 days of their initial adoption, the application is brought before the competent court.
Article 105.
A spouse who leaves the matrimonial home for a reasonable reason does not violate the duty of cohabitation and within 30 days submits the application or application referred to in the preceding articles.
Article 106.
The effects and measures provided for in this chapter end, in any event, when they are replaced by those of the judgment in question or otherwise terminated.
The revocation of consents and powers is deemed final.
CHAPTER XI
Law applicable to invalidity, separation and divorce.
Text added, published on 20/07/1981, in force from 09/08/1981.
Article 107.
1. The nullity of the marriage and its effects shall be determined in accordance with the law applicable to its conclusion.
2. Legal separation and divorce shall be governed by the rules of the European Union or Spanish private international law.
TITLE V
Paternity and filiation
CHAPTER I
The effects of filiation
Article 108.
Filiation may take place by nature and by adoption. Filiation by nature can be matrimonial rather than matrimonial. It's marriage when parents are married to each other.
Marriage and non-marital filiation, as well as adoption, have the same effects, in accordance with the provisions of this Code.
Article 109.
Filiation determines surnames in accordance with the law.
If filiation is determined by both lines, the parents by mutual agreement may decide on the order of transmission of their first surname, prior to registration. If this option is not exercised, the provisions of the law shall apply.
The order of surnames registered for the eldest of the children shall be governed by the subsequent birth registrations of their siblings of the same bond.
The child, upon reaching the age of majority, may request that the order of surnames be altered.
Article 110.
Even if they do not have parental authority, both parents are obliged to care for and provide maintenance for minor children.
Article 111.
The parent shall be excluded from parental authority and other protective functions and shall not have rights under the law in respect of the child or his or her descendants, or in his or her inheritance:
1. When he has been sentenced on account of the relations to which the generation obeys, according to a final criminal sentence.
2. When filiation has been judicially determined against his opposition.
In both cases, the child shall bear the surname of the parent concerned only if he or she so requests or his or her legal representative.
These restrictions shall cease to take effect by determination of the legal representative of the child who has been legally approved, or at the will of the child himself or herself after full capacity has been attained.
The obligations to care for children and to provide them with maintenance shall always be safeguarded.
CHAPTER II
Determination and proof of filiation
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Section 1.a General provisions.
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 112.
Filiation produces its effects since it takes place. Their legal determination has retroactive effects provided that the retroactivity is compatible with the nature of the latter and the Law does not provide otherwise.
In any event, acts granted on behalf of the minor child by his or her legal representative or, in the case of older persons with disabilities who had support measures in place, those carried out pursuant to such measures shall remain valid before filiation has been determined.
Article 113.
Filiation is confirmed by the registration in the Civil Registry, by the document or sentence that legally determines it, by the presumption of marital paternity and, in the absence of the above means, by the possession of a state. For the admission of evidence other than registration, the provisions of the Civil Registry Act shall apply.
The determination of a filiation will not be effective as long as a contradictory filiation is established.
Article 114.
The filiation entries may be rectified in accordance with the Civil Registry Act, without prejudice to the provisions of this Title on actions of challenge.
Any entries which are contradictory to the facts which a criminal sentence declares to be proven may also be rectified at any time.
Section 2.a: Determination of marital filiation
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 115.
Mother and father marital filiation shall be legally determined:
1. For the registration of the birth together with that of the marriage of the parents.
2. By final judgement.
Article 116.
The husband's children are presumed to be those born after the celebration of the marriage and within three hundred days of its dissolution or legal or de facto separation from the spouses.
Article 117.
Born within 180 days of the marriage, the husband may destroy the presumption by authentic declaration to the contrary formalized within six months of the birth. Except for cases in which she has expressly or tacitly acknowledged paternity or had known the pregnancy of the woman prior to the marriage, unless, in the latter case, the authentic declaration was formalized with the consent of both, before or after the marriage, within six months of the birth of the child.
Article 118.
Even if the presumption of paternity of the husband is lacking because of the legal or de facto separation of the spouses, filiation may be registered as a marriage if the consent of both spouses is obtained.
Article 119.
Filiation becomes matrimonial from the date of the parents' marriage when it takes place after the birth of the child provided that the act of filiation is legally determined in accordance with the provisions of the following section.
The provisions of the preceding paragraph shall, where appropriate, benefit from the descendants of the deceased child.
Section 3.a on the determination of non-marital filiation
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 120.
Non-marital filiation shall be determined by law:
1. At the time of birth registration, by the conforming declaration made by the non-pregnant parent in the relevant official form referred to in the Civil Registry legislation.
2. For the recognition before the Registrar of Civil Registry, in will or in other public document.
3. A decision to file a case under the law of the Civil Registry.
4th By final judgment.
5. With regard to the pregnant mother or parent, where filiation is recorded in the birth registration carried out within the time limit, in accordance with the provisions of the Convention on the Rights of the Child, Civil Registry Act.
Article 121.
Recognition granted by unemancipated minors will require judicial approval with a hearing by the Public Prosecutor for its validity.
The validity of the recognition granted by persons of legal age in respect of whom support measures have been established shall be determined by the court decision or public deed establishing them. If nothing had been done and there were no voluntary support measures, a corresponding review of the judicial support measures taken to complete them for this purpose will be undertaken.
Article 122.
Where a parent makes the recognition separately, he or she may not manifest in it the identity of the other unless it is already legally determined.
Article 123.
Recognition of an adult child shall not have effect without his or her express or tacit consent.
The consent for the effective recognition of the adult with disabilities shall be expressly or tacitly provided by the adult with the support required for this purpose. In the event of a court decision or public deed establishing support measures, it shall be so provided.
Article 124.
The effectiveness of recognition of a minor shall require the express consent of his legal representative or judicial approval with a hearing of the Public Prosecutor ' s Office and of the legally known parent.
Consent or approval shall not be required if the recognition has been made in will or within the time limit set for the registration of the birth. The registration of filiation of the non-pregnant parent thus practised may be suspended at the sole request of the pregnant mother or parent for the year following birth. If the non-pregnant parent requests confirmation of registration, judicial approval with a hearing by the Public Prosecutor ' s Office will be required.
Article 125.
When the parents of the minor are brothers or bloodsanguines in a straight line, legally determined filiation with respect to one, it may be determined legally with respect to the other only upon prior judicial authorization, which shall be granted with a hearing of the Public Prosecutor's Office, when it is in the interest of the minor.
The minor may, upon reaching the age of majority, invalidate by authentic declaration the latter determination if he has not consented to it.
Article 126.
Recognition of the deceased shall take effect only if consented to by his descendants themselves or by his legal representatives.
CHAPTER III
Actions for filiation
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Section 1.a General provisions
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Arts. 127-130
(Repealed)
Text added, published on 08/01/2000, in force from 08/01/2001.
Section 2.a of the claim
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 131.
Any person with a legitimate interest has action to declare filiation manifested by the constant possession of state.
Except for the case in which the claim is made against another legally determined filiation.
Article 132.
In the absence of the corresponding possession of state, the action for the claim of marital filiation, which is imprescriptible, is the responsibility of either parent or the child.
If the child dies within four years of reaching full capacity, or during the year following the discovery of the evidence on which the claim is to be based, his or her action is for the time remaining to complete those deadlines.
Article 133.
1. The action for non-marital filiation, where the respective possession of state is lacking, shall be the responsibility of the child throughout his or her life.
If the child dies within four years of reaching the age of majority or after the removal of the support measures that he has provided for this purpose, or during the year following the discovery of the evidence on which the claim is based, his action shall be for his heirs for the time remaining to complete those deadlines.
2. The parents may also bring the present filiation action within one year of their knowledge of the facts on which they are to base their claim.
This action shall not be transmitted to the heirs who may only continue the action which the parent has initiated in life.
In the same vein, the judgment of TC 52/2006, of 16 February, is pronounced. Ref. BOE-T-2006-4766.
Article 134.
The exercise of the complaint action, in accordance with the preceding articles, by the child or the parent, will in any case allow the challenge of contradictory filiation.
Article 135.
(Repealed)
Section 3.a of the challenge
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 136.
1. The husband may bring an action to challenge paternity within one year of registration of filiation in the Civil Registry. However, the deadline will not run as long as the husband ignores the birth. The husband died without knowing the birth, the year will be counted from the time the heir knows him.
2. If the husband, despite knowing the fact of the birth of the person who has been registered as his son, is unaware of his lack of biological paternity, the calculation of the one-year period will begin to count from the time he had such knowledge.
3. If the husband dies before the expiry of the period specified in the preceding paragraphs, the action shall be taken by each heir for the time remaining to complete that period.
In the same vein, the judgment of TC 156/2005 of 9 June 2005 is pronounced. Ref. BOE-T-2005-11743.
Article 137.
1. The filiation of the non-pregnant parent may be challenged by the child during the year following the registration of filiation. If you are a minor or a person with a disability with support measures, to challenge it, the period of the year shall be counted from the age of majority or from the expiry of support measures.
In the interests of the child who is a minor, the action shall also be brought in the year following the registration of filiation, by the pregnant mother or parent holding parental authority, by his legal representative or by the Public Prosecutor ' s Office.
In the case of a person with a disability with support measures, the person who provides support and is expressly entitled to do so or, failing that, the Public Prosecutor ' s Office, may also bring an action for challenge within the year following the registration of filiation.
2. If the child, despite more than one year after registration, from the age of majority or after the termination of the support measure, is unaware of the lack of biological paternity of the person who is registered as his or her non-pregnant parent, the calculation of the one-year period shall begin to count from the time he or she had such knowledge.
3. Where the child dies before the time limits set out in the preceding paragraphs have elapsed, his or her actions shall be the responsibility of his or her heirs for the time remaining to complete those periods.
4. If the possession of a state of marital filiation is lacking in family relations, the claim may be filed at any time by the child or his heirs.
Article 138.
Recognition and other legal acts that establish a matrimonial or non-marital filiation under the law may be challenged by a vice of consent under article 141. The challenge to paternity on other grounds shall be in accordance with the rules contained in this section.
Article 139.
The mother or parent who is a pregnant woman may exercise the act of contesting filiation by justifying the assumption of childbirth or the identity of the child is not true.
Article 140.
Where the possession of a state is lacking in family relations, non-marital paternal or maternal filiation may be challenged by those to whom it harms.
In cases where state ownership exists, the challenge action shall be taken by the person who appears as a child or parent and by filiation who may be affected as forced heirs. The action shall expire four years after the child, upon registration of filiation, has the right to possess the relevant status.
In any event, children will have action for one year after reaching or regaining sufficient capacity for their majority.
Article 141.
The action to challenge recognition made through error, violence or intimidation is the responsibility of the person who granted it. The action shall expire in the year of recognition or since the defect of consent has ceased, and may be exercised or continued by the heirs of that person, if he has died before the end of the year.
TITLE VI
From food among relatives
Article 142.
Food is understood to mean everything that is indispensable for sustenance, accommodation, clothing and medical assistance.
Maintenance also includes the education and instruction of the dietitian while he is a minor and even later when he has not completed his training for reasons that are not attributable to him.
Food shall include the costs of pregnancy and childbirth as soon as they are not otherwise covered.
Article 143.
They are obliged to give food to each other in the full extent of the preceding article:
1. Spouses.
2. The ascendants and descendants.
The brothers are only responsible for the necessary life aid, when they need it for any cause that is not attributable to the foodist, and they will be extended to those who need it for their education.
Article 144.
The maintenance claim, where appropriate, and two or more persons obliged to provide maintenance, shall be made in the following order:
1. The spouse.
2. To the descendants of the nearest degree.
3. To ascendants, also of the nearest degree.
4. To the brothers, but being obliged in last place those who are only uterine or consanguinate.
Among the descendants and ascendants, the gradation shall be regulated by the order in which they are called to the legitimate succession of the person entitled to maintenance.
Article 145.
Where two or more persons are obliged to give maintenance, the payment of the pension shall be divided among them in proportion to their respective earnings.
However, in the event of urgent necessity and special circumstances, the judge may oblige only one of them to lend them provisionally, without prejudice to their right to claim from the other parties concerned.
When two or more foodists claim both the maintenance of the same person legally obliged to give them, and the same person has not enough fortune to care for all, the order set forth in the preceding article shall be preserved, unless the concurrent foodists are the spouse and a child subject to parental authority, in which case the latter shall be preferred to the same.
Article 146.
The amount of food shall be proportionate to the flow or means of the giver and to the needs of the recipient.
Article 147.
Food, in the cases referred to in the preceding article, shall be reduced or increased proportionately according to the increase or decrease in the needs of the food-seeker and the fortune of the food-seeker.
Article 148.
The obligation to provide maintenance shall be enforceable as soon as the person entitled to receive maintenance is in need of maintenance, but shall be paid only from the date on which the claim is brought.
Payment for months in advance will be verified, and, when the feeder dies, his heirs will not be obliged to return what he would have received in advance.
The judge, at the request of the dietist or the Public Prosecutor's Office, shall urgently order the necessary precautionary measures to ensure the advance payments made by a public entity or other person and to provide for future needs.
Article 149.
A person liable to provide maintenance may, at his choice, satisfy them, or pay the pension to be fixed, or receive and maintain in his own home to which he is entitled.
This choice will not be possible as soon as it contradicts the situation of cohabitation determined for the dietist by the applicable rules or by judicial decision. It may also be rejected when the cause is just or prejudicial to the interests of the underage foodist.
Article 150.
The obligation to provide maintenance ceases with the death of the obligor, even if it was in compliance with a final judgement.
Article 151.
The right to food is not waived or transmitted to a third party. Nor can they be compensated for by what the feeder owes to the borrower.
However, arrears of maintenance may be compensated and waived and the right to sue may be transmitted for a fee or free of charge.
Article 152.
The obligation to provide maintenance shall also cease:
1st For the death of the foodist.
2. Where the fortune of the person obliged to give them has been reduced to the extent that he cannot satisfy them without neglecting his own needs and those of his family.
3. Where the food-seeker may exercise a trade, profession or industry, or has acquired a destination or improved fortune, such that maintenance is not necessary for his or her subsistence.
4. When the foodist, whether or not he was a forced heir, would have committed a fault of those that gave rise to disinheritment.
5.o When the food eater is a descendant of the one who is obliged to give food, and the need for it comes from misconduct or from non-application to work, while this cause remains.
Article 153.
The above provisions apply to other cases in which this Code, by will or covenant, is entitled to maintenance, except as agreed, as ordered by the testator or by law in the particular case in question.
TITLE VII
Parental-filial relations
CHAPTER I
General provisions
Article 154.
Unemancipated sons and daughters are under parental authority.
Parental authority, as parental responsibility, shall always be exercised in the interests of the sons and daughters, in accordance with their personality, and with respect for their rights, physical and mental integrity.
This function includes the following duties and powers:
1. To ensure for them, to have them in their company, to feed them, to educate them and to provide them with comprehensive training.
2. To represent them and administer their property.
3. To decide the place of habitual residence of the minor, which may be modified only with the consent of both parents or, failing that, by judicial authorization.
If the children are of sufficient maturity, they must always be heard before making decisions affecting them either in contentious proceedings or by mutual agreement. In any event, it shall be ensured that they can be heard under suitable conditions, in terms that are accessible to them, understandable and adapted to their age, maturity and circumstances, seeking the assistance of specialists where necessary.
Parents may, in the exercise of their duties, seek the assistance of the authority.
Article 155.
Children should:
1. Obey your parents while they remain under your authority, and respect them always.
2. To contribute equitably, according to their possibilities, to the lifting of family burdens while living with them.
Article 156.
Parental authority shall be exercised jointly by both parents or by only one parent with the express or tacit consent of the other parent. Acts performed by one of them according to social use and circumstances or in situations of urgent need shall be valid.
A conviction is handed down and until criminal responsibility is discharged or criminal proceedings have been instituted against one of the parents for violating the life, physical integrity, liberty, moral integrity or sexual freedom and freedom of ordinary children under the age of 18, or for violating the other parent, the consent of the latter shall be sufficient for the care and psychological assistance of minor children, the former being informed beforehand. The above shall also apply, even if no prior complaint has been lodged, when the woman is receiving assistance in a specialized gender-based violence service, provided that she receives a report issued by that service attesting to that situation. If the assistance is to be provided to children over the age of sixteen, the express consent of the children shall be required in any event.
In the event of a disagreement in the exercise of parental authority, either of them may apply to the judicial authority, which, after hearing both of them and the child if he or she is sufficiently mature and, in any case, if he or she is over twelve years of age, shall confer the power to decide on one of the two parents. If the disagreements are repeated or any other cause seriously hampering the exercise of parental authority occurs, it may be attributed in whole or in part to one of the parents or may distribute its functions among them. This measure shall be in force for the period fixed, which may never exceed two years. In the cases of bona fide third parties, each parent shall be presumed to be acting in the ordinary exercise of parental authority with the consent of the other parent.
In the absence or in the absence or impossibility of one of the parents, parental authority shall be exercised exclusively by the other parent.
If parents live separately, parental authority shall be exercised by the parent with whom the child lives. However, the judicial authority may, at the reasoned request of the other parent, in the interest of the child, confer on the applicant the parental authority to exercise it jointly with the other parent or to distribute between the two the functions inherent in the exercise of his or her duties.
Article 157.
The unemancipated minor shall exercise parental authority over his or her children with the assistance of his or her parents and, in the absence of both, his or her guardian; in cases of disagreement or impossibility, with that of the judge.
Article 158.
The judge, on his own initiative or at the request of the child, any relative or the Public Prosecutor's Office, shall order:
1. The appropriate measures to ensure the provision of maintenance and to provide for the future needs of the child, in the event of non-compliance with this duty, by his or her parents.
2. The appropriate provisions to prevent children from being disturbed in the event of a change in the holder of custody.
3. The measures necessary to prevent the abduction of minor children by one of the parents or third parties, and in particular the following:
(a) Prohibition of leaving the national territory, unless previously authorized by the courts.
(b) Prohibition of issuing or withdrawing from the child ' s passport if it has already been issued.
(c) Prior authorization of any change of domicile by the minor.
4. The measure prohibiting parents, guardians, other relatives or third parties from approaching the child and from approaching his or her home or educational establishment and other places that are frequent, with regard to the principle of proportionality.
5. The measure prohibiting communication with the minor, which shall prevent parents, guardians, other relatives or third parties from making written, verbal or visual contact by any means of communication or computer or telematic means, with respect to the principle of proportionality.
6. The precautionary suspension in the exercise of parental authority and/or in the exercise of custody, the precautionary suspension of the regime of visits and communications established in a judicial decision or judicially approved agreement and, in general, other provisions which it considers appropriate, in order to remove the child from danger or to avoid harm to his or her family environment or to third persons.
In the event of the child ' s possible abandonment, the court shall inform the public body of the measures taken. All such measures may be taken in any judicial or criminal proceedings or in a voluntary court file, where the judicial authority shall ensure the hearing of the minor, and the Court may be assisted by outside persons to ensure that this right can be exercised on its own.
Article 159.
If the parents live separately and do not decide by mutual agreement, the judge shall decide, always for the benefit of the children, to the care of which parent the minor children shall remain. Before taking this measure, the judge shall hear children who have sufficient judgment and, in any event, children over the age of twelve.
Article 160.
1. Minor children have the right to relate to their parents even if they do not exercise parental authority, unless otherwise provided by a court decision or by the Public Entity in the cases provided for in article 161. In the event of the deprivation of liberty of the parents, and provided that the best interests of the child recommend visits to the parents, the Administration shall facilitate the transfer accompanied by the minor to the penitentiary, either by a family member appointed by the competent administration or by a professional who shall ensure the preparation of the child for such a visit. A visit to a penitentiary centre must also be carried out outside school hours and in an environment suitable for the minor.
Minors adopted by another person may relate to their family of origin only as provided for in article 178.4.
2. The minor ' s personal relations with his or her siblings, grandparents and other relatives and relatives may not be prevented without just cause.
In the event of opposition, the judge, at the request of the minor, brothers, grandparents, relatives or close relatives, shall decide in accordance with the circumstances. In particular, it should ensure that any measures that may be established to promote relations between siblings, and between grandparents and grandchildren do not make it possible to violate court decisions restricting or suspending the relations of minors with any of their parents.
Article 161.
The Public Entity entrusted with the protection of minors in the respective territory shall regulate visits and communications to parents, grandparents, siblings and other relatives and relatives of children in distress, and may, in the interest of the child, agree on the temporary suspension of such visits and communications after a hearing of the persons concerned and of the minor if he or she is sufficiently mature and, in any event, if he or she is over twelve years of age, with immediate notification to the Public Prosecutor ' s Office. To this end, the Director of the residential care centre or the welcoming family or other agents or professionals involved shall inform the Public Entity of any indication of the harmful effects of such visits on the child.
The minor, the persons concerned and the Public Prosecutor may object to such administrative decisions in accordance with the Civil Procedure Act.
CHAPTER II
Legal representation of children
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 162.
Parents who have parental authority have the legal representation of their unemancipated minor children.
Except for:
1. acts relating to the rights of the personality which the child, according to his or her maturity, may exercise for himself or herself.
However, parental responsibility will intervene in these cases by virtue of their duties of care and assistance.
2. Those in which there is conflict of interest between the parents and the child.
3rd. Property that is excluded from parental administration.
The conclusion of contracts requiring the child to make personal benefits requires the child's prior consent if he or she has sufficient judgment, without prejudice to the provisions of article 158.
Article 163.
Provided that in any case the parents have an interest contrary to that of their unemancipated children, they shall be appointed as counsel to represent them at trial and outside. This appointment shall also be made where the parents have an interest contrary to that of the emancipated minor child whose ability to complete.
If the conflict of interest existed only with one parent, it was the other by law and without special appointment to represent the child or to complete his or her capacity.
CHAPTER III
The property of the children and their administration
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 164.
The parents shall administer the property of the children with the same diligence as their own, fulfilling the general duties of each administrator and the special duties established in the Mortgage Act.
Except for parental administration:
1. Property acquired free of charge when expressly ordered by the landlord. The will of the latter concerning the administration of these goods and the destination of their fruits shall be strictly complied with.
2. Those acquired by succession in which one or both of the persons exercising parental authority had been fairly disinherited or could not have been inherited by reason of indignity, which shall be administered by the person designated by the deceased and, failing that and in turn, by the other parent or by a specially appointed judicial administrator.
3. Those that the child over sixteen would have acquired with his work or industry. The ordinary administration shall be performed by the child, who shall require the consent of the parents for those who exceed it.
Article 165.
The unemancipated child always belongs to the fruits of his goods, as well as everything he acquires with his work or industry.
However, the parents may assign those of the minor living with both or with only one of them, in the part that corresponds to him, to the lifting of family burdens, and shall not be required to account for what they have consumed in such care.
To this end, the fruits of the property which they do not administer shall be given to the parents to the appropriate extent. Except for the fruits of the goods referred to in points 1 and 2 of the preceding article and of those donated or left to the children especially for their education or career, but if the parents lack the means they may ask the judge to give them the fair share.
Article 166.
The parents may not waive the rights of the children to own or dispose of or tax their immovable property, commercial or industrial establishments, precious objects and transferable securities, except for the right of preferential subscription of shares, but for justified reasons of utility or necessity and subject to the authorization of the judge of the domicile, with a hearing of the Public Prosecutor.
Parents must seek judicial authorization to repudiate the inheritance or legacy of the child. If the judge refuses authorization, the inheritance may only be accepted for inventory benefit.
No judicial authorization shall be required if the minor has attained the age of sixteen years and consents in public documents, or for the disposal of transferable securities provided that the amount is reinvested in secure assets or securities.
Article 167.
Where the administration of the parents endangers the property of the child, the judge may, at the request of the child himself, the Public Prosecutor's Office or any relative of the child, take such measures as he deems necessary for the security and safekeeping of the property, demand security or security for continuation in the administration, or even appoint an Administrator.
Article 168.
At the end of parental authority, children may require the parents to hold the administration accountable for their property until then. Action to enforce this obligation shall be prescribed at the age of three.
In the event of loss or deterioration of property due to serious fault or fault, the parents shall be liable for the damage suffered.
CHAPTER IV
Extinction of parental authority
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 169.
Parental authority ends:
1. For the death or declaration of death of the parents or the child.
2. For emancipation.
3. For adoption of the child.
Article 170.
Any parent may be deprived of his or her power in whole or in part by a judgement based on failure to perform the duties inherent in it or in criminal or matrimonial proceedings.
The courts may, in the interests and interests of the child, agree to recover parental authority when the case on which the deprivation was based has ceased.
Article 171.
(Deleted)
CHAPTER V
Adoption and other forms of child protection
It should be noted that in the text of the Civil Code and other legal provisions, the so-called “full adoption” is understood to be replaced by the adoption regulated by Act No. 21/1987 of 11 November 1987, as set out in article 3 of the Act. Ref. BOE-A-1987-25627.
Text added, published on 07/07/1970, in force from 27/07/1970.
Section 1.a Child care and care
Text added, published on 07/07/1970, in force from 27/07/1970.
Article 172.
1. When the public body entrusted with the protection of minors in the respective territory finds that a minor is in a situation of neglect, it is responsible for the protection of the child and must take the necessary protective measures to ensure that he is cared for by the Ministry of Public Prosecutions and, where appropriate, the judge who agreed to the ordinary guardianship. The administrative decision declaring the situation of abandonment and the measures adopted shall be notified in legal form to the parents, guardians or guardians and to the child concerned if he or she has sufficient maturity and, in any case, if he or she is over twelve years of age, immediately without exceeding the maximum period of forty-eight hours. The information shall be clear, understandable and in accessible format, including the causes that gave rise to the intervention of the Administration and the effects of the decision taken, and in the case of the minor, adapted to his degree of maturity. Whenever possible, and especially in the case of the minor, this information shall be provided in person.
The situation of neglect is considered to be that which actually occurs because of non-compliance or because of the impossible or inadequate exercise of the protection duties established by the laws for the care of minors, when they are deprived of the necessary moral or material assistance.
The assumption of the guardianship assigned to the Public Entity entails the suspension of parental authority or ordinary guardianship. However, acts of patrimonial content performed by parents or guardians on behalf of the child and in the interests of the child shall be valid.
The Public Entity and the Public Prosecutor ' s Office may, if appropriate, promote the deprivation of parental authority and the removal of guardianship.
2. Within two years of the notification of the administrative decision declaring the situation of abandonment, parents who continue to exercise parental authority but have it suspended in accordance with paragraph 1, or guardians who, under the same subparagraph, have suspended guardianship, may request the Public Entity to cease the suspension and the declaration of the child's situation of abandonment is revoked, if, by changing the circumstances that motivated it, they understand that they are in a position to assume parental authority or guardianship again.
They may also object to any decisions taken with regard to the protection of the child within the same period of time.
After this period, the right of parents or guardians to request or oppose decisions or measures taken for the protection of the child shall lapse. They may, however, provide information to the Public Entity and the Public Prosecutor ' s Office on any change in the circumstances that led to the declaration of a state of distress.
In any event, after two years, only the Public Prosecutor's Office shall be entitled to oppose the decision of the Public Entity.
During this two-year period, the Public Entity, taking into account the situation and bringing it to the attention of the Public Prosecutor's Office, may adopt any protection measure, including the proposed adoption, where there is a well-founded forecast of a permanent impossibility of returning to the family of origin.
3. The public body, on its own initiative or at the request of the Public Prosecutor's Office or of the person or entity concerned, may revoke the declaration of a situation of neglect and decide to return the child to his or her family, provided that it is understood that it is best in its interest. Such a decision shall be notified to the Public Prosecutor.
4. In compliance with the obligation to provide immediate care, the Public Entity may assume provisional custody of a minor by administrative decision and shall inform the Public Prosecutor's Office, simultaneously carrying out the necessary steps to identify the minor, investigate his circumstances and verify, if necessary, the actual situation of neglect.
Such proceedings shall be carried out as soon as possible, during which time, where appropriate, the declaration of the situation of neglect and consequent assumption of guardianship or promotion of the appropriate measure of protection shall be made. If there are persons who, by reason of their relations with the minor or other circumstances, may assume guardianship in the interests of the minor, the appointment of guardian shall be promoted in accordance with the ordinary rules.
Where the period has elapsed and guardianship has not been formalized or another decision has been taken, the Public Prosecutor's Office shall take appropriate action to ensure that the most appropriate measure of protection of the child is adopted by the Public Entity.
5. The Public Entity shall cease to have custody over minors declared in a situation of neglect when it finds, by means of the relevant reports, the disappearance of the cases that led to their assumption, on the basis of any of the cases provided for in articles 276 and 277.1, and when it reliably establishes any of the following:
(a) The child has voluntarily moved to another country.
(b) That the minor is in the territory of another autonomous community, in which case the file of protection shall be transferred and the public body whose decision has been issued on the declaration of a situation of neglect and its protection or corresponding measure of protection, or understands that it is no longer necessary to adopt protective measures in accordance with the situation of the minor.
(c) Twelve months have elapsed since the minor voluntarily left the protection centre, and his whereabouts are unknown.
The temporary guardianship shall cease for the same reasons as guardianship.
Article 172 bis.
1. Where the parents or guardians, for serious and transitory circumstances duly established, are unable to care for the child, they may apply to the Public Entity for custody for the necessary time, which may not exceed two years as the maximum period of temporary care for the minor, unless the best interests of the minor exceptionally advise the extension of the measures. After the period of time or extension, the minor must return to his or her parents or guardians or, if the appropriate circumstances do not exist, be declared in a legal situation of neglect.
The voluntary surrender of the guardian shall be made in writing on the basis that the parents or guardians have been informed of the responsibilities that they continue to hold with respect to the child, as well as of the manner in which the custody of the child is to be exercised by the public entity, guaranteeing, in particular to children with disabilities, the continuity of the specialized support they receive or the adoption of others more appropriate to their needs.
The administrative decision on the assumption of custody by the Public Entity, as well as any subsequent variation in its form of exercise, shall be substantiated and communicated to the parents or guardians and the Public Prosecutor.
2. In addition, the public entity shall assume custody when the judge so agrees in cases where it is legally appropriate, taking the appropriate protective measure.
Text added, published on 29/07/2015, in force from 18/08/2015.
Article 172 ter.
1. Custody shall be carried out through family care and, if this is not possible or appropriate for the child ' s interest, through residential care. Family care shall be provided by the person or persons determined by the Public Entity. Residential care shall be exercised by the Director or head of the centre where the child is placed, in accordance with the terms laid down in the legislation on the protection of minors.
Those who cannot be guardians in accordance with the provisions of the law may not be welcoming.
The decision of the public entity in which the custody measure is formalized in writing shall be notified to parents or guardians who were not deprived of parental authority or guardianship, as well as to the Public Prosecutor ' s Office.
2. The interests of the child shall always be sought and priority given, where it is not contrary to that interest, to their reintegration into the family itself and the care of the siblings shall be entrusted to the same institution or person so that they may remain united. The situation of the child in relation to his or her family of origin, both in terms of his or her custody and in terms of visits and other forms of communication, shall be reviewed, at least every six months.
3. The public entity may agree, in relation to the child in family or residential care, when it is appropriate for his or her interest, stays, weekend departures or holidays with families or institutions dedicated to these functions. To this end, only persons or institutions suitable for the needs of the child shall be selected. Such measures shall be agreed upon after the child has been heard if he or she is sufficiently mature and, in any event, if he or she is over twelve years of age.
The custody delegation for stays, weekend departures or holidays shall contain the terms of the stay and such information as may be necessary to ensure the well-being of the child, in particular any restrictive measures established by the Public Entity or the Judge. This measure shall be communicated to parents or guardians, provided that they have not been deprived of parental authority or removed from the exercise of guardianship, as well as to foster parents. The data of these keepers shall be kept where appropriate for the interest of the child or where a fair cause arises.
4. In cases of declaration of a situation of neglect or of assumption of custody by administrative or judicial decision, the amount to be paid by parents or guardians may be established by the Public Entity to contribute, in the form of maintenance and depending on their possibilities, to the expenses resulting from the care and care of the child, as well as those arising from the civil liability that may be attributed to minors for acts carried out by them.
Text added, published on 29/07/2015, in force from 18/08/2015.
Article 173.
1. Family care results in the child ' s full participation in family life and imposes on those who receive it the obligations to care for him or her, to have him or her in his or her company, to feed him or her, to educate him or her and to provide him or her with comprehensive training in an emotional environment. In the case of a child with disabilities, he/she should continue to receive specialized support or adopt other support that is more appropriate to his/her needs.
2. Fostering shall require the consent of the foster and foster children if they are sufficiently mature and, in any case, if they are over twelve years of age.
3. If there are serious problems of cohabitation between the minor and the person or persons entrusted with the custody of the child in family care, the foster child, the Public Prosecutor ' s Office, parents or guardian who are not deprived of parental authority or guardianship or any interested person may request the removal of the custody from the public entity.
4. The child ' s family care shall cease:
(a) By judicial decision.
(b) By decision of the Public Entity, on its own initiative or at the proposal of the Public Prosecutor ' s Office, of the parents, guardians, foster parents or the child himself or herself, if he or she is sufficiently mature, when it is deemed necessary to safeguard the interests of the public, the foster parents, the minor, his or her parents or guardian;
(c) The death or death of the foster or foster child.
(d) By the age of majority of the child.
5. All proceedings for the formalization and cessation of placement shall be conducted with the obligatory reservation.
Article 173 bis.
1. Family placement may take place in the child ' s own extended family or in another person ' s family, in which case it may be specialized.
2. Family care may take the following forms in accordance with its duration and objectives:
(a) Emergency family care, mainly for children under six years of age, lasting no more than six months, pending the decision on the appropriate family protection measure.
(b) Temporary family care, which will be temporary, either because the child ' s situation provides for the reintegration of the child into his or her own family, or pending the adoption of a more stable protection measure such as permanent family care or adoption. Such placement shall last for a maximum period of two years unless the best interests of the child advise the extension of the measure for foreseeable and immediate family reintegration, or the adoption of another definitive protection measure.
(c) Permanent family care, which shall be established either at the end of the two-year period of temporary care on the grounds that family reintegration is not possible, or directly in cases of minors with special needs or where the circumstances of the minor and his or her family so advise. The public body may request the judge to assign to the permanent fosters those powers of guardianship that facilitate the performance of their responsibilities, in any case in the best interests of the child.
Text added, published on 17/01/1996, in force from 16/02/1996.
Article 174.
1. The Ministry of Public Prosecutions is responsible for the supervision of the guardianship, care or care of minors referred to in this section.
2. To this end, the Public Entity shall immediately notify the State of the new income of minors and transmit to it a copy of the administrative decisions formalizing the constitution, variation and cessation of guardianships, wards and foster care. He shall also give notice of any developments of interest in the circumstances of the minor.
The Public Prosecutor ' s Office shall verify the situation of the minor at least six months after the date of the examination and shall promote the necessary measures of protection before the public body or the judge, as appropriate.
3. The supervision of the Public Prosecutor ' s Office shall not relieve the Public Entity of its responsibility towards the minor and of its obligation to inform the Public Prosecutor ' s Office of any anomalies it may observe.
4. In order to perform the function of the superior supervision of the guardianship, care or care of minors, the Public Prosecutor ' s Office may, when necessary, request the preparation of reports by the relevant departments of the competent public administrations.
For this purpose, the relevant services of the competent public administrations shall respond to requests for information sent by the Public Prosecutor's Office in the course of investigations aimed at determining the situation of risk or neglect in which a minor may be found.
Section 2.a Adoption
Text added, published on 17/11/1987, in force from 07/12/1987.
Article 175.
1. Adoption requires the adopter to be over twenty-five years old. If there are two adopters, it will be sufficient for one adopter to reach that age. In any event, the age difference between adopter and adopter shall be at least sixteen years and may not exceed forty-five years, except in the cases provided for in Article 176.2. When two adopters are adopted, it will be enough for one to not have that maximum age difference with the adopter. If prospective adopters are willing to adopt groups of siblings or minors with special needs, the maximum age difference may be higher.
Those who cannot be guardians in accordance with the provisions of this Code may not be adopted.
2. Only unemancipated minors may be adopted. By exception, it will be possible to adopt an adult or an emancipated minor when, immediately prior to emancipation, there has been a situation of foster care with future adopters or of stable coexistence with them of at least one year.
3. It cannot be adopted:
1st To a descendant.
2. To a second degree relative of the collateral line by consanguinity or affinity.
3. To a pupil by his guardian until the general account of the guardianship has been definitively approved.
4. No one may be adopted by more than one person, unless the adoption is carried out jointly or successively by both spouses or by a partner in a similar relationship of affection to the conjugal. A marriage concluded after adoption will allow the spouse to adopt the children of his or her spouse. This provision will also apply to couples who subsequently form a partnership. In the event of the death of the adopter, or where the adopter suffers the exclusion provided for in Article 179, a new adoption of the adopter shall be possible.
5. If the adopter is in permanent care or is in care for the purpose of adoption of two spouses or of a couple united by a similar relationship of affection to the conjugal, the separation or legal divorce or breakdown of the relationship of the spouses that is confirmed prior to the proposed adoption shall not prevent the promotion of joint adoption provided that the effective coexistence of the adopter with both spouses or with the united couple is established by a similar relationship similar to that of the conjugal for at least two years prior to the proposed adoption.
Please take into account the provisions of additional provision 3 of this Act.
Article 176.
1. Adoption shall be constituted by a court decision, which shall always take into account the interests of the adopter and the suitability of the adopter or adopters for the exercise of parental authority.
2. In order to initiate the adoption file, the prior proposal of the Public Entity in favour of the adopter or adopters that the Public Entity has declared suitable for the exercise of parental authority will be necessary. The declaration of suitability shall be made prior to the proposal.
However, such a proposal shall not be required where the adoption of any of the following circumstances occurs:
1. To be an orphan and relative of the adopter in the third degree by consanguinity or affinity.
2. to be the child of the spouse or of the person attached to the adopter by similar relationship of affection to the conjugal.
3. a To have been in foster care for the purpose of adoption or to have been under the care of the adopter for the same time.
4. to be of age or of emancipated minor.
3. Appropriateness means adequate capacity, ability and motivation to exercise parental responsibility, taking into account the needs of children to adopt, and to assume the peculiarities, consequences and responsibilities of adoption.
The declaration of suitability by the Public Entity will require a psychosocial assessment of the personal, family, relational and social situation of the adopters, as well as their ability to establish stable and secure links, their educational skills and their ability to care for a child in accordance with their unique circumstances. Such a declaration of suitability shall be formalised by the relevant decision.
Persons deprived of parental authority or suspended from exercising parental authority, or those entrusted with the care of their child to the Public Entity, may not be declared suitable for adoption.
Persons offered for adoption should attend information and preparation sessions organized by the Public Entity or by an authorized partner.
4. Where one of the circumstances 1.a, 2.a or 3.a as provided for in paragraph 2 is present, adoption may be constituted, even if the adopter has died, if the adopter has already given his consent to the judge or the consent has been granted by public document or in will. The effects of the judicial decision in this case will be taken back to the date of the granting of such consent.
Article 176 bis.
1. The Public Entity may delegate the custody of a child declared in a state of distress to persons who, meeting the capacity requirements for adoption provided for in article 175 and having given their consent, have been prepared, declared suitable and assigned for adoption. To this end, the Public Entity, prior to the submission of the proposed adoption, shall delegate custody for the purpose of adoption until the court decision of adoption is issued, by duly reasoned administrative decision, after hearing the persons concerned and the minor if he or she has sufficient maturity and, in any case, if he or she is over twelve years of age, that parents or guardians who are not deprived of parental authority or guardianship shall be notified.
Guardians for adoption purposes shall have the same rights and duties as foster families.
2. Unless otherwise in the interest of the child, the Public Entity shall suspend the regime of visits and relations with the family of origin when the period of pre-adopted coexistence referred to in the preceding paragraph begins, except in the cases provided for in Article 178.4.
3. The proposal for adoption by the judge shall be made as soon as possible and in any event no later than three months after the date on which the foster delegation was agreed for adoption. However, where the Public Entity considers it necessary, depending on the age and circumstances of the child, to establish a period of adaptation of the child to the family, that period of three months may be extended to a maximum of one year.
Where the judge does not consider such adoption appropriate, the public body shall determine the most appropriate protective measure for the minor.
Text added, published on 29/07/2015, in force from 18/08/2015.
Article 177.
1. Adoption shall be granted in the presence of the judge, the adopter or adopter and the adopter over the age of twelve.
2. They shall agree to adoption:
1. The spouse or person attached to the adopter by similar relationship of affection to the conjugal unless there is a legal separation or divorce or a break-up of the couple that is reliably recorded, except in cases where the adoption is to be formalized jointly.
2. The parents of the adopter who are not emancipated, unless they are deprived of parental authority by final judgement or are legally prosecuted for such deprivation. This situation can only be assessed in the adversarial judicial proceedings to be conducted in accordance with the Civil Procedure Act.
Consent shall not be necessary if those who are required to give it are unable to do so, an impossibility which will be assessed on the basis of the judicial decision constituting the adoption.
Nor shall the consent of parents who have been suspended from parental authority be required when two years have elapsed since the notification of the declaration of a state of help, as provided for in article 172.2, without opposition thereto or when, filed within a period of time, it has been dismissed.
The mother's consent may not be given until six weeks have elapsed since the birth.
Adoptions requiring prior proposals shall not allow parental consent to be related to specific adopters.
3. They shall be heard by the Judge:
1. Parents who have not been deprived of parental authority, when their assent is not necessary for adoption.
2. The guardian and, where applicable, the welcoming family, and the keeper or keepers.
3. The adoption of a child under the age of twelve years according to his or her age and maturity.
4. Consents and assents must be freely given, in the required legal form and in writing, subject to information of their consequences.
Article 178.
1. Adoption causes the legal links between the adopted person and his family of origin to cease.
2. By exception, legal links with the parent ' s family shall be maintained, as appropriate:
(a) If the adopted person is the child of the spouse or of the person associated with the adopter by reason of a similar relationship of affection to the conjugal, even if the consort or the couple has died.
(b) Where only one of the parents has been legally determined, provided that such effect has been requested by the adopter, the adopted person over the age of 12 years and the parent whose bond is to persist.
3. The provisions of the preceding paragraphs are without prejudice to the provisions on impediments to marriage.
4. Where the interest of the child so advises, due to his or her family situation, age or any other significant circumstance valued by the Public Entity, it may be agreed that any form of relationship or contact may be maintained through visits or communications between the minor, the members of the family of origin considered and the adoptive family, with special favour, where possible, for the relationship between the biological brothers and sisters.
In such cases, the judge, when establishing the adoption, may agree to maintain the said relationship, determining its periodicity, duration and conditions, on a proposal from the Public Entity or the Public Prosecutor's Office and with the consent of the adoptive family and the adoption if it is sufficiently mature and if it is more than twelve years old. In any event, the child who is under 12 years of age shall be heard according to his age and maturity. If necessary, such a relationship shall be carried out through the intermediary of the Public Entity or entities accredited for that purpose. The judge may also agree to its modification or termination in the best interests of the child. The Public Entity shall transmit to the Judge periodic reports on the conduct of visits and communications, as well as proposals for their maintenance or modification during the first two years, and, following these, at the request of the Judge.
They are entitled to request the suspension or suppression of such visits or communications by the Public Entity, the adoptive family, the family of origin and the minor if he or she has sufficient maturity and, in any case, if he or she is over twelve years of age.
The declaration of suitability should state whether the persons offering to adopt would agree to adopt a minor who would maintain the relationship with the family of origin.
Article 179.
1. The judge, at the request of the Public Prosecutor's Office, the adoptee or his legal representative, shall agree that the adopter who has incurred the deprivation of parental authority shall be excluded from the functions of the court and from the rights which he is entitled by law with respect to the adoptee or his descendants, or in his inheritance.
2. Once full capacity has been achieved, exclusion may only be requested by the adoptee within two years.
3. These restrictions will cease to take effect by determination of the child's own after full capacity has been achieved.
Article 180.
1. Adoption is irrevocable.
2. The judge shall order the termination of the adoption at the request of any parent who, without his fault, has not intervened in the proceedings in accordance with the terms of article 177. It will also be necessary for the application to be filed within two years of adoption and for the application for termination to not seriously harm the minor.
If the adopted person is of legal age, the termination of the adoption shall require his express consent.
3. Extinction of adoption is not a cause of loss of nationality or of the acquired civil neighbourhood, nor does it affect the property effects previously produced.
4. The determination of filiation which by nature corresponds to the adopted does not affect adoption.
5. Public entities shall ensure the preservation of the information available to them concerning the minor's origins, including information regarding the identity of his parents, as well as the medical history of the minor and his family, and shall be kept for at least fifty years after the adoption has become final. Conservation shall be carried out only if the adopted person is able to exercise the right referred to in the following paragraph.
6. Persons who have reached the age of majority or have reached the age of majority through their legal representatives shall have the right to know the data on their biological origins. The public entities shall, upon notification to the persons concerned, provide, through their specialized services, the advice and assistance they require in order to give effect to this right.
For this purpose, any private or public entity shall have an obligation to provide to the Public Entities and the Public Prosecutor's Office, when required, the necessary reports and background on the minor and his family of origin.
TITLE VIII
The absence
CHAPTER I
Declaration of absence and its effects.
Article 181.
In any event, a person who has disappeared from his home or from the place of his last residence, without having received further information, may, at the request of the party concerned or the Prosecutor ' s Office, appoint a defence counsel to protect and represent the person who has disappeared at trial or in business that does not admit delay without serious prejudice. Except for cases in which he was lawfully represented voluntarily under article 183.
The spouse present at the age of majority who is not legally separated shall be the natural representative and counsel of the disappeared person; and for his or her lack, the closest relative until the fourth grade, also the adult. In the absence of relatives, not being present, or a known urgency, the judicial secretary shall appoint a person of good standing and good standing, after a hearing by the Public Prosecutor ' s Office.
It may also, in accordance with its prudent discretion, take the necessary measures to preserve the heritage.
Article 182.
It has an obligation to promote and urge the declaration of legal absence, without order of preference:
First. The spouse of the absentee is not legally separated.
Second. The blood relatives until the fourth grade.
Third. The Ministry of Public Prosecutions, whether ex officio or under complaint.
Such a declaration may also be requested by any person who rationally considers that he or she has any right exercised in his or her life or dependent on his or her death over the property of the disappeared person.
Article 183.
The person who has disappeared from his domicile or last residence shall be deemed to be in a situation of legal absence:
First. One year after the last news or in the absence of it since his disappearance, if he had not left him with authority to administer all his property.
Second. After three years, if he had left the administration of all his property in power.
The death or justified resignation of the president, or the expiration of the mandate, determines the legal absence, if the whereabouts of the disappeared person were ignored at the time of their occurrence and one year has elapsed since the last news, and, failing that, since his disappearance. The declaration of absence is entered in the Civil Registry and all general or special mandates granted by the person absent are extinguished.
Article 184.
Unless the judicial secretary has serious reasons for his or her absence, the person concerned shall be represented, his or her person shall be investigated, his or her property shall be protected and administered and his or her duties shall be discharged:
1o A spouse present of legal or de facto non-separate age.
2nd To the child who is of age; if there are several, those who live with the absent and the oldest will be preferred.
3.o To the nearest ascendant of less age of one line or another.
4th To older siblings who have lived with the absent family, with preference to the older one over the younger.
In the absence of the persons concerned, it is entirely up to the person with a good record to be appointed by the judicial secretary, who has been heard by the prosecutor ' s office, to exercise his discretion.
Article 185.
The representative of the person declared absent shall be bound by the following obligations:
1.Invent the movable property and describe the real estate of its representative.
2.a To provide such assurance as the Registrar may reasonably establish. Except for those covered by the first, second and third subparagraphs of the preceding article.
3.a Keep and defend the assets of the absent person and obtain from his property the normal returns of which they are susceptible.
4.a To comply with the rules governing the possession and administration of the property of the absent party set out in the Civil Procedure Act.
The rules governing the exercise of guardianship and the reasons for the inability, removal and excuse of guardians shall apply to the representatives of the absentee, as soon as they are adapted to their special representation.
Article 186.
The legitimate representatives of the person declared absent under article 184 (1), (2) and (3) shall enjoy the temporary possession of the assets of the person absent and shall endorse the liquid products in the amount indicated by the judicial secretary, taking into account the amount of the fruits, income and profits, the number of children of the person absent and the maintenance obligations towards them, the care and actions required by the representative, the conditions which affect the assets and other circumstances of the same nature.
Legitimate representatives within the meaning of the fourth paragraph of this article shall also enjoy temporary possession and shall endorse the fruits, rents and profits to the extent indicated by the judicial secretary, without in any case being able to retain more than two thirds of the liquid products, the remaining third being reserved for the absent person or, where appropriate, for his heirs or successors.
The temporary holders of the assets of the absent person may not sell, tax, mortgage or give them in pledge, but in case of evident necessity or utility, recognized and declared by the judicial secretary, who, when authorizing such acts, shall determine the use of the amount obtained.
Article 187.
If, during the exercise of temporary possession or the exercise of such representation, any proof of his preferential right to such possession is given, the current holder shall be excluded, but he shall not be entitled to the products except from the day on which the application is lodged.
If the missing person appears, his or her assets must be returned to him or her, but not the products collected, except in bad faith, in which case the refund shall also include the fruits received and those received from the day on which it was produced, according to the statement of the judicial secretary.
Article 188.
If, in the course of temporary possession or the exercise of the right of representation, the death of the person declared absent is proved, the succession shall be opened for the benefit of those who at the time of death were his voluntary or legitimate successors, and the temporary possessor must give them the estate of the deceased, but retain, as his own, the goods received in the amount indicated.
If a third party is presented by proof of having acquired, by purchase or other title, property of the absent party, the representation in respect of such property shall cease and shall remain at the disposal of its legitimate owners.
Article 189.
The spouse of the absentee shall be entitled to separate property.
Article 190.
In order to claim a right on behalf of the person constituted in absentia, it must be established that this person existed at the time when his existence was necessary to acquire it.
Article 191.
Without prejudice to the provisions of the preceding article, where a succession is opened to which an absentee is called, the part of the absentee shall be increased to his joint heirs, as there is no person in his own right to claim it. If necessary, they must make an inventory of these assets, with the assistance of the Ministry of Public Prosecutions, which they will reserve until the death certificate has been declared.
Article 192.
The provisions of the preceding article are without prejudice to actions for the request of inheritance or other rights that fall within the competence of the absent person, his representatives or successors. These rights shall not be extinguished except for the duration of the period of limitation. In the registration of immovable property that is added to the joint heirs, the circumstance of being subject to the provisions of this article and the preceding shall be expressed.
CHAPTER II
Declaration of death
Text added, published on 19/10/1939, in force from 08/11/1939.
Article 193.
The declaration of death is as follows:
1st. Ten years have passed since the last news of the missing person, or, in the absence of the missing persons, since his disappearance.
Second. Five years after the last news or, failing that, since his disappearance, if at the end of the said period he has completed the absent seventy-five years.
The time limits expressed shall be counted from the expiration of the calendar year in which the last news was received, or, failing that, from the year in which the disappearance occurred.
Third. One year later, counted from date to date, of an imminent risk of death as a result of violence against life, when a person had not had, after the violence, news of him. In the event of an accident, this period shall be three months.
Violence is presumed if in a subversion of a political or social order a person has disappeared without having heard from him again during the time expressed, provided that six months have passed since the cessation of subversion.
Article 194.
The declaration of death is also appropriate:
1st. Of those who, belonging to or attached to an armed contingent as voluntary auxiliary staff or as information officers, have taken part in and disappeared from field operations after two years, counted from the date of the peace treaty, and if not concluded, since the official declaration of the end of the war.
2. Of those found to be on board a ship whose shipwreck or disappearance by immersion in the sea has been verified, or on board an aircraft whose casualty has been verified and there is rational evidence of the absence of survivors.
3. Of those who were not informed after it was established that they were on board a ship whose shipwreck or disappearance by immersion in the sea was verified or on board an aircraft whose casualty was verified, or, if human remains have been found in such cases, and could not have been identified after eight days have elapsed.
4. Of those on board a ship presumed to be shipwrecked or disappeared by immersion in the sea, by not reaching its destination, or by not having a fixed point of arrival, do not return and there is rational evidence of the absence of survivors, after in any of the cases a month has elapsed since the last news received or, for lack of it, from the date of departure of the ship from the initial port of the journey.
5. of those on board an aircraft presumed to be in distress when travelling over seas, desert or uninhabited areas, because it does not reach its destination, or if it lacks a fixed point of arrival, does not return, and there is rational evidence of the absence of survivors, after a month has elapsed in any of the cases since the last news of the persons or aircraft and, failing that, from the date of the start of the journey. If this is done in stages, the specified time limit shall be calculated from the take-off point from which the latest news was received.
Article 195.
The declaration of death ceases the situation of legal absence, but as long as such declaration does not occur, it is presumed that the absent person has lived until the moment when he must be removed from the deceased, unless investigations to the contrary.
A declaration of death shall state the date from which the death is deemed to have occurred, in accordance with the provisions of the preceding articles, unless there is evidence to the contrary.
Article 196.
The declaration of the death of the missing person shall be signed, the succession to the property of the absent person shall be opened, and its award shall be made in accordance with the law.
The heirs may not dispose of it free of charge until five years after the declaration of death.
Until the same period has elapsed, legacies shall not be handed over, if any, nor shall the legacies have the right to demand them, except for pious commands in the vote of the soul of the testator or legacies in favour of charitable institutions.
It will be an inescapable obligation of successors, even if only one was not necessary partition, to form a detailed inventory of movable property and a description of the real estate.
Article 197.
If after the declaration of death the missing person appears or his existence proves to be present, he shall recover his property in the state in which they are located and shall be entitled to the price of those who have been sold, or to the goods which at this price have been acquired, but he shall not be able to claim from his successors income, fruit or products obtained from the property of his succession, but from the day of his presence or from the declaration that he has not died.
CHAPTER III
Registration in the Civil Registry
Text added, published on 19/10/1939, in force from 08/11/1939.
Article 198.
The Civil Registry shall record the declarations of disappearance, legal absence and death, as well as the legitimate and dative representations agreed upon, and their extinction.
In addition, the inventories of movable property and description of real estate ordered in this Title shall be recorded; the decrees of concession and the transfer and charge deeds made by the legitimate or representative of the absent persons; and the deed of description or inventory of the property, as well as the deeds of partition and award made by virtue of the declaration of death or of the protocolization of the partitional notebooks in their respective cases.
TITLE IX
Guardianship and guardianship of minors
CHAPTER I
Guardianship
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Section 1.a General provisions
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 199.
The following are subject to guardianship:
1. Unemancipated minors in a helpless situation.
2. Unemancipated minors not subject to parental authority.
Article 200.
Guardianship is a duty, shall be exercised for the benefit of the guardian and shall be under the protection of the judicial authority.
The measures and provisions provided for in article 158 may also be agreed by the judicial authority in all cases of guardianship of minors, as soon as the interests of the minors so require.
In the case of minors under the supervision of a public entity, such measures may only be agreed upon by the judicial authority of its own motion or at the request of that entity, the Public Prosecutor ' s Office or the minor himself. The public entity shall be a party to the procedure and the measures agreed upon shall be communicated to it, which shall transmit the communication to the director of the residential centre or to the welcoming family.
Article 201.
The parents may, in a will or notarial public document, appoint guardian, establish guardianship oversight bodies and designate persons to be included in them or order any other provision concerning the person or property of their minor children.
Article 202.
The designations referred to in the preceding article shall bind the judicial authority in establishing guardianship, unless the best interests of the child otherwise require, in which case it shall issue a reasoned decision.
Article 203.
Where there are provisions of the parents made in will or notary public document of the parents, they shall apply together, as soon as they are compatible. If not, the judicial authority shall, in a reasoned decision, take those which it considers most appropriate for the best interests of the child.
Article 204.
The provisions made in a will or a notarial public document on guardianship shall be ineffective if, at the time of adoption, the landlord had been deprived of parental authority.
Article 205.
A person who has property free of charge for a minor may establish the rules governing the administration and disposition of such property and designate the person or persons to exercise it. The functions not conferred on the administrator are those of the tutor.
Article 206.
They shall be obliged to promote the establishment of guardianship, from the moment they know the fact that causes it, the relatives called to it and the natural or legal person under whose custody the minor is present and, if they do not, shall be jointly liable for compensation for the damage caused.
Article 207.
Any person may inform the Public Prosecutor ' s Office or the judicial authority of the decisive act of guardianship in order to initiate the file referred to in the following article.
Article 208.
The judicial authority shall establish guardianship by means of a file of voluntary jurisdiction, following the procedures provided for by law.
Article 209.
Guardianship shall be exercised under the supervision of the Department of Public Prosecutions, which shall act on its own initiative or at the request of the minor or any interested party.
At any time he may require the guardian to inform him of the situation of the minor and of the status of the guardianship administration.
Article 210.
The judicial authority may establish, in the decision establishing guardianship or in a subsequent decision, such measures of supervision and control as it deems appropriate, for the benefit of the guardian. It may also at any time require the guardian to report on the situation of the minor and on the status of the administration.
Section 2.a On disqualification of guardianship and appointment of guardian
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 211.
All natural persons who, in the opinion of the judicial authority, meet the conditions of fitness sufficient for the proper performance of their duties may be guardians and do not have any of the causes of inability set out in the following articles.
Article 212.
Foundations and other non-profit legal persons, public or private, whose purposes include the protection and assistance of minors, may be guardians.
Article 213.
The appointment of guardian shall be preferred by:
1. To the person or persons designated by the parents in will or notarial public document.
2. The ascendant or brother who designates the judicial authority.
Exceptionally, in a reasoned decision, the order of the preceding paragraph may be altered or all the persons referred to in the preceding paragraph may be dispensed with, if the best interests of the child so require. Integration into the family life of the guardian is considered beneficial for the child.
Article 214.
In the absence of the persons referred to in the preceding article, the judicial authority shall appoint a guardian who, because of his relations with the guardian and in the best interests of the guardian, considers most suitable.
Article 215.
If several siblings are to be appointed as guardians, the appointment shall be made by the same person.
Article 216.
They may not be guardians:
1. Those who by judicial decision were deprived or suspended in the exercise of parental authority or, in whole or in part, of the rights of custody and protection.
2. Those who have been legally removed from guardianship, wardship or former guardianship.
Article 217.
The following persons may not be appointed by the judicial authority:
1. Anyone who has been excluded by the parents of the guardian.
2. Any person who has been sentenced in a final judgement for any offence which reasonably implies that he will not perform guardianship well.
3.o The administrator who has been replaced in his or her administrative powers during the course of the proceedings.
4o To whom the statement is attributable as guilty of a contest, unless the guardianship is the sole responsibility of the person.
5.o A person who has a conflict of interest with the person under guardianship.
Article 218.
Guardianship shall be exercised by a single guardian except:
1. Where, because of special circumstances in the person or property of the person under guardianship, it is appropriate to separate the person from the person ' s guardian and the person ' s property, each of whom shall act independently within the scope of his or her jurisdiction, although decisions concerning both persons shall be taken jointly.
2. If a person is appointed as guardian of his or her brother ' s children and it is considered desirable that the spouse of the guardian or the person in a similar relationship of affection also exercise guardianship.
3. Where the parents of the guardian have designated in a will or a notarial public document more than one guardian to exercise joint guardianship.
Article 219.
In the case of paragraph 3 of the preceding article, if the parents have expressly provided for it, it may be decided, when appointing guardians, that they may exercise the powers of guardianship in solidarity.
Failure to act on such appointment and, without prejudice to the provisions of paragraph 1 of the preceding article, the powers of guardianship conferred on several guardians shall be exercised jointly by them, but shall be valid with the agreement of the greatest number. In the absence of such an agreement, the judicial authority, after hearing the guardians and the guardian if he has sufficient maturity, shall decide without further recourse what it deems appropriate. In the event that disagreements are repeated and seriously hamper the exercise of guardianship, the judicial authority may reorganize its functioning and even appoint new guardian.
Article 220.
If the guardians have their jointly assigned powers and there is incompatibility or opposition of interest in any of them for an act or contract, it may be performed by the other guardian or, if there are several, by the others jointly.
Article 221.
In cases where any guardian ceases for any reason, guardianship shall continue with the others unless otherwise expressly provided for in the appointment.
Article 222.
The guardianship of children in distress shall be the responsibility of the public body entrusted with the protection of minors in the respective territory by the Ministry of the Law.
However, the appointment of guardian shall be made in accordance with the ordinary rules where there are natural persons who, by reason of their relations with the minor or other circumstances, may assume guardianship in the interests of the minor.
In the case of the preceding paragraph, prior to the judicial appointment of a guardian, or in the same decision, the suspension or deprivation of parental authority or removal of the guardian, if any, shall be agreed.
They shall be entitled to exercise the actions of deprivation of parental authority, to promote the removal of the guardian and to request the appointment of a guardian for children in distress, the Public Prosecutor ' s Office, the public entity and those called upon to exercise guardianship.
Article 223.
The causes and procedures for the removal and excuse of guardianship shall be the same as those established for the curatorship.
The judicial authority may order removal at the request of the minor if he or she is sufficiently mature. In any event, his opinion will be taken into account and he will be heard if he is over twelve years of age.
Once the removal has been declared, a new guardian shall be appointed in the manner set out in this Code.
Section 3.a. The exercise of guardianship
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 224.
The rules of guardianship shall apply to guardianship, as a substitute.
Article 225.
The guardian is the representative of the minor, except for those acts that the minor may perform alone or for which he or she only needs assistance.
Article 226.
The guardian is prohibited from:
1. To receive the liberalities of the guardian or his successors, until his administration has been definitively approved.
2. To represent the guardian when in the same act he intervenes on behalf of himself or a third party and there is a conflict of interest.
3. To acquire by title onerous property of the protected person or to transmit for his part goods of equal title.
Article 227.
Guardians shall exercise their duties in the interests of the child, in accordance with his/her personality and with respect for his/her rights.
Where necessary for the exercise of guardianship, they may seek the assistance of the authority.
Article 228.
The guardian is obliged to ensure guardianship and, in particular:
1. To watch over him and to obtain him food.
2. To educate the child and provide him with comprehensive training.
3. To promote their better insertion into society.
4. To administer the minor ' s estate with due diligence.
5. To report annually to the judicial authority on the situation of the minor and to report annually to the juvenile administration.
6. To hear the child before making decisions affecting him or her.
Article 229.
The guardian has the right to pay, provided that the minor's assets permit, as well as the reimbursement of the expenses justified, amounts to be paid from that estate.
Unless the parents have established otherwise, and without prejudice to the possibility that these provisions may be amended by the judicial authority if it deems it appropriate for the interests of the child, it is for the judicial authority to determine the amount and manner in which it is to be collected, taking into account the work to be performed and the value and profitability of the property.
It may also be established that the guardian shall bear the fruits of the estate of the guardian in exchange for the maintenance, if the parents so provide. The judicial authority may terminate this provision or establish it even if the parents have not provided for it, if it deems it appropriate in the interests of the child.
Article 230.
A person who, in the exercise of a guardianship function, suffers damages, without his fault, shall be entitled to compensation for them from the assets of the guardian, if he is otherwise unable to obtain compensation.
Section 4.a Expiration of guardianship and final accountability
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 231.
Guardianship is extinguished:
1. For the age of majority, emancipation or granting of the benefit of the age of majority to the child.
2. For the adoption of the child.
3. Death or declaration of death of the minor.
4. When, having been caused by deprivation or suspension of parental authority, the holder of parental authority recovers it, or when the cause that prevented the holder of parental authority from exercising it in fact disappears.
Article 232.
The guardian, without prejudice to the obligation of annual accountability, shall, upon termination of his or her duties, submit to the judicial authority the justified general account of his or her administration within three months, which may be extended for as long as is necessary if he or she has a fair cause.
The action to demand the surrender of this account prescribes five years from the end of the period set for it.
Before deciding on the approval of the account, the judicial authority shall also hear, where appropriate, the new guardian and the person who has been under guardianship or his heirs.
The judicial approval of the accounts shall not prevent the exercise of actions that may assist the guardian and the minor or his successors on the basis of guardianship.
Article 233.
The necessary costs of accountability shall be borne by the estate of the person under guardianship.
The balance of the general account shall be in the legal interest, in favour of or against the guardian. If the balance is in favour of the guardian, the legal interest shall accrue from the request for payment, after restitution of the property to the owner. If it is against the guardian, the legal interest shall accrue after the expiry of the three months following the approval of the account.
Article 234.
The guardian shall be liable for damages caused to the minor by his fault or negligence.
The action to claim this responsibility prescribes three years from the end of accountability.
CHAPTER II
From the juvenile court defender
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 235.
In the following cases, a juvenile court defender shall be appointed:
1. Where there is a conflict of interest between minors and their legal representatives in any case, except in cases where the law provides for other means of saving the child.
2. Where, for any reason, the guardian does not perform his or her duties, until the determining cause is terminated or another person is appointed.
3. Where the emancipated minor requires the capacity supplement provided for in articles 247 and 248 and to whom it is appropriate to lend it, he cannot do so or there is a conflict of interest with them.
Article 236.
The rules of the Ombudsman for Persons with Disabilities shall apply to the juvenile court defender. The juvenile ' s legal guardian shall exercise his or her duties in the interests of the child, in accordance with his or her personality and with respect for his or her rights.
CHAPTER III
From the custody of the minor
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 237.
1. Where the judicial authority is aware of the existence of a de facto guardian, it may require him or her to report the situation of the minor ' s person and property and his or her actions in relation to them, and may establish such control and surveillance measures as it deems appropriate.
Precautionaryly, until such time as the situation of de facto custody is maintained and until the appropriate protective measure is established, if appropriate, guardianship powers may be granted to the custodians. A temporary placement may also be established, and the caretakers are welcome.
2. The declaration of the situation of neglect of minors shall be made where, in addition to this, the objective budgets for the lack of assistance provided for in Article 172 are provided.
In other cases, the de facto guardian may promote the deprivation or suspension of parental authority, removal of guardianship or appointment of guardian.
Article 238.
The rules governing the de facto custody of persons with disabilities shall apply to the de facto custody of the child, as a substitute.
TITLE X
Of the oldest age and emancipation
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 239.
Emancipation takes place:
1st For the oldest.
2. By granting those exercising parental authority.
3rd. By judicial concession.
Article 240.
The oldest age begins at the age of eighteen.
For the calculation of the years of majority the full date of birth shall be included.
Article 241.
In order for emancipation to take place by granting those exercising parental authority, the minor is required to be 16 years of age and to consent to it. This emancipation shall be granted by public deed or by appearance before the registrar.
Article 242.
The granting of emancipation must be registered in the Civil Registry, which does not in the meantime produce effects against third parties.
Emancipation granted cannot be revoked.
Article 243.
A child over 16 years of age who, with the consent of the parents, lives independently of the parents, shall be considered emancipated for all purposes. Parents may revoke this consent.
Article 244.
The judicial authority may grant the emancipation of children over the age of sixteen if they request it and after hearing the parents:
(1) When the person exercising parental authority marries or maritally lives with a person other than the other parent.
2. When parents live separately.
3. When any cause seriously hinders the exercise of parental authority is present.
Article 245.
The judicial authority may also, upon the report of the Public Prosecutor, grant the benefit of the highest age to the person under guardianship over sixteen years of age who so requests.
Article 246.
The adult may perform all acts of civil life, except for the exceptions established in special cases by this Code.
Article 247.
Emancipation empowers the minor to govern his or her person and property as if he or she were older; but until he or she reaches the age of majority, the emancipated person may not borrow, tax or dispose of real estate and commercial or industrial establishments or objects of extraordinary value without the consent of his or her parents and, in the absence of both, without the consent of his or her legal counsel.
The emancipated minor may be brought to trial alone.
The provisions of this article also apply to a minor who has obtained the legal benefit of the age of majority.
Please note that although the legislator cites additional provision 15, we have interpreted it to be an error and understand that it is the final provision 15.
Article 248.
In order for a married minor to be able to dispose of or tax real estate, commercial establishments or objects of extraordinary value that are common, the consent of the two spouses is sufficient, if the other spouse is older; if he or she is also a minor, the consent of the parents or legal counsel of both spouses is also required.
TITLE XI
Measures to support persons with disabilities in the exercise of their legal capacity
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
CHAPTER I
General provisions
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 249.
Measures to support adults or emancipated minors who require them for the proper exercise of their legal capacity shall be aimed at enabling the full development of their personality and legal development on an equal basis. Such support measures should be based on respect for the dignity of the person and the protection of his or her fundamental rights. Those of legal or judicial origin shall only proceed in the absence or insufficiency of the will of the person concerned. All of them must comply with the principles of necessity and proportionality.
Supporters should act in accordance with the will, desires and preferences of those who require it. They shall also endeavour to enable the person with disabilities to develop his or her own decision-making process by informing him or her, helping him or her in understanding and reasoning and facilitating his or her expression of preferences. They will also encourage persons with disabilities to exercise their legal capacity with less support in the future.
In exceptional cases, where, despite considerable effort, it is not possible to determine the will, wishes and preferences of the individual, support measures may include representative functions. In this case, the exercise of these functions should take into account the life course of the person with disabilities, their beliefs and values, as well as the factors that she would have taken into account, in order to make the decision that the person would have made in case of no representation.
The judicial authority may issue such safeguards as it deems appropriate to ensure that the exercise of support measures conforms to the criteria resulting from this provision and, in particular, to the will, wishes and preferences of the person who requires them.
Article 250.
Measures to support the exercise of the legal capacity of the persons who need it are, in addition to those of a voluntary nature, the de facto guardian, the curator and the judicial defender.
The role of support measures shall be to assist persons with disabilities in the exercise of their legal capacity in areas where this is necessary, respecting their will, wishes and preferences.
Voluntary support measures are those established by the person with disabilities, who designates who should support him or her and with what scope. Any voluntary support measure may be accompanied by the safeguards necessary to ensure at all times and under all circumstances respect for the will, wishes and preferences of the person.
De facto custody is an informal supportive measure that may exist when there are no voluntary or judicial measures that are being effectively implemented.
Curatela is a formal support measure that will be applied to those who need support on a continuous basis. Its extent will be determined by the corresponding court decision in accordance with the situation and circumstances of the person with disabilities and their support needs.
The appointment of a legal defender as a formal support measure shall be made where the need for support is occasionally required, even if it is recurrent.
In identifying support measures, efforts will be made to avoid situations where conflicts of interest or undue influence may occur.
Any support measure may not be exercised by any person who, under a contractual relationship, provides care, residential or similar services to the person requiring support.
Article 251.
A person who performs any support measure is prohibited:
1. To receive liberalities from the person requiring support or from his or her successors, until his or her management has been definitively approved, except in the case of gifts of customary value or goods of low value.
2. To provide support measures where the same act intervenes on behalf of itself or a third party and there is a conflict of interest.
3. To acquire by title onerous property of the person who needs the support or to transmit it for his part goods of equal title.
In voluntary support measures, these prohibitions will not apply where they have been expressly excluded by the grantor in the constitution document.
Article 252.
A person who has property free of charge for a person in need of support may establish the rules governing the administration and disposition of such property and designate the person or persons to whom such powers are entrusted. The powers not conferred on the administrator shall be vested in the person favoured by the disposition of the property, who shall exercise them, if necessary, with the appropriate support.
They may also establish such supervisory or supervisory bodies as they deem appropriate for the exercise of the powers conferred upon them.
Article 253.
Where a person is in a situation requiring support for the exercise of his legal capacity as a matter of urgency and lacks a de facto guardian, the support shall be provided provisionally by the public entity in the respective territory entrusted with this function. The entity shall report the situation to the Public Prosecutor within 24 hours.
CHAPTER II
Voluntary support measures
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Section 1.a General provisions
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 254.
Where it is reasonably anticipated in the two years preceding the age of majority that a minor subject to parental authority or guardianship may, after the age of parental authority, require support in the exercise of his legal capacity, the judicial authority may, at the request of the minor, agree, if it deems it necessary, on the basis of the application of the parents, the guardian or the Public Prosecutor's Office, the source of the appropriate support measure for the completion of the minority. These measures will be taken if the person over 16 years of age has not made his or her own forecasts when he or she reaches the age of majority. In another case, the minor will be involved in the process, according to his will, wishes and preferences.
Article 255.
Any person who is of legal age or of minor emancipated in anticipation or assessment of the occurrence of circumstances which may hinder him or her from exercising his or her legal capacity on an equal basis with others may provide for or agree in public deed support measures relating to his or her person or property.
It may also establish the regime of action, the scope of the powers of the person or persons to support him or her, or the form of exercise of support, which shall be provided in accordance with article 249.
It may also provide for such measures or control bodies as it deems appropriate, the safeguards necessary to avoid abuse, conflict of interest or undue influence and the mechanisms and time limits for reviewing support measures, in order to ensure respect for its will, wishes and preferences.
The authorising notary shall, without delay and ex officio communicate the public document containing the measures supporting the Civil Registry for record in the grantor's individual registry.
Only in the absence or insufficiency of such measures of a voluntary nature, and in the absence of de facto custody involving sufficient support, may the judicial authority adopt other supplementary or supplementary measures.
Section 2.a On preventive powers and mandates
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 256.
The power-holder may include a clause stipulating that the power remains if it requires support in the exercise of its capacity in the future.
Article 257.
The power of attorney may grant power only on the assumption that in the future it requires support in the exercise of its capacity. In this case, to prove that the situation of need for support has occurred, the forecasts of the power of attorney will be kept. In order to ensure compliance with these provisions, a notarial act shall be issued, if necessary, which, in addition to the judgment of the Notary, incorporates an expert report to the same effect.
Article 258.
The powers referred to in the preceding articles shall remain in force despite the establishment of other support measures in favour of the power of attorney, whether they have been established by the courts or have been provided for by the person concerned.
If they have been granted in favour of the spouse or the common-law partner of the power-bearer, the cessation of cohabitation shall automatically cease, unless the grantor has the contrary will or the cessation is determined by the latter ' s internment.
The power of attorney may, in addition to the powers it grants, establish such control measures or bodies as it deems appropriate, conditions and instructions for the exercise of powers, safeguards to prevent abuse, conflict of interest or undue influence and mechanisms and time limits for the review of support measures, in order to ensure respect for its will, wishes and preferences. It may also provide for specific forms of extinguishing power.
Any person entitled to initiate the procedure for providing support and the curator, if any, may request judicial termination of the preventive powers, if any of the cases provided for the removal of the curator are brought before the proxy, unless the power of attorney has provided otherwise.
Article 259.
Where the power contains a subsistence clause in the event that the power needs support in the exercise of its capacity or is granted only for that case and, in both cases, includes all the business of the grantor, the proxy, the situation of necessity for support, shall be subject to the rules applicable to the curate in all matters not provided for in the power, unless the power has determined otherwise.
Article 260.
The preventive powers referred to in the preceding articles shall be granted in public deed.
The authorising notary shall communicate them ex officio and without delay to the Civil Registry for registration in the individual registry of the authorized person.
Article 261.
The exercise of representative powers shall be personal, without prejudice to the possibility of entrusting the performance of one or more specific acts to third persons. Those powers which have as their object the protection of the person shall not be delegated.
Article 262.
The provisions of this chapter shall also apply to the case of powerless mandate.
CHAPTER III
De facto custody of persons with disabilities
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 263.
A person who has been in the care of a person with a disability will continue to perform his or her function even if there are support measures of a voluntary or judicial nature, provided that they are not being implemented effectively.
Article 264.
Where, exceptionally, representative action by the de facto guardian is required, the de facto guardian must obtain authorization to perform it through the relevant voluntary jurisdiction file, in which the person with disabilities will be heard. The judicial authorization to act as a representative may be granted, subject to verification of its need, in the terms and conditions appropriate to the circumstances of the case. The authorization may include one or more acts necessary for the development of the support function and shall be exercised in accordance with the will, wishes and preferences of the person with disabilities.
In any event, a person exercising custody shall seek judicial authorization, in accordance with the foregoing paragraph, to consent to the acts listed in article 287.
No judicial authorization shall be required when the guardian applies for a financial benefit in favour of the person with disabilities, provided that the benefit does not imply a significant change in the person ' s way of life, or performs legal acts on the person ' s property that have little economic relevance and have no special personal or family significance.
The judicial authority may agree to the appointment of a judicial counsel for matters which by their nature so require.
Article 265.
Through a voluntary jurisdiction file, the judicial authority may at any time, on its own initiative, require the guardian, at the request of the Public Prosecutor ' s Office or at the request of any interested party, to report on his or her actions and to establish such safeguards as it deems necessary.
It may also require the keeper to be held accountable at any time.
Article 266.
The keeper is entitled to reimbursement of the justified expenses and compensation for the damage caused by the custody, in charge of the property of the person to whom it supports.
Article 267.
The guard is effectively extinguished:
1.o When the person to whom support is given requests that it be organized in another way.
2.o When the causes that motivated it disappear.
3. When the guardian ceases to act, in which case he must first inform the public body entrusted in the respective territory with the functions of promoting autonomy and assistance to persons with disabilities.
4. Where, at the request of the Public Prosecutor ' s Office or of any person interested in exercising the support of the person in custody, the judicial authority considers it appropriate.
CHAPTER IV
From the curatela
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Section 1.a General provisions
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 268.
The measures taken by the judicial authority in the procedure of provision of support shall be proportionate to the needs of the person who needs them, shall always respect the maximum autonomy of that person in the exercise of his legal capacity and shall in any case meet his will, wishes and preferences.
The support measures taken by the courts will be reviewed periodically within a maximum period of three years. However, the judicial authority may, exceptionally and in a reasoned manner, in the procedure of provision or, where appropriate, of modification of support, set a period of higher review not exceeding six years.
Without prejudice to the above, the support measures taken by the courts shall in any event be reviewed in the event of any change in the situation of the person who may require an amendment to those measures.
Article 269.
The judicial authority shall constitute the curatorship by reasoned decision where there is no other sufficient support measure for the disabled person.
The judicial authority shall determine the acts for which the person requires the assistance of the curator in the exercise of his legal capacity in response to his specific support needs.
Only in exceptional cases where it is essential for the circumstances of the person with disabilities, the judicial authority shall determine in a reasoned decision the specific acts in which the curator is to assume the representation of the person with disabilities.
The acts in which the curator is required to provide support shall be determined in a precise manner, indicating, where appropriate, which acts are those in which he or she is required to act. The curator shall act in accordance with the criteria laid down in Article 249.
In no case may a judicial decision include deprivation of rights alone.
Article 270.
The judicial authority shall establish in the decision constituting the curatorship or in a subsequent decision such control measures as it deems appropriate to ensure respect for the rights, will and preferences of the person requiring support, as well as to prevent abuses, conflicts of interest and undue influence. It may also at any time require the curator, within the scope of his or her duties, to report on the personal or property situation of the curator.
Without prejudice to periodic reviews of these decisions, the Public Prosecutor may at any time seek such information as he deems necessary in order to ensure the proper functioning of the curate.
Section 2.a: Self-healing and the appointment of the curator
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Subsection 1.a of self-healing
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 271.
Any person who has attained the age of majority or who is an emancipated minor may, in anticipation of the occurrence of circumstances which may make it difficult for him to exercise his legal capacity on an equal basis with others, propose in public deed the appointment or exclusion of one or more persons determined for the exercise of the function of curator.
It may also lay down provisions on the functioning and content of the curate, in particular on the care of the person, rules governing the administration and disposition of his or her property, the remuneration of the curator, the obligation to make an inventory or to dispense it, and measures of surveillance and control, and propose to the persons to be carried out.
Article 272.
The proposal for appointment and other voluntary provisions referred to in the preceding article shall bind the judicial authority by constituting the curate.
However, the judicial authority may dispense wholly or partially with these voluntary provisions, on its own initiative or at the request of persons called by law to exercise the duty of curatorship or of the Public Prosecutor ' s Office and, in any case, by reasoned decision, if there are serious circumstances unknown to the person who established them or altered the cases expressed by the latter or who presumably took account of them in its provisions.
Article 273.
If the appointment of substitutes to the curator is proposed in the establishment of the self-curate and the order of replacement is not specified, the proposed one will be preferred in the subsequent document. If several proposals are made in the same document, the proposal will be preferred first.
Article 274.
The choice of the curator from those related in public writing by the person concerned may be delegated to the spouse or to another person.
Subsection 2.a of the appointment of the curator
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 275.
1. Persons of legal age who, in the opinion of the judicial authority, are suitable for the proper performance of their duties, may be curators.
Also, foundations and other non-profit legal persons, public or private, may be curators, whose purposes include the promotion of autonomy and assistance to persons with disabilities.
2. They may not be healers:
1. Those who have been excluded by the person who needs support.
2. Those who by judicial decision were deprived or suspended in the exercise of parental authority or, in whole or in part, of the rights of custody and protection.
3. Those who have been legally removed from guardianship, wardship or former guardian.
3. The following persons may not be appointed as curator by the judicial authority, except in duly substantiated exceptional circumstances:
1o Anyone who has been convicted of any offence which reasonably implies that the curate will not perform well.
2. Any person who has a conflict of interest with the person who needs support.
3.o The administrator who has been replaced in his or her administrative powers during the course of the proceedings.
4o To anyone who is attributable to the statement as guilty of a contest, unless the curatorship is only the person's.
Article 276.
The judicial authority shall appoint a curator who has been proposed for appointment by the person in need of support or by the person to whom he or she has delegated, unless one of the circumstances provided for in the second paragraph of Article 272 is fulfilled. The judicial authority shall also be subject to the provisions of article 275.
In the absence of such a proposal, the judicial authority shall appoint a curator:
1. The spouse, or a person in a de facto comparable situation, provided that they live with the person who needs the support.
2. The son or descendant. If there are several, it will be preferred if they live together with the person who needs the support.
3. The parent or, failing that, ascendant. If there are several, it will be preferred for them to live with the person who needs the support.
4. To the person or persons who the spouse or partner or parents had provided in a public will or document.
5.o Whoever was acting as a keeper in fact.
6.o The brother, relative or close friend who lives with the person who needs the cure.
7o To a legal person who meets the conditions set out in the second subparagraph of Article 4(1) above.
The judicial authority may alter the order in the previous subparagraph, after the person requiring support has been heard.
When, after hearing, his will is not clear, the judicial authority may alter the legal order, appointing the person best suited to understand and interpret his will, wishes and preferences.
Article 277.
The appointment of more than one curator can be proposed if the will and needs of the person who needs the support justify it. In particular, the posts of curator of the person and curator of the property may be separated as separate positions.
When the curate is entrusted to several persons, the judicial authority shall establish the mode of operation, respecting the will of the person who needs the support.
Article 278.
Those who, after appointment, incur a legal cause of inability, or misbehave in their performance for failure to perform the duties proper to the position, by notorious ineptitude of their exercise, or when serious and continuing problems of coexistence with the person they support, arise from the curatorship.
The judicial authority, on its own initiative or at the request of the person in whose favour the support was established or of the Public Prosecutor's Office, when it knows for itself or through any interested person circumstances that compromise the proper performance of the curatorship, may order the removal of the curator by means of a voluntary judicial file.
During the processing of the removal file, the judicial authority may suspend the curator from his duties and, if deemed necessary, shall agree to the appointment of a judicial defender.
Once the removal has been declared by the courts, a new curator shall be appointed in the manner set out in this Code, unless another measure of support is relevant.
Article 279.
The performance of the curate may be excused if it is excessively burdensome or involves serious difficulty for the person appointed to the post. The curator may also be excused from continuing to exercise the curate when the excuses come upon him during his performance.
Private legal persons may be excused if they lack sufficient means for the proper performance of the curatela or the conditions of exercise of the curatela are not in accordance with their statutory purposes.
The person claiming cause of excuse must do so within 15 days of the date of the appointment. If the case is over, you can do it at any time.
As long as the judicial authority decides on the excuse, the appointed person shall be obliged to exercise his or her function. If it does not do so and support action is required, a judicial defender shall be appointed to replace the curator, and the person responsible for the expenses caused by the excuse, if rejected, shall be replaced.
If the excuse is accepted, a new curator shall be appointed.
Article 280.
The curator appointed in response to a testamentary provision that excuses himself from the curate for any reason, will lose what the testator has left in consideration of the appointment.
Article 281.
The curator is entitled to compensation, provided that the property of the disabled person permits, as well as to reimbursement of the justified expenses and compensation for the harm suffered without fault by him in the performance of his duties, amounts to be paid from that property.
It is for the judicial authority to determine the amount and manner of collection, taking into account the work to be carried out and the value and profitability of the goods.
In no case may the admission of grounds for excuse or the decision to remove the natural or legal persons designated for the performance of the support result in protection or defencelessness for the person who needs such support, and the judicial authority must act ex officio, through the necessary cooperation of the persons called to do so, or, if not, with the inexcusable cooperation of the competent public bodies or entities and of the Public Prosecutor's Office.
There shall be no excuse where the performance of the support has been entrusted to a public entity.
Section 3.a From the exercise of the curatela
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 282.
The curator shall take up his post before the counsel of the Administration of Justice.
Once in the exercise of the curate, he/she shall be obliged to maintain personal contact with the person to whom he/she will support and to perform the duties entrusted with due diligence.
The curator shall assist the person to whom he or she supports in the exercise of his or her legal capacity in accordance with his or her will, wishes and preferences.
The curator shall ensure that the disabled person is able to develop his or her own decision-making process.
The curator will seek to develop the skills of the person he or she supports so that he or she can exercise his or her capacity with less support in the future.
Article 283.
Where the person performing the curatorship is temporarily prevented from acting in a particular case, or where there is an occasional conflict of interest between him and the person he supports, the counsel of the Administration of Justice shall appoint a legal counsel to replace him. For this appointment, the person who needs the support shall be heard and his/her will, wishes and preferences respected.
If, in the case provided for in the preceding paragraph, there are several curators with homogeneous functions, they shall be assumed by those among them who are not affected by the impediment or conflict of interest.
If the situation of impediment or conflict is prolonged or repeated, the judicial authority of its own motion, at the request of the Public Prosecutor's Office, of any person entitled to urge the procedure of providing support or of any person who is performing the curatorship and after hearing the disabled person and the Public Prosecutor's Office, may reorganize the functioning of the curatorship, including the appointment of a new curator.
Article 284.
Where the judicial authority deems it necessary for exceptional reasons, it may require the curator to make sure that his obligations are fulfilled and determine the form and amount of the bond. Once established, the bond will be subject to judicial approval.
At any time, the judicial authority may modify or terminate the guarantee provided.
Article 285.
The curator with representative powers shall be obliged to make an inventory of the assets of the person in whose favour support has been established within sixty days from the date on which he or she took office.
The inventory shall be drawn up before the counsel of the Administration of Justice, with summons from such persons as it deems appropriate.
The legal counsel of the Administration of Justice may extend the period provided for in the first subparagraph if cause arises.
Money, jewellery, precious objects and transferable securities or documents which, in the opinion of the legal counsel of the Administration of Justice, should not be held by the curator shall be deposited in an establishment intended for this purpose.
The costs incurred by the above measures shall be borne by the property of the person in whose support the curate has been established.
Article 286.
In the event that the curator does not include in the inventory the credits he has against the person he supports, he or she will be deemed to waive them.
Article 287.
The curator who performs the functions of representing the person requiring support needs judicial authorization for the acts determined by the decision and, in any case, for the following:
1. To perform acts of personal or family transcendence where the person concerned cannot do so on his own, except as provided by law in matters of detention, informed consent in the field of health or other special laws.
2. To dispose of or tax immovable property, commercial or industrial establishments, property or rights of special personal or family significance, movable property of extraordinary value, precious objects and unlisted transferable securities on official markets of the person with supportive measures, to give property under lease for an initial term exceeding six years, or to conclude contracts or perform acts of a specific nature that are susceptible to registration. Except for the sale of the right of preferential subscription of shares. The disposal of the assets referred to in this paragraph shall be effected by direct sale unless the Tribunal considers that disposal by judicial auction is necessary for the better and full guarantee of the rights and interests of the holder.
3. To have property or rights free of charge by means of supportive measures, except for those of low economic importance and without special personal or family significance.
4. To waive rights, as well as to compromise or submit to arbitration questions relating to the interests of the person whose curator holds it, unless they are of little economic relevance. No judicial authorization for consumer arbitration shall be required.
5. o Accept without inventory benefit any inheritance or repudiate this or the liberalities.
6. To incur extraordinary expenses on the property of the person to whom it supports.
7th To file a complaint on behalf of the person to whom it supports, except in urgent or minor cases. The judicial authorization shall not be required when the person with disabilities urges the review of the court decision in which the support had previously been determined.
8.o Give and take money on loan and lend collateral or bond.
9. To conclude contracts for life insurance, life income and similar contracts, where such contracts require investments or contributions of extraordinary value.
Article 288.
Where the judicial authority considers it appropriate to guarantee the will, wishes and preferences of the person with disabilities, it may authorize the curator to perform a plurality of acts of the same nature or relating to the same economic activity, specifying the circumstances and fundamental characteristics of such acts.
Article 289.
The partition of inheritance or the division of commons by the representative curator will not require judicial authorization, but once practiced they will require judicial approval. If a judicial defender had been appointed for the partition, he would also have to obtain judicial approval, unless otherwise provided for in the appointment.
Article 290.
Before authorizing or approving any of the acts covered by the preceding articles, the judicial authority shall hear the Public Prosecutor ' s Office and the person with support measures and shall collect such reports as may be requested or deemed relevant.
Section 4.a On the extinction of the curatela
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 291.
The curatela is extinguished in full by the death or declaration of death of the person with supportive measures.
Likewise, the curatela is extinguished by judicial decision when this support measure is no longer necessary or when a more appropriate form of support is adopted for the person subject to the curate.
Article 292.
The curator, without prejudice to the obligation of periodic accountability imposed on him or her by the judicial authority, shall, upon termination of his or her duties, submit to it the justified general account of his or her administration within three months, which may be extended for as long as is necessary if he or she is in a just case.
The action to demand the surrender of this account prescribes five years from the end of the period set for it.
Before deciding on the approval of the account, the judicial authority shall also hear the new curator, the person supported, or his heirs.
The judicial approval of the accounts shall not prevent the exercise of the actions that may assist the curator and the person with disabilities who receives the support or his successors on the basis of the curatela.
Article 293.
The necessary costs of accountability will be borne by the assets of the person supported.
The balance of the general account shall be in the legal interest, in favour of or against the curator. If the balance is in favour of the curator, the legal interest shall accrue from the request for payment, after restitution of the goods to the holder. If it is against the curator, the legal interest will accrue after the three months following the approval of the account.
Article 294.
The curator shall be liable for any damage caused by his fault or negligence to the person to whom he or she supports.
The action to claim this responsibility prescribes three years from the end of accountability.
CHAPTER V
From the Judicial Defender of Persons with Disabilities
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 295.
A legal defender for persons with disabilities shall be appointed in the following cases:
1. Where, for any reason, the supporter is unable to do so, until the determining cause has ceased or another person has been appointed.
2. Where there is a conflict of interest between the person with a disability and the person who is to support him or her.
3. When, during the processing of the excuse invoked by the curator, the judicial authority considers it necessary.
4. Where the provision of judicial measures to support the disabled person has been promoted and the judicial authority considers it necessary to provide for the administration of the property until a judicial decision has been taken.
5.o Where the person with disabilities requires the establishment of occasional support measures, even if they are recurrent.
Once the person with disabilities has been heard, the judicial authority shall appoint a legal counsel who is best suited to respect, understand and interpret the will, wishes and preferences of the person.
Article 296.
No legal counsel shall be appointed if the support has been entrusted to more than one person, unless no one can act or the judicial authority considers the appointment necessary on grounds.
Article 297.
Cases of inability, excuse and removal of the curator shall apply to the defence counsel, as well as the obligations attributed to him to know and respect the will, wishes and preferences of the person to whom support is given.
Article 298.
The appointment may exempt the legal counsel from sale by public auction, setting a minimum price, and subsequent judicial approval of the acts.
The defence counsel shall be held accountable once the case has been heard.
CHAPTER VI
Liability for damage caused to others
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 299.
The person with disabilities shall be liable for damages caused to others, in accordance with Chapter II of Title XVI of Book Four, without prejudice to the provisions on non-contractual liability in respect of other possible perpetrators.
Article 299 bis.
(Repealed)
Text added, published on 26/10/1983, in force from 15/11/1983.
TITLE XII
Common provisions
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Article 300.
Judicial decisions and notarial public documents on guardianship and support measures for persons with disabilities must be registered with the Civil Registry.
Article 301 a 324.
(Repealed)
Text added, published on 03/06/2021, in force from 03/09/2021.
Artículos 325 a 332.
(Repealed)
SECOND BOOK
Of animals, property, property and their modifications
TITLE I
Classification of animals and goods
Preliminary provisions
Text added, published on 16/12/2021, in force from 05/01/2022.
Article 333.
All things that are or may be subject to appropriation are considered movable or immovable property. Animals may also be appropriated, subject to the limitations established by law.
Article 333 bis.
1. Animals are living beings endowed with sensitivity. They shall be subject to the legal regime of property and property only to the extent that it is compatible with its nature or with the provisions intended for its protection.
2. The owner, possessor or holder of any other right in an animal must exercise his rights over it and his duties of care respecting its quality of being sentient, ensuring its well-being in accordance with the characteristics of each species and respecting the limitations set forth in this and the other rules in force.
3. The costs of healing and caring for an injured or abandoned animal are recoverable by the person who has paid them by means of the repeated action against the owner of the animal or, where appropriate, against the person to whom his care would have been attributed to the extent to which they have been provided and even if they have been higher than the economic value of the animal.
4. In the event that the injury to a companion animal has caused his death or serious impairment of his physical or mental health, both his owner and those living with the animal are entitled to the compensation include reparation for the moral damage caused.
Text added, published on 16/12/2021, in force from 05/01/2022.
CHAPTER I
Real estate
Article 334.
1. These are real estate:
1. Lands, buildings, roads and buildings of all kinds attached to the ground.
2. The trees and plants and the fruit slopes, while attached to the earth or forming an integral part of a building.
3. All that is attached to a building in a fixed manner, so that it cannot be separated from it without breaking with the material or deterioration of the object.
4. The statues, reliefs, paintings or other objects of use or ornamentation, placed in buildings or inherited by the owner of the property in such a way as to reveal the purpose of permanently attaching them to the foundation.
5. The machines, vessels, instruments or utensils intended by the owner of the farm for the industry or exploitation carried out in a building or inheritance, which directly meet the needs of the farm itself.
6.º (Deleted)
7. Fertilizers intended for the cultivation of an inheritance, which are in the land where they are to be used.
8. o Mines, quarries and slags, while their matter remains attached to the deposit, and the living or stagnant waters.
9.o Dams and constructions which, even if floating, are destined for their object and conditions to remain at a fixed point of a river, lake or coast.
10. Administrative concessions for public works and servitude and other rights in real estate.
2. Livestock nurseries, doves, hives, fish ponds or similar breeding grounds are subject to the real estate regime where the owner has placed or kept them for the purpose of keeping them attached to the farm and forming part of it on a permanent basis, without prejudice to the consideration of animals as sentient beings and to the special laws protecting them.
CHAPTER II
Of movable property
Article 335.
The movable property is recognized as being liable for appropriation not covered by the previous chapter, and in general all that can be transported from one point to another without prejudice to the real estate to which it is attached.
Article 336.
The consideration of movable things is also given to income or pensions, whether they are vital or hereditary, affecting a person or family, provided that they do not cause a real burden on an immovable thing, alienated trades, contracts on public services and certificates and securities representing mortgage loans.
Article 337.
Personal property is expendable or non-expendable.
The first species belongs to those that cannot be used properly to its nature without being consumed; the other species belong to the second species.
CHAPTER III
Property according to the persons to whom they belong
Article 338.
The property is in the public domain or privately owned.
Article 339.
These are public goods:
1. Those intended for public use, such as roads, canals, rivers, torrents, ports and bridges constructed by the State, banks, beaches, rades and similar.
2. Those who belong privately to the State, without being of common use, and are destined for some public service or for the promotion of national wealth, such as walls, fortresses and other defence works of the territory, and mines, while not granting them.
Article 340.
All other property belonging to the State, in which the circumstances set forth in the preceding article do not apply, has the character of private property.
Article 341.
Goods in the public domain, when they are no longer intended for general use or the defence needs of the territory, become part of the property owned by the State.
Article 342.
The property of the Royal Heritage is governed by its special law; and, as far as it is not provided for, by the general provisions on private property set out in this Code.
Article 343.
The properties of the provinces and villages are divided into public goods and property.
Article 344.
These are public goods, in the provinces and towns, provincial and neighbourhood roads, squares, streets, fountains and public waters, general service walks and public works, financed by the same towns or provinces.
All other property held by them is property and shall be governed by the provisions of this Code, except as provided for in special laws.
Article 345.
They are property of private ownership, in addition to the assets of the State, the Province and the Municipality, belonging to individuals, individually or collectively.
Provisions common to the previous three chapters
Article 346.
Where the expression of immovable property or property, or of movable property or property, is used by law or by individual declaration, it shall be understood, respectively, as those listed in chapter I and chapter II.
When only the word furniture is used, it shall not include money, credit, trade effects, securities, jewellery, scientific or artistic collections, books, medals, weapons, clothing, cavalry or carriages, grains, broths and goods, or other things which are not intended to furnish or furnish the rooms, except in the case where the opposite is clearly apparent from the context of the law or individual provision.
Article 347.
Where, in sale, legacy, donation or other provision referring to movable or immovable property, its possession or property is transmitted with all that is found therein, the cash, securities, credits and shares whose documents are contained in the thing transmitted shall not be understood as being included in the transmission, unless there is a clear intention to extend the transmission to such values and rights.
TITLE II
Property
CHAPTER I
Property in general
Article 348.
Property is the right to enjoy and dispose of a thing or an animal, without any limitations other than those established by law.
The owner has action against the fork and the owner of the thing or animal to claim it.
Article 349.
No one may be deprived of his property except by the competent authority and on justified grounds of public utility, provided that compensation is provided.
If this requirement is not met, the Judges shall protect and, where appropriate, return the expropriated person to possession.
Article 350.
The owner of a land owns its surface and what is beneath it, and can do on it the works, plantations and excavations that suit him, save the serfdoms, and subject to the provisions of the Mines and Waters laws and police regulations.
Article 351.
The hidden treasure belongs to the owner of the land on which it is found.
However, when the discovery is made on the property of another, or of the State, and by chance, half will apply to the discoverer.
If the discovered effects are of interest to the sciences or the arts, the State may acquire them at their fair price, which shall be distributed in accordance with the statement.
Article 352.
Treasure, for the purposes of law, means the hidden and ignored deposit of money, jewelry or other precious objects, whose legitimate belonging does not consist.
CHAPTER II
Right of access
General provision
Article 353.
Property ownership entitles by accession to everything that they produce, or binds or incorporates, naturally or artificially.
Section 1.a. Right of access in respect of proceeds of property
Article 354.
They belong to the owner:
1.o Natural fruits.
2.o Industrial fruits.
3rd Civil Fruits.
Article 355.
Natural fruits are the spontaneous productions of the land and the products of animals that form part of an agricultural or industrial enterprise.
It is industrial fruits that produce the properties of any species for the benefit of cultivation or labour.
Civil fruits are the rental of buildings, the price of land leases and the amount of perpetual, life-long or similar rents.
Article 356.
The person who receives the fruits has the obligation to pay the expenses incurred by a third party for their production, collection and conservation.
Article 357.
1. Natural or industrial fruits are not recognized, but those that are manifest or born.
2. In the case of animals, only to the extent that it is compatible with the rules intended for their protection, young animals are subject to the fruit regime, since they are in their mother's womb, even if they are not born.
Section 2.a On the right of access to immovable property
Article 358.
The built, planted or sown on other people's grounds, and the improvements or repairs made on them, belong to the owner of them subject to the provisions of the following articles.
Article 359.
All works, sowings and plantations are presumed to be done by the owner and at his expense, until proven otherwise.
Article 360.
The owner of the land which he does on it, by himself or by another, plantations, constructions or works with other people's materials, must pay its value; and, if he has acted in bad faith, he shall also be liable for damages. The owner of the materials shall have the right to remove them only if he can do so without prejudice to the construction work, or without the resultant loss of the plantations, constructions or works carried out.
Article 361.
The owner of the land on which the land is built, sown or planted in good faith shall have the right to own the work, sowing or planting, subject to the compensation provided for in articles 453 and 454, or to compel the person who manufactured or planted the land to pay the price of the land, and the person who sowed the corresponding income.
Article 362.
He who builds, plants, or sows of bad faith in another's land loses what is built, planted, or sown, without the right to compensation.
Article 363.
The owner of the land on which it has been built, planted or sown in bad faith may demand the demolition of the work or the starting of the planting and planting, returning things to their primitive state at the expense of the one who built, planted or sowed.
Article 364.
When there has been bad faith, not only on the part of the builder, sower, or planter on other people's land, but also on the part of the owner of the land, the rights of both will be the same as they would have had they both proceeded in good faith.
It is understood that there is bad faith on the part of the owner provided that the fact has been executed in his sight, science and patience, without opposing.
Article 365.
If the materials, plants or seeds belong to a third party who has not acted in bad faith, the owner of the land shall be liable for their value subsidiaryly and in the sole case that the owner of the land does not have property to pay for.
This provision shall not take place if the owner uses the right granted to him by article 363.
Article 366.
It belongs to the owners of the inheritances confining to the banks of the rivers the increase that they receive gradually because of the effect of the current of the waters.
Article 367.
The owners of the confining heritages with ponds or lagoons do not acquire the land discovered by the natural decrease of the waters, nor do they lose the one that they flood in the extraordinary floods.
Article 368.
When the stream of a river, stream, or torrent secretes from an inheritance of its bank a known portion of land and transports it to another inheritance, the owner of the estate to which the segregated part belonged retains its property.
Article 369.
The trees uprooted and transported by the current of the waters belong to the owner of the land where they go, if they are not claimed within a month by the former owners. If they claim them, they must pay the costs incurred in collecting them or putting them in a safe place.
Article 370.
The riverbeds that are abandoned because they naturally vary the course of the waters, belong to the owners of the coastal lands in all the respective lengths to each one. If the abandoned channel separated inheritance from different owners, the new dividing line will run equidistant from each other.
Article 371.
The islands that form in the seas adjacent to the coasts of Spain and in navigable and buoyable rivers, belong to the State.
Article 372.
When in a navigable and floating river, varying naturally in direction, a new channel opens in private inheritance, this channel will enter the public domain. The owner of the inheritance will recover it as long as the waters leave it dry again, of course, and for legally authorized jobs.
Article 373.
The islands that by successive accumulation of higher trawls are formed in the rivers belong to the owners of the margins or banks closest to each one, or to those of both margins if the island is in the middle of the river, then dividing longitudinally in half. If a single island so formed were to distance itself from one margin rather than another, it will be entirely owned by the nearest margin.
Article 374.
When the stream of the river is divided into arms, leaving an inheritance or part of it isolated, the owner of the river retains its property. It also preserves it if a portion of land is separated from the inheritance by the current.
Section 3.a On the right of access to movable property
Article 375.
When two movable things, belonging to different owners, come together in such a way that they come to form one without bad faith intervening, the owner of the principal acquires the accessory, compensating its value to the previous owner.
Article 376.
It is reputed primarily, between two things incorporated, that to which another has been attached by ornament, or for its use or perfection.
Article 377.
If it cannot be determined by the rule of the previous article which of the two incorporated things is the main one, such an object of greater value will be recognized, and between two objects of equal value, the one of greater volume.
In painting and sculpture, in writings, prints, engravings and lithographs, the board, metal, stone, canvas, paper or parchment shall be considered accessory.
Article 378.
When things together can be separated without detriment, the respective owners can demand separation.
However, when the thing united for the use, beautification or perfection of another, is much more precious than the main thing, the owner of that thing may demand its separation, even if it suffers some detriment to the other to which it was incorporated.
Article 379.
When the owner of the accessory thing has made his incorporation in bad faith, he loses the incorporated thing and has the obligation to compensate the owner of the main one for the damages he has suffered.
If the person who has acted in bad faith is the owner of the main thing, the person who is the accessory has the right to choose between paying him his value or separating the thing from his belonging, even if it is necessary to destroy the main thing; and in both cases, in addition, there will be compensation for damages.
If any of the owners has made the incorporation in sight, science and patience and without opposition of the other, the respective rights will be determined in the manner arranged for the case of having acted in good faith.
Article 380.
Provided that the owner of the matter employed without his consent has the right to compensation, he may require that the owner of the matter consist in the delivery of an equal thing in kind and value, and in all its circumstances, to the employee, or in the price of her, according to expert assessment.
Article 381.
If two things of the same or different species are mixed by the will of their owners, or if the mixture is verified by chance, and in the latter case the things are not separable without detriment, each owner will acquire a right proportional to the part that corresponds to him attended to the value of the mixed or confused things.
Article 382.
If, by the will of one, but in good faith, two things of the same or different species are mixed or confused, the rights of the owners shall be determined by the provisions of the preceding article.
If the one who made the mixture or confusion acted in bad faith, he will lose the thing of his mixed or confused belonging, in addition to being bound to compensation for the damage caused to the owner of the thing with which he made the mixture.
Article 383.
Whoever in good faith used foreign matter in whole or in part to form a new kind of work, will make the work his own, compensating the value of the matter to the owner of the work.
If it is more precious than the work in which it was used or higher in value, the owner of it may, at his choice, keep the new species, after compensation for the value of the work, or seek compensation for the matter.
If bad faith intervened in the formation of the new species, the owner of the matter has the right to keep the work without paying the author anything, or to demand from the author to compensate him the value of the matter and the damages that have been followed.
CHAPTER III
Of the slinging and grinding
Article 384.
Every owner has the right to demarcate his property, with subpoenas from the owners of adjacent properties.
The same power shall be conferred on those who have rights in rem.
Article 385.
This shall be done in accordance with the titles of each owner and, in the absence of sufficient titles, resulting from the possession in which the adjacent owners are present.
Article 386.
If the titles do not determine the limit or area belonging to each owner, and the issue cannot be resolved by possession or other means of proof, the delinde shall be made by distributing the land subject to the contest in equal parts.
Article 387.
If the titles of the adjacent parties indicate a greater or lesser space than that comprising the whole of the land, the increase or lack shall be distributed proportionately.
CHAPTER IV
The right to close rustic farms
Article 388.
Any owner may close or encircle his inheritance by means of walls, ditches, dead or living hedges, or otherwise, without prejudice to the servitudes created therein.
CHAPTER V
From the ruinous buildings and trees that threaten to fall
Article 389.
If a building, wall, column or any other construction threatens ruin, the owner will be obliged to demolish it, or to perform the necessary works to prevent its fall.
If it is not verified by the owner of the ruinous work, the Authority may demolish it at its expense.
Article 390.
Where a corpulent tree threatens to fall in such a way as to cause damage to an alien farm or passers-by on a public or private road, the owner of the tree is obliged to uproot and remove it; and if he does not verify it, it shall be done at his expense by mandate of the Authority.
Article 391.
In the case of the two preceding articles, if the building or tree falls, the provisions of Articles 1.907 and 1.908 shall apply.
TITLE III
From the community of goods
Article 392.
There is community when ownership of a thing or a right belongs pro undivided to several people.
In the absence of contracts or special provisions, the community shall be governed by the requirements of this title.
Article 393.
The participation of the participants, both in profits and in charges, will be proportional to their respective quotas.
The portions corresponding to the participants in the community shall be presumed to be equal until proven otherwise.
Article 394.
Each participant may avail himself of the common things, provided that he has them according to his destiny and in such a way as not to prejudice the interest of the community, nor to prevent the partners from using them according to their right.
Article 395.
A co-owner shall have the right to oblige the members to contribute to the costs of preserving the common thing or law. Only a party who renounces its share of the domain may be exempted from this obligation.
Article 396.
The different floors or premises of a building or parts thereof which may be used independently by virtue of having their own access to a common element of the building or to the public road may be the subject of separate ownership, which shall have an inherent right of co-ownership over the common elements of the building, which are all those necessary for its proper use and enjoyment, such as the floor, flight, foundations and roofs; structural elements including pillars, beams, wrought and cargo walls; facades, with exterior coverings of terraces, balconies and windows, including their image or configuration, the closing elements that make up them and their exterior coverings; portal, stairs, gates, corridors, steps, walls, pits, courtyards, wells and enclosures for lifts, tanks, counters, telephones or other common facilities or services, including those that are of private use; lifts and installations, conducts and pipes for drainage and for the supply of water, gas or electricity, including solar energy; hot water, heating, air conditioning, ventilation or evacuation of fumes; buildings, etc.; or legal instruments which by their nature or fate are indivisible.
The parties in co-ownership are in no case susceptible to division and may only be alienated, taxed or impounded together with the particular private part of which they are inseparable.
In case of alienation of one floor or premises, the owners of the others, by this title alone, shall not have the right to count or retract.
This form of ownership is governed by the special legal provisions and, to the extent they permit, by the will of the persons concerned.
Please take into account the provisions of the single additional provision.2 of the above-mentioned Act.
Article 397.
None of the owners may, without the consent of the others, make alterations in the common thing, even if they may be of benefit to all.
Article 398.
For the administration and better enjoyment of the common thing the agreements of the majority of the members will be obligatory.
There will be no majority except when the agreement is taken by the participants representing the greatest number of interests that constitute the object of the community.
If it is not a majority, or if the agreement of the majority is seriously prejudicial to the persons concerned in the common affairs, the judge shall, at the request of the party, provide the appropriate assistance, including the appointment of an administrator.
Where part of the thing belongs privately to a participant or to some of them and another is common, the above provision shall apply only to the latter.
Article 399.
Every owner shall have the full ownership of his share and of the fruits and profits that accrue to him, being able to dispose of it, to assign it or to mortgage it, and to replace another in its use, except in the case of personal rights. But the effect of the alienation or the mortgage on the owners will be limited to the portion that is awarded in the division at the end of the community.
Article 400.
No co-owner shall be obliged to remain in the community. Each of them can ask at any time to divide the common thing.
However, the agreement to retain the undivided thing for a fixed period of time, not exceeding ten years, shall be valid. This period may be extended by new convention.
Article 401.
However, in accordance with the provisions of the preceding article, co-owners may not require division of the common thing when it is rendered useless for the use to which it is intended.
In the case of a building the characteristics of which permit, at the request of any of the communes, the division may be carried out by the award of separate floors or premises, together with their common elements annexed thereto, in the manner provided for in Article three hundred and ninety-six.
Article 402.
The division of the common thing may be made by the interested parties, or by arbitrators or amicable compounders, appointed at the will of the participants.
In the case of verification by referees or friendly composing parties, they must form parts proportional to each other's rights, avoiding as soon as possible the supplements to metal.
Article 403.
The creditors or transferees of the members may enter the division of the common thing and object to the one verified without their contest. However, they may not contest the consummate division, except in the case of fraud, or in the case of the verification of the opposition formally filed to prevent it, and except always the rights of the debtor or the assignor to maintain its validity.
Article 404.
Where the matter is essentially indivisible, and the owners do not agree that one of them is awarded compensation to the others, the price shall be sold and distributed.
In the case of pet animals, the division may not take place by sale, unless unanimous agreement is reached by all the owners.
In the absence of unanimous agreement between the owners, the judicial authority shall decide the fate of the animal, taking into account the interests of the owners and the welfare of the animal, and may provide for the allocation of the time for the animal's enjoyment and care, if necessary, as well as the burdens associated with its care.
Article 405.
The division of a common thing shall not prejudice a third party, which shall retain the rights of mortgage, bondage or other real rights belonging to it before partitioning. They will also retain their strength, notwithstanding division, personal rights belonging to a third party against the community.
Article 406.
The rules concerning the division of inheritance shall apply to the division among the participants in the community.
TITLE IV
Of some special properties
CHAPTER I
Of the waters
Section 1.a Water domain
Article 407.
They are in the public domain:
1. The rivers and their natural streams.
2. The continuous or discontinuous waters of springs and streams running through their natural channels, and these same channels.
3. o Waters which are continuously or permanently born in the same public domain.
4. The lakes and lagoons formed by nature on public land and its forests.
5.o Rainwaters that flow through ravines or ramblas, the stream of which is also in the public domain.
6.o Groundwaters that exist on public land.
7. The waters found in the area of public works, although they are executed by concessionaire.
8. o Waters that are continuously or continuously born in the lands of private individuals, the State, the province or the peoples, since they come out of such grounds.
9. The surplus of sources, sewers and public establishments.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Article 408.
They are private domain:
1.o Continuous or discontinuous waters that are born in private domain lands, while they are speaking for them.
2. The lakes and lagoons and their forests, formed by nature in such lands.
3. o Groundwaters found in these.
4th The rainwaters that fall in them, until their borders are crossed.
5.o The channels of running, continuous or discontinuous waters, formed by rainwater, and those of streams that pass through farms that are not in the public domain.
In every ditch or aqueduct, water, canal, cashiers and margins shall be considered as an integral part of the inheritance or building to which the waters are intended. The owners of the estates, through which or through whose boundaries the aqueduct passes, may not claim dominion over it, nor the right to use its channel or margins, unless it is founded on titles of property expressive of the right or domain they claim.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Section 2.a Public water use
Article 409.
The use of public water is acquired by:
1st By administrative concession.
2. By prescription of twenty years.
The limits of the rights and obligations of these exploitations shall be those resulting, in the first case, from the terms of the concession and, in the second, from the manner and manner in which the waters have been used.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Article 410.
Any concession for the use of water is without prejudice to any third party.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Article 411.
The right to use public water is extinguished by the expiration of the concession and by non-use for twenty years.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Section 3.a. Use of privately owned waters
Article 412.
The owner of a property in which a spring or stream is born, continuous or discontinuous, may take advantage of its waters as they flow through it; but the remainders enter into the condition of public, and their use is governed by the Special Law of Waters.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Article 413.
The private domain of the rainwater forests does not authorize to do works or works that vary their course to the detriment of the third party, nor those whose destruction, by force of the avenues, may cause it.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Article 414.
No one may enter private property to search for water or use it without a licence from the owners.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Article 415.
The owner's control over the waters that are born in it does not prejudice the rights that legitimately have been able to acquire for its use those of the lower estates.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Article 416.
Every owner of a property has the power to build tanks within its property to conserve rainwater, provided that it does not cause harm to the public or to third parties.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Section 4.a Groundwater
Article 417.
Only the owner of a property or other person with his license can investigate groundwater in it.
Groundwater research in public domain areas can only be carried out with an administrative licence.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Article 418.
The waters lit under the Special Waters Act belong to the one who illuminated them.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Article 419.
If the owner of light water leaves them abandoned to their natural course, they will be in the public domain.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Section 5.a General provisions
Article 420.
The owner of a property in which there are defensive works to contain the water, or which because of the variation of its course it is necessary to build them again, is obliged, at his choice, to make the necessary repairs or constructions or to tolerate that, without his prejudice, they are made by the owners of the properties that experience or are manifestly exposed to damage.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Article 421.
The provisions of the preceding article apply to the case where it is necessary to dispose of a site of materials whose accumulation or fall prevents the course of waters from being damaged or endangered by a third party.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Article 422.
All owners who participate in the profit from the works covered by the two preceding articles are obliged to contribute to the costs of their execution in proportion to their interest. Those who caused the damage by their fault will be responsible for the expenses.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Article 423.
The ownership and use of the waters belonging to corporations or individuals are subject to the Expropriation Act for reasons of public utility.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Article 424.
The provisions of this Title do not prejudice the rights acquired previously, nor do they prejudice the private domain of the owners of water, irrigation, fountains or springs, under which they take advantage of, sell or exchange them as private property.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
Article 425.
In all cases not expressly prevented by the provisions of this chapter, the Special Water Act shall be in accordance with the provisions of this chapter.
Please note that final provision 1 of the Consolidated Text of the Water Act, approved by Royal Legislative Decree 1/2001 of 20 July, Ref. BOE-A-2001-14276provides that where it is not expressly regulated by this Act, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply.
CHAPTER II
Of minerals
Article 426.
Any Spaniard or foreigner may freely do in public domain land calicatas or excavations not exceeding 10 metres in length or depth in order to discover minerals, but shall give prior notice to the local authority. On privately owned land, callatas may not be opened without permission from the owner or representative.
Article 427.
The limits of the right referred to in the preceding article, the prior formalities and conditions for its exercise, the designation of the materials to be considered as minerals, and the determination of the rights of the owner of the soil and the discoverers of the minerals in the case of concession, shall be governed by the Special Mining Act.
CHAPTER III
Intellectual property
Article 428.
The author of a literary, scientific or artistic work has the right to exploit it and dispose of it at his will.
Article 429.
The Intellectual Property Act determines the persons to whom this right belongs, the form of its exercise and the duration of its duration. In cases not provided for or resolved by this special law, the general rules set out in this Property Code shall apply.
TITLE V
Possession
CHAPTER I
Possession and its species
Article 430.
Natural possession is the possession of a thing or animal, or the enjoyment of a right by a person. Civil possession is that same possession or enjoyment coupled with the intention of having the thing, animal or right as its own.
Article 431.
Possession is exercised in things, in animals or in rights by the same person who has and enjoys them, or by another on their behalf.
Article 432.
Possession in property, in animals and in rights may be held in one of two concepts: either the owner, or the holder of the thing, animal or right to preserve or enjoy them, belonging to another person.
Article 433.
He is a bona fide possessor who ignores that in his title or way of acquiring there exists vice that invalidates him.
He is reputed to have bad faith to the one found in the opposite case.
Article 434.
Good faith is always presumed, and proof corresponds to the one who affirms the bad faith of a possessor.
Article 435.
Possession acquired in good faith does not lose this character except in the case and from the moment there are acts proving that the possessor does not ignore that he possesses the thing improperly.
Article 436.
Possession is presumed to continue to be enjoyed in the same concept in which it was acquired, until proven otherwise.
Article 437.
Only things and rights that are susceptible to appropriation can be subject to possession. Animals may also be held, subject to the limitations laid down by law.
CHAPTER II
The acquisition of possession
Article 438.
Possession is acquired by the material occupation of the thing, animal or right possessed, or by the fact that these are subject to the action of our will, or by the own acts and legal formalities established to acquire such right.
Article 439.
Possession may be acquired by the same person who will enjoy it, by his legal representative, by his representative and by a third party without any mandate; but in the latter case possession shall not be deemed to have been acquired until the person on whose behalf the possessory act has been verified ratifies it.
Article 440.
The possession of the estate property is understood to be transmitted to the heir without interruption and from the moment of death of the deceased, in the event of the inheritance being added.
The one who validly repudiates an inheritance is understood not to have possessed it at any time.
Article 441.
In no case may possession be acquired violently as long as there is a possessor who opposes it. A person who is created with action or right to deprive another person of possession of a thing, provided that the holder resists delivery, shall seek the assistance of the competent authority.
Article 442.
Anyone who succeeds by hereditary title will not suffer the consequences of a vicious possession of his cause, unless it is shown that he had knowledge of the vices that affected it; but the effects of possession in good faith will not profit him except from the date of the death of the cause.
Article 443.
Everyone can acquire possession of things.
Minors need the assistance of their legitimate representatives to use the rights arising from possession in their favour.
Persons with disabilities in whose favour support measures have been put in place may use the rights derived from possession according to their outcome.
Article 444.
Acts merely tolerated, and those executed clandestinely and without the knowledge of the possessor of a thing, or with violence, do not affect possession.
Article 445.
Possession, as a fact, cannot be recognized in two distinct personalities, other than cases of undivision. If the present possessor contends over the fact of possession, the current possessor shall be preferred; if two possessors, the oldest, are found; if the dates of the possessions are the same, the person who presents title; and, if all these conditions are the same, the thing shall be set up as a deposit or judicial guard, while the possession or ownership is decided upon by the corresponding formalities.
CHAPTER III
The effects of possession
Article 446.
Every possessor has the right to be respected in his possession; and, if he is concerned about it, he must be protected or restored to such possession by the means established by the procedural laws.
Article 447.
Only possession acquired and enjoyed as owner can serve as title to acquire the domain.
Article 448.
The owner has in his favour the legal presumption that he has a fair title, and cannot be compelled to exhibit it.
Article 449.
Possession of a root thing implies that of the furniture and objects that are found within it, as long as it does not consist or is proven that they must be excluded.
Article 450.
Each of the participants in a thing that is held in common, it is understood that he has possessed exclusively the part that, when divided, would occupy him for the entire duration of the indivision. Discontinuance in the possession of the whole or part of a thing possessed in common shall equally harm all.
Article 451.
The bona fide possessor makes his own the fruits perceived until possession is legally interrupted.
Natural and industrial fruits are understood to be perceived from the moment they are raised or separated.
Civilian fruits are considered to be produced by days, and belong to the bona fide holder in that proportion.
Article 452.
If, at the time when good faith ceases, some natural or industrial fruits are pending, the holder shall be entitled to the expenses he has incurred for his production, and also to the part of the liquid product of the harvest proportionate to the time of his possession.
The charges shall be similarly apportioned between the two holders.
The owner of the thing may, if he wishes, grant the possessor in good faith the power to complete the cultivation and the collection of the outstanding fruits, as compensation for the part of the crop expenses and the liquid product that belongs to him; the possessor in good faith that for any reason does not want to accept this concession, loses the right to be compensated in another way.
Article 453.
The necessary expenses are paid to every possessor; but only the one in good faith can retain the thing until it is satisfied.
The costs are paid to the bona fide holder with the same right of retention, and the holder may choose to pay the amount of the expenses or to pay the increase in value acquired by them.
Article 454.
The expenses of pure luxury or mere recreation are not payable to the possessor in good faith; but he may take away the ornaments with which he would have embellished the main thing if he did not suffer deterioration, and if the successor in possession would not prefer to pay the amount of the spent.
Article 455.
The holder of bad faith shall pay the fruits received and those which the legitimate possessor may have received, and shall be entitled only to be reimbursed from the expenses necessary for the preservation of the thing. Expenditures on luxury and recreation improvements shall not be paid to the possessor of bad faith; but he may take the objects in which those expenses have been invested, provided that the thing does not suffer deterioration and the legitimate possessor does not prefer to stay with them by paying the value they have when entering the possession.
Article 456.
Improvements from nature or time always yield to the benefit of the one who has won in possession.
Article 457.
The bona fide possessor does not respond to the deterioration or loss of the possessed thing, other than in cases where it is justified to have acted with wrong. The possessor of bad faith is responsible for the deterioration or loss in any case, and even those caused by force majeure when he has maliciously delayed the surrender of the thing to his rightful possessor.
Article 458.
Anyone who obtains possession is not obliged to make improvements that have ceased to exist when acquiring the thing.
Article 459.
The current possessor who demonstrates his possession in the previous period is presumed to have possessed during the intermediate time, until proven otherwise.
Article 460.
The possessor may lose his possession:
1. By abandonment of the thing or the animal.
2. cession made to another by onerous or gratuitous title.
3. By destruction or total loss of the thing, by death or loss of the animal, or by leaving the thing or animal out of the trade.
4. For the possession of another, even against the will of the former possessor, if the new possession had lasted more than a year.
Article 461.
Possession of the movable thing is not understood lost while under the power of the possessor, even if he accidentally ignores his whereabouts.
Article 462.
The possession of immovable property and rights in rem is not understood as lost or transmitted for the purposes of the limitation to the detriment of a third party, but subject to the provisions of the Mortgage Act.
Article 463.
Acts relating to possession, executed or consented to by which he possesses an alien thing as a mere fork in order to enjoy it or retain it in any way do not bind or prejudice the owner, unless the owner has granted that express power to execute them or subsequently ratify them.
Article 464.
The possession of movable property, acquired in good faith, is equivalent to the title. However, anyone who had lost a movable thing or had been illegally deprived of it may claim it from the person who possesses it.
If the owner of the lost or stolen furniture has acquired it in good faith for public sale, the owner cannot obtain the refund without refunding the price given by it.
Nor shall the owner of things committed to the Monts de Pietà established with the authorization of the Government obtain restitution, whatever the person who committed it, without returning the amount of the effort and the interests lost to the Establishment.
As regards those acquired from the stock exchange, fair or market, or from a legally established trader and usually engaged in the traffic of similar objects, it will be in accordance with the provisions of the Commercial Code.
Article 465.
Wild or wild animals are only possessed while in our possession; domesticated animals are assimilated to domestic or companionship if they retain the habit of returning to the home of the possessor or if they have been identified as such.
Article 466.
The person who recovers, according to law, possession unduly lost, is understood for all purposes that may be of benefit to him or her that he or she has enjoyed it without interruption.
TITLE VI
From usufruct, use and room
CHAPTER I
Of usufruct
Section 1.a of the usufruct in general
Article 467.
The usufruct gives the right to enjoy the property of others with the obligation to preserve its form and substance, unless otherwise authorized by the title of its constitution or by law.
Article 468.
The usufruct is constituted by the law, by the will of the individuals manifested in acts between living or in last will, and by prescription.
Article 469.
The usufruct may be constituted in whole or in part of the fruits of the thing, in favor of one or more persons, simultaneously or successively, and in any case from or until a certain day, purely or under condition. It can also be constituted on a right, provided that it is not very personal or intransmissible.
Article 470.
The rights and obligations of the usufruct shall be those determined by the title of the usufruct; in the absence or insufficiency of the usufruct, the provisions contained in the following two sections shall be observed.
Section 2.a On the rights of the usufructarian
Article 471.
The usufructuary shall be entitled to receive all natural, industrial and civil fruits of the property used. As for the treasures found on the estate, it will be considered as strange.
Article 472.
The natural or industrial fruits, pending at the time of the beginning of the usufruct, belong to the usufructuary.
The earrings at the time of extinguishing the usufruct belong to the owner.
In the previous cases, the usufruct, at the beginning of the usufruct, is not obliged to pay to the owner any of the expenses incurred; but the owner is obliged to pay at the end of the usufruct, with the product of the fruit pending, the ordinary expenses of cultivation, seeds and other similar, made by the usufruct.
The provisions of this article do not prejudice the rights of third parties, acquired at the beginning or end of the usufruct.
Article 473.
If the usufructaire has leased the land or inheritance given in usufruct and ends it before the lease is terminated, only he or his heirs and successors shall receive the proportional share of the rent to be paid by the lessee.
Article 474.
Civil fruits are understood to be perceived day by day, and belong to the usufructuary in proportion to the length of the usufruct.
Article 475.
If the usufruct is constituted on the right to receive a periodic income or pension, whether in cash or in fruit, or the interest of obligations or securities to the bearer, each maturity shall be considered as products or fruits of that right.
If it consists in the enjoyment of the benefits of a participation in an industrial or commercial holding whose share is not fixed, they shall have the same consideration.
In both cases they shall be distributed as civil fruits, and shall be applied in the manner prescribed in the preceding article.
Article 476.
The use of a land in which the products of the products denounced, granted or found in labor are mined does not correspond to the usufruct, unless they are expressly granted in the title of the land, or if it is universal.
However, the usufructuary may extract stones, lime and plaster from quarries for repairs or works which it is obliged to do or which are necessary.
Article 477.
However, as provided in the preceding article, in the legal usufruct, the usufruct may exploit the mines reported, granted or in labor, existing on the premises, taking up half of the profits resulting from the reduction of the expenses, which will satisfy half with the owner.
Article 478.
The status of usufructuary does not deprive the person who has it of the right granted to everyone by the Mines Act to denounce and obtain the concession of those existing in the properties used, in the form and conditions established by the same law.
Article 479.
The usufructuary shall have the right to enjoy the increase received by accession of the thing used, of the serfdoms it has in its favor, and in general of all the benefits inherent to it.
Article 480.
The usufructuary may take advantage of the thing used, lease it to another and dispose of its usufruct right, even if it is free of charge, but all contracts concluded as such shall be settled at the end of the usufruct, except for the lease of the rustic estates, which shall be considered to be subsisting during the agricultural year.
Article 481.
If the usufruct understands things that are not consumed gradually deteriorate by the use, the usufruct will have the right to use them, using them according to their destiny, and will not be obliged to return them at the end of the usufruct but in the state in which they are found; but with the obligation to compensate the owner for the deterioration they have suffered due to their wrongfulness or negligence.
Article 482.
If the usufruct understands things that cannot be used without consuming them, the usufruct will be entitled to use them with the obligation to pay the amount of its valuation upon completion of the usufruct if they have been estimated. Where they have not been estimated, you will have the right to return them in equal quantity and quality, or to pay their current price at the time of cessation of the usufruct.
Article 483.
The use of vines, olive groves or other trees or shrubs may take advantage of the dead feet, and even of the tronchados or torn by accident, with the obligation to replace them with others.
Article 484.
If, as a result of an extraordinary accident or event, the vineyards, olive groves or other trees or shrubs have disappeared in such a considerable number that the replacement is not possible or too burdensome, the usufructaire may leave the dead, fallen, or broken feet at the disposal of the owner, and require him to remove them and leave the ground in an expeditious manner.
Article 485.
The usufructuary of a mountain will enjoy all the exploits that it can produce according to its nature.
Being the mountain carving or wooden construction, the usufructuary can make in it the ordinary cuttings or shorts that the owner used to make, and in their absence will make them conforming in the way, portion and times, to the custom of the place.
In any case it will make the cuttings or the cuttings so that they do not harm the conservation of the farm.
In tree nurseries the usufructuary can make the necessary intersaca so that those remaining can develop properly.
Apart from the above, the usufructuary may not cut trees by the foot except to replenish or improve any of the things used, and in this case it shall inform the owner beforehand of the need for the work.
Article 486.
The user of an action to claim a property or real right, or movable property, has the right to exercise it and to compel the owner of the action to surrender his representation for this purpose and to provide him with the evidence at his disposal. If, as a result of the exercise of the action, the claimed thing is acquired, the usufruct shall be limited to only the fruits, leaving the domain for the owner.
Article 487.
The usufructuario may make such useful or recreational improvements in the goods subject to the usufruct as may be appropriate, provided that they do not alter their form or substance; but he shall not be entitled to compensation. It may, however, withdraw such improvements, if possible without prejudice to the property.
Article 488.
The usufructuary may compensate for the defects of the property with the improvements it would have made to the property.
Article 489.
The owner of the property in which another has the usufruct may dispose of it, but may not alter its form or substance, or do anything in it that would harm the usufruct.
Article 490.
The usufructuary on the part of a thing possessed in common shall exercise all the rights corresponding to the owner of it concerning the administration and the perception of fruits or interests. If the community ceases to divide the thing possessed in common, the usufruct will correspond to the usufruct of the party that is awarded to the owner or owner.
Section 3.a On the obligations of the usufructaire
Article 491.
The usufructuary, before entering into the enjoyment of the goods, is obliged:
1. To form, with citation of the owner or his legitimate representative, inventory of all of them, making value the furniture and describing the state of the real estate.
2. To provide security by undertaking to fulfil its obligations under this section.
Article 492.
The provision contained in the second number of the preceding article does not apply to the seller or donor who has reserved the usufruct of the property sold or donated, nor to the usufruct parents of the property of the children, nor to the surviving spouse in respect of the usufruct legal fee, if the parents or the subsequent spouse do not contract.
Article 493.
The usufruct, irrespective of the title of the usufruct, may be waived from the obligation to make inventory or to provide security, where this does not result in harm to anyone.
Article 494.
The owner may require that the property be placed in the administration, that the furniture be sold, that the public effects, the name of the securities or the bearer be converted into registrations or deposited in a bank or public establishment, and that the money or cash and the price of the disposal of the movable property be invested in secure securities, not by providing the usufructuary with the security in cases where it is to be given.
The interest of the price of movable things and of the public effects and values, and the products of the goods put in administration, belong to the usufructario.
The owner may also, if he or she prefers, retain the property of the usufruct, as an administrator, in his or her possession, as long as the usufruct does not provide security or is exempt from it, and with the obligation to deliver to the usufruct his or her liquid product, minus the amount agreed upon by the usufruct administration or judicially indicated to it.
Article 495.
If the usufructaire who has not provided bail claims, under oath, the delivery of the furniture necessary for its use, and that he and his family are assigned a room in a house included in the usufruct, the judge may accede to this request, having consulted the circumstances of the case.
The same shall apply to the instruments, tools and other movable goods necessary for the industry to which it is engaged.
If the owner does not want to sell some furniture for its artistic merit or because they have a disease price, he may demand that they be delivered to him, entrenching the payment of the legal interest of the value in valuation.
Article 496.
If the usufruct has provided the security, he shall be entitled to all products from the day on which, according to the title of the usufruct, he must have begun to receive them.
Article 497.
The usufructuary must take care of the things given in usufruct as a good father of family.
Article 498.
The usufructaire who disposes of or leases his usufruct right shall be liable for the damage suffered by the things used by the person who replaces him or her by fault or negligence.
Article 499.
If the usufruct is constituted on a herd or herd of cattle, the usufructuary shall be obliged to replace with the young the heads that die annually and ordinarily, or that lack the predation of other animals.
If the livestock on which the usufruct is constituted is wholly destroyed, without the fault of the usufructarian, by the effect of a contagious disease or other non-common event, the usufruct shall be obliged to deliver to the owner the remains of the animals or their yields, without prejudice to the application, in any case, of the legal and regulatory regulations on food safety and animal health on those products or remains.
If the flock perish in part, also by an accident, and without the fault of the usufructuary, the usufruct will continue in the part that is preserved.
If the usufruct is of sterile livestock, the effects of Article 482 shall apply.
Article 500.
The usufructuary is obliged to make the ordinary repairs that need the things given in usufruct.
Those which require deterioration or damage resulting from the natural use of things and are indispensable for their preservation shall be considered ordinary. If you do not do so after the owner has requested it, the owner may do so himself at the expense of the usufructuary.
Article 501.
Extraordinary repairs will be on the owner's account. The usufructuary is obliged to give notice when it is urgent to do so.
Article 502.
If the owner makes the extraordinary repairs, he shall have the right to demand from the usufruct the legal interest of the amount invested in them for the duration of the usufruct.
If he does not do them when they are indispensable for the subsistence of the thing, he may make them the usufructario; but he shall have the right to demand from the owner, at the end of the usufruct, the increase of value that the estate had for the effect of the same works.
If the owner refuses to meet the said amount, the usufructaire shall have the right to retain the thing until it is returned with its products.
Article 503.
The owner may make the works and improvements which the usufruct farm is susceptible to, or new plantations on it if it is rustic, provided that the value of the usufruct is not diminished by such acts, nor is the usufruct's right impaired.
Article 504.
The payment of the annual charges and contributions and those considered as levies on the fruit shall be the account of the usufruct for as long as the usufruct lasts.
Article 505.
Contributions that are directly imposed on the capital during the usufruct shall be borne by the owner.
If the latter has satisfied them, the usufructuario must pay him interest corresponding to the sums he has paid in this respect and, if the usufructaire anticipates them, he must receive its amount at the end of the usufruct.
Article 506.
If the usufruct is constituted on the whole of a property, and when the owner has debts, it shall apply, both for the subsistence of the usufruct and for the obligation of the usufruct to satisfy them, the provisions of Articles 642 and 643 with respect to donations.
This same provision applies to the case where the owner was obliged, upon the establishment of the usufruct, to the payment of periodic benefits, even if they did not have known capital.
Article 507.
The usufructaire may claim in itself the receivables due as part of the usufruct if it has given or gives the corresponding security. If it is exempted from providing security or has not been able to establish it, or if it is not sufficient, it will require permission from the owner, or from the judge in his absence, to collect such claims.
The usufructuary with security may give to the capital that carries out the destination it deems appropriate. The unsecured usufructuary shall place at the interest of such capital in agreement with the owner; in the absence of agreement between the two, with judicial authorization; and in any case, with sufficient guarantees to maintain the integrity of the capital used.
Article 508.
The universal usufructuary shall pay the entire legacy of life income or maintenance.
The usufructuary of an aliquot part of the inheritance will pay it in proportion to its share.
In neither case shall the owner be obliged to repay.
The usufructuary of one or more particular things will only pay the legacy when the income or pension is constituted on them.
Article 509.
The usufructuary of a mortgaged estate will not be obliged to pay the debts for whose security the mortgage was established.
If the estate is seized or sold judicially for the payment of the debt, the owner will respond to the usufructuary of what he loses for this reason.
Article 510.
If the usufruct is of the whole or part aliquot of an inheritance, the usufructuario may anticipate the sums that for the payment of the hereditary debts correspond to the property used, and shall have the right to demand its restitution from the owner, without interest, when the usufruct is extinguished.
By refusing to make such advance notice, the owner may request that the part of the property used be sold that is necessary to pay such sums, or to satisfy them of their money, with the right, in the latter case, to require the interest of the usufructuario concerned.
Article 511.
The usufructuary shall be obliged to inform the owner of any act of a third party, of which it has notice, which is capable of infringing property rights, and shall, if it does not do so, be liable for damages, as if they had been caused by his fault.
Article 512.
The usufruct shall bear the expenses, costs and sentences of the proceedings brought against the usufruct.
Section 4.a Of the modes of extinguishing the usufruct
Article 513.
The usufruct is extinguished:
1st For the death of the usufructuary.
2. For the expiry of the period for which it was constituted, or to fulfil the condition set forth in the constituent title.
3.o For the gathering of the usufruct and the property in the same person.
4. For the renunciation of the usufructuary.
5.o For the total loss of the object thing of the usufruct.
6. By the resolution of the right of the constituent.
7th Per prescription.
Article 514.
If the thing given in usufruct is lost only in part, this right will continue in the remaining part.
Article 515.
The usufruct may not be constituted in favour of a people or corporation or society for more than thirty years. If it had been constituted, and before this time the people would be barren, or the corporation or society would be dissolved, the usufruct will be extinguished by this fact.
Article 516.
The usufruct granted for the time it takes for a third party to reach a certain age, the prefixed number of years shall remain, even if the third person dies earlier, unless such usufruct has been expressly granted only in view of the existence of that person.
Article 517.
If the usufruct is constituted on a farm of which a building forms part, and this one will perish, in any way whatsoever, the usufructaire will have the right to enjoy the soil and the materials.
The same will happen when the usufruct is formed only on a building and it perishes. However, if the owner wishes to build another building, he shall have the right to occupy the floor and use the materials, being obliged to pay the usufruct, for the duration of the usufruct, the interest of the sums corresponding to the value of the soil and the materials.
Article 518.
If the usufructuary agrees with the owner to the insurance of a given property in usufruct, the usufruct will continue, in case of accident, in the enjoyment of the new building if it is built, or will receive the interest of the price of the insurance if the re-enactment does not belong to the owner.
If the owner has refused to contribute to the insurance of the property, constituting it alone the usufructario, the owner will acquire the right to receive entirely in case of accident the price of the insurance, but with obligation to invest it in the rebuilding of the estate.
If the usufructuary has refused to contribute to the insurance, the owner alone shall receive the full price of the insurance in the event of a loss, except in all cases the right granted to the usufructaire in the preceding article.
Article 519.
If the thing used is expropriated because of public utility, the owner is obliged either to subrogate it with another of equal value and similar conditions, or to pay the usufruct the legal interest of the amount of compensation for the duration of the usufruct. If the owner chooses the latter, he must secure the payment of the proceeds.
Article 520.
The usufruct is not extinguished by the misuse of the thing used; but if the abuse injures the owner considerably, he may ask that the thing be delivered to him, being obliged to pay annually to the usufructur the liquid product of it, after deducting the expenses and the prize that will be allocated to him for his administration.
Article 521.
The usufruct constituted for the benefit of several living persons at the time of its constitution, will not be extinguished until the death of the last one who survives.
Article 522.
Once the usufruct has been completed, the usufruct shall be handed over to the owner, except for the right of retention which belongs to the usufructario or to his heirs for the disbursements to be returned. Once the delivery has been verified, the bond or mortgage will be cancelled.
CHAPTER II
Use and room
Article 523.
The powers and obligations of the user and of the person entitled to a room shall be governed by the title constituting these rights; and, failing that, by the following provisions.
Article 524.
Use entitles those who satisfy the needs of the user and his family to the fruits of the thing other than the others, even if it increases.
The room gives to those who have this right the power to occupy in a foreign house the necessary parts for themselves and for the people of their family.
Article 525.
The rights of use and room cannot be rented or transferred to another by any kind of title.
Article 526.
Anyone who has the use of a herd or herd of livestock may take advantage of the herd, milk and wool as soon as it is sufficient for consumption and that of his family, as well as of the manure needed for the fertilisation of the land he cultivates.
Article 527.
If the user consumes all the fruits of the other person's thing, or the person who has the right of habitation occupies the whole house, he shall be obliged to the expenses of cultivation, to the ordinary repairs of conservation and to the payment of the contributions, in the same way as the usufructario.
If only part of the fruit or part of the house is collected, it must not contribute anything, provided that the owner has enough fruits or exploits to cover the expenses and charges. If they are not enough, he will supply what is missing.
Article 528.
The provisions laid down for usufruct apply to rights of use and room, as soon as they do not oppose the provisions of this chapter.
Article 529.
The rights of use and habitation are extinguished for the same reasons as the usufruct and also for serious abuse of the thing and the room.
TITLE VII
From servitude
CHAPTER I
Of servitude in general
Section 1.a Of the different kinds of servitudes that can be established on farms
Article 530.
Bondage is a tax imposed on one property for the benefit of another owned by a different owner.
The property in whose favor the servitude is constituted is called the dominant property; the one who suffers it, the servant property.
Article 531.
Bondages may also be established for the benefit of one or more persons, or a community, to whom the taxed estate does not belong.
Article 532.
Bondages can be continuous or discontinuant, apparent or not apparent.
Continuous are those whose use is or can be incessant, without the intervention of any fact of man.
Discontinuous are those that are used at more or less long intervals and depend on man's actions.
Appearances, those that are announced and are continually seen by external signs, which reveal the use and exploitation of them.
Not apparent, those that do not present any outward evidence of their existence.
Article 533.
Bondages are also positive or negative.
The serfdom that imposes upon the owner of the servant estate the obligation to let something be done or to do it for himself is called positive, and the obligation that forbids the owner of the servant estate to do something that would be lawful for him without the serfdom is called negative.
Article 534.
Bondages are inseparable from the estate to which they actively or passively belong.
Article 535.
Bondages are indivisible. If the servant estate is divided between two or more, the servitude is not modified and each of them has to tolerate it in the part that corresponds to it.
If it is the dominant site that is divided into two or more, each portioner can use the entire serfdom, not altering the place of its use, or otherwise aggravating it.
Article 536.
Bondages are established by law or by the will of the owners. Those are called legal and voluntary.
Section 2.a: Ways to acquire servitude
Article 537.
Continuous and apparent servitude is acquired by virtue of title or by prescription of twenty years.
Article 538.
In order to acquire by prescription the servitude referred to in the preceding article, the time of possession shall be counted: on the positive, from the day on which the owner of the dominant estate, or the one who took advantage of the servitude, began to exercise it on the servant estate; and on the negative, from the day on which the owner of the dominant estate had prohibited, by a formal act, the servant from carrying out the act that would be lawful without the servitude.
Article 539.
Non-apparent and non-apparent continuous servitudes, whether apparent or not, may only be acquired by virtue of title.
Article 540.
The lack of a title to the servitude that cannot be acquired by prescription can only be met by the deed of recognition of the owner of the land servant, or by a final judgement.
Article 541.
The existence of an apparent sign of servitude between two farms, established by the owner of both, shall be considered, if one is alienated, as a title for the servitude to continue actively and passively, unless, at the time of the separation of the ownership of the two estates, the opposite is expressed in the title of alienation of either of them, or the sign is made disappear before the granting of the deed.
Article 542.
All rights necessary for their use are deemed to be granted when servitude is established.
Section 3.a Rights and Obligations of the Owners of the Dominant Lands and Servant
Article 543.
The owner of the dominant estate may do, at his expense, in the servant estate the works necessary for the use and preservation of the servitude, but without altering it or making it more burdensome.
You must choose the appropriate time and form to do so in order to cause as little discomfort as possible to the owner of the premises servant.
Article 544.
If there are several dominant properties, the owners of all of them will be obliged to contribute to the expenses covered by the previous article, in proportion to the benefit to each one of them. Anyone who does not wish to contribute may be exempted by renouncing servitude for the benefit of others.
If the owner of the land servant is used in any way of servitude, he will be obliged to contribute to the expenses in the proportion expressed above, unless otherwise agreed.
Article 545.
The owner of the land servant shall in no way impair the use of the constituted servitude.
However, if, by reason of the place originally assigned, or of the form established for the use of servitude, it becomes very uncomfortable to the owner of the land servant, or deprives him of any important works, repairs or improvements, it may vary at its expense, provided that it offers another place or form equally comfortable, and so that no harm is done to the owner of the dominant estate or to those entitled to the use of servitude.
Section 4.a On ways of extinguishing servitude
Article 546.
Bondages are extinguished:
1. To assemble in the same person the property of the dominant property and that of the servant.
2.o For non-use for twenty years.
This term shall begin to be counted from the day on which the servitude was no longer used in respect of the discontinuities; and from the day on which an act contrary to the bondage took place in respect of the continuous ones.
3. When the estates come to such a state that they cannot be used from bondage; but it will revive if the estate status permits it to be used, unless when possible use, sufficient time has elapsed for the prescription, as provided in the previous number.
4. To arrive the day or to perform the condition, if the servitude is temporary or conditional.
5.o For the resignation of the owner of the dominant property.
6. For redemption agreed between the owner of the dominant estate and the servant.
Article 547.
The manner of bonding can be prescribed as servitude itself, and in the same way.
Article 548.
If the dominant estate belonged to several in common, the use of the servitude done by one prevents the prescription in respect of the others.
CHAPTER II
Legal servitude
Section 1.a General provisions
Article 549.
Bondages imposed by law are aimed at the public utility or interest of individuals.
Article 550.
All matters relating to servitude established for public or communal purposes shall be governed by the special laws and regulations which determine them and, failing that, by the provisions of this Title.
Article 551.
Bondages imposed by law in the interest of individuals, or for private purposes, shall be governed by the provisions of this Title, without prejudice to the provisions of general or local laws, regulations and ordinances on urban or rural police.
These servitudes may be amended by agreement of the persons concerned where it is not prohibited by law or harmed by third parties.
Section 2.a Water servitude
Article 552.
The lower estates are subject to receiving the waters which, naturally and without man's work, descend from the upper estates, as well as the earth or stone which they drag in their course.
Neither the owner of the lower estate can do works that prevent this servitude, nor the work of the superior that undermines it.
Article 553.
The banks of the rivers, even if they are privately owned, are subject to the general interest of navigation, flotation, fishing and rescue in a three-metre zone.
The lands adjacent to the banks of navigable or floatable rivers are also subject to the serfdom of the sirga way for the exclusive service of navigation and river flotation.
If it is necessary to occupy land of private ownership, compensation shall be paid accordingly.
Article 554.
Where it is necessary to establish a dam for the shunting or taking of water from a river or stream, or for the exploitation of other continuous or discontinuous currents, and if the dam is not to be owned by the river or stream, it may establish the servitude of a dam, subject to appropriate compensation.
Article 555.
Forced servitude of water and water-flow may be imposed only on the basis of public utility in favour of any population or hamlet, subject to compensation.
Article 556.
The serfdoms of the water and the water trough carry with them the obligation in the premises servants to give way to people and cattle to the point where they are to be used, and the compensation must be extended to this service.
Article 557.
Anyone who wants to use the water available to him for a farm has the right to pass it through the intermediate estates, with an obligation to compensate its owners, as well as those of the lower estates on which the waters are filtered or fall.
Article 558.
Anyone who intends to use the right granted in the preceding article is obliged to:
1. To justify that it can dispose of the water and that it is sufficient for the use to which it is intended.
2. To demonstrate that the step you request is the most convenient and less expensive for third party.
3. To indemnify the owner of the land servant in the manner determined by laws and regulations.
Article 559.
Aqueduct servitude may not be imposed on buildings, their courtyards or outbuildings, or on existing gardens or gardens for private purposes.
Article 560.
The servitude of the aqueduct does not prevent the owner of the property servant from closing and closing it, as well as building on the same aqueduct so that it does not experience damage, nor are the necessary repairs and cleanings made impossible.
Article 561.
For legal purposes, aqueduct servitude shall be considered continuous and apparent, even if the passage of water or its use is not constant depending on the needs of the dominant site, or on a shift established for days or hours.
Article 562.
Anyone who, in order to give irrigation to his inheritance or improve it, needs to build a stop or a splitter in the riverbed through which he is to receive the water, may demand that the owners of the margins allow its construction, subject to payment of damages, even those who originate from the new servitude to these owners and the other irrigation units.
Article 563.
The establishment, extension, form and conditions of the water servitude in question in this section shall be governed by the special law on the matter as soon as it is not provided for in this Code.
Section 3.a On easement of passage
Article 564.
The owner of an estate or inheritance, located among others and without access to the public road, has the right to demand passage through the neighbouring estates, subject to the corresponding compensation.
If this servitude is constituted in such a way that its use can be continued for all the needs of the dominant estate by establishing a permanent path, the compensation shall consist in the value of the land occupied and the amount of damage caused to the property servant.
Where it is limited to the necessary step for the cultivation of the farm located among others and for the extraction of its crops through the premises servant without permanent way, the compensation shall consist in the payment of the damage caused by this charge.
Article 565.
The easement of passage must be given by the least damaging point to the estate servant and, as soon as it is reconciled with this rule, where the distance from the dominant site to the public road is less.
Article 566.
The width of the easement of passage will be sufficient to the needs of the dominant estate.
Article 567.
If you purchase a property by sale, swap or partition, you will be enclavated among others by the seller, permutante or co-partner, they are obliged to make way without compensation, unless otherwise agreed.
Article 568.
If the passage granted to an enclosed estate ceases to be necessary because its owner has gathered it to another that is adjacent to the public road, the owner of the premises servant may request that the servitude be extinguished, returning what he would have received for compensation.
The same will be understood in the case of opening a new road that gives access to the enclosed estate.
Article 569.
If it is indispensable to build or repair any building, to pass materials through another's premises, or to place scaffolding or other objects for the work, the owner of this property is obliged to consent to it, receiving compensation corresponding to the damage to be irrogated.
Article 570.
The existing easements of passage for cattle, known by the names of glen, cord, sidewalk or any other, and those of watering, resting and majada, will be governed by the ordinances and regulations of the branch and, if not, by the use and custom of the place.
Without prejudice to legitimately acquired rights, the glen may not in any case exceed the width of 75 metres, the string of 37 metres 50 centimetres and the road of 20 metres.
Where forced servitude is necessary for the passage of cattle or for the watering of cattle, the provisions of this section and of Articles 555 and 556 shall be observed. In this case the width may not exceed 10 metres.
Section 4.a. On medium-sized serfdom
Article 571.
The provisions of this Title and local ordinances and usages shall govern the servitude of the media as soon as they do not oppose it or are not prevented from doing so.
Article 572.
Condominion of middlemen is presumed as long as there is no external title or sign or proof to the contrary:
1.o On the dividing walls of the adjacent buildings to the common elevation point.
2. On the dividing walls of the gardens or pens in the village or in the countryside.
3.o In fences, fences and living hedges that divide rustic grounds.
Article 573.
It is understood that there is an external sign, contrary to the servitude of the middle class:
1.o When windows or gaps are open on the dividing walls of buildings.
2.o When the dividing wall is on one side straight and leaded in all its parament, and on the other present the same on its top, having on the bottom relex or retalles.
3.o When the whole wall is built on the ground of one of the estates, and not half between one and the other of the two adjoining ones.
4. When he suffers the loads of racing, floors and armor of one of the farms, and not of the adjoining.
5.o When the wall divides between courtyards, gardens and heritages is constructed so that the mason turns to one of the properties.
6.o When the dividing wall, built of masonry, presents stones called passways, which from distance to distance come out of the surface only on one side and not on the other.
7th. When the inheritances adjoining others defended by fences or hedges are not closed.
In all these cases, ownership of walls, fences or hedges shall be deemed to belong exclusively to the owner of the estate or inheritance that has in his favour the presumption based on any of the indicated signs.
Article 574.
The ditches or ditches opened between the estates are also presumed to be tampons, if there is no title or sign that proves otherwise.
There is a sign contrary to the middle class when the land or brush taken out to open the ditch or to clean it is on one side, in which case the property of the ditch will belong exclusively to the owner of the inheritance that has this outer sign in his favor.
Article 575.
The repair and construction of the walls and the maintenance of fences, living hedges, ditches and ditches, also mediate, will be paid for by all the owners of the farms that have in their favor the medianería, in proportion to the right of each one.
However, any owner can dispense from contributing to this burden by renouncing the mediation, except in the case where the media wall supports a building of his.
Article 576.
If the owner of a building that rests on a wall of walls wants to demolish it, he may also renounce the middle class, but all the repairs and works necessary to avoid, for that time alone, the damage that the demolition can cause to the wall of the middle.
Article 577.
Every owner can lift the wall, doing so at his expense and compensating for the damage caused by the work, even if it is temporary.
The costs of preserving the wall shall also be borne in mind, in which the wall has been raised or deepened with respect to its previous status; and in addition, compensation for the greater costs to be incurred for the preservation of the wall by reason of the greater height or depth given to it.
If the middle wall cannot withstand the highest elevation, the owner who wishes to lift it shall have an obligation to rebuild it at his own expense; and if it is necessary to make it thicker, he shall give it from his own floor.
Article 578.
Other owners who have not contributed to giving more elevation, depth or thickness to the wall may, however, acquire in it the rights of medianería, paying proportionally the amount of the work and half of the value of the land on which it would have been given greater thickness.
Article 579.
Each owner of a wall may use it in proportion to his right in the commonwealth; he may therefore build by supporting his work on the wall, or by introducing beams up to half its thickness, but without preventing the common and respective use of the other mediators.
In order to use this right, the mediator must obtain the consent of the other interested parties in the media; and if he does not obtain it, the necessary conditions shall be established by experts so that the new work does not prejudice the rights of those interested.
Section 5.a Of the serfdom of lights and views
Article 580.
No mediator can without the consent of the other open a window or any gap.
Article 581.
The owner of a non-middle wall, adjacent to the farm of others, can open windows or holes in it to receive lights at the height of the races, or immediately to the ceilings, and of the dimensions of 30 centimetres in frame, and, in any case, with iron grate stuffed in the wall and with wire net.
However, the owner of the estate or property adjacent to the wall in which the gaps are open may close them if he acquires the middle office and the opposite would not have been agreed.
You can also cover them by building on their ground or by erecting a wall adjacent to that which has such a hole or window.
Article 582.
You cannot open windows with straight views, balconies or other similar cantilevers, on the neighbor's estate, if there are not two meters distance between the wall on which they are built and that property.
Nor can you have side views or obliques on the same property, if there are not 60 centimeters away.
Article 583.
The distances discussed in the previous article will be counted in the straight views from the outside of the wall in the gaps where there are no overhangs, from the line of these where they are, and for the obliques from the line of separation of the two properties.
Article 584.
Article 582 does not apply to buildings separated by a public road.
Article 585.
Where by any title it has been acquired the right to have direct views, balconies or viewpoints over the adjacent property, the owner of the premises servant may not build less than three metres away, the measure being taken in the manner indicated in Article 583.
Section 6.a Building drain
Article 586.
The owner of a building is obliged to build its roofs or roofs so that rainwater falls on its own soil or on the street or public place, and not on the neighbor's floor. Even if it falls on the ground itself, the owner is obliged to collect the waters so as not to cause damage to the adjacent site.
Article 587.
The owner of the property suffering from the edifice of the roofs may build by receiving the waters on his own roof or by giving them another exit in accordance with local ordinances or customs and in such a way that it is not taxed or prejudiced to the dominant property.
Article 588.
Where the corral or courtyard of a house is enclosed among others, and it is not possible to leave through the same house the rainwaters that are collected in it, the establishment of the drainage servitude may be required, giving way to the waters at the point of the adjacent grounds in which the exit is easier and the drainage canal being established in the manner that least harms the servant estate, subject to the appropriate compensation.
Section 7.a Distances and intermediate works for certain constructions and plantations
Article 589.
No plantations may be built or made near the strongholds or fortresses without being subject to the conditions required by the laws, ordinances and particular regulations of the matter.
Article 590.
No one may build wells, sewers, aqueducts, furnaces, forges, chimneys, stables, tanks of corrosive materials, steam moving devices, or factories which themselves or for their products are dangerous or harmful, without keeping the distances prescribed by the regulations and uses of the place, and without carrying out the necessary protective works, subject, in the manner, to the conditions prescribed by the same regulations.
In the absence of a regulation, precautions shall be taken, as deemed necessary, after expert advice, in order to avoid any damage to neighbouring estates or buildings.
Article 591.
Trees may not be planted near an inheritance of others except at the distance authorized by the ordinances or custom of the place, and, failing that, at the distance of two meters from the dividing line of the inheritances if the plantation is made of tall trees, and at the distance of 50 centimeters if the plantation is of shrubs or low trees.
Every owner has the right to ask for the removal of trees that are henceforth planted less distance from their inheritance.
Article 592.
If the branches of some trees extend over an inheritance, gardens, or neighboring courtyards, the owner of these trees shall have the right to demand that they be cut off as soon as they spread over their property, and if the roots of the neighboring trees are spread out on another's soil, the owner of the soil into which they enter may cut them down for himself within their inheritance.
Article 593.
The trees in a medium-sized living hedge are also presumed to be mediated, and any of the owners has the right to demand their demolition.
Except for trees serving as pillars, which may not be plucked out except by mutual agreement between the adjacent ones.
CHAPTER III
Voluntary servitude
Article 594.
Any owner of a farm may establish in it any servitude which he deems convenient, and in the manner and form which he may find fit, provided that it does not contravene law or public order.
Article 595.
A person who owns a farm whose usufruct belongs to another may impose on it, without the consent of the usufructario, servitudes which do not prejudice the right of the usufruct.
Article 596.
Where a person has direct control over a farm and a useful domain, perpetual voluntary servitude may not be established over it without the consent of both owners.
Article 597.
To impose servitude on an undivided fund requires the consent of all co-owners.
The concession made only by some will be suspended until it is granted by the last of all members or community members.
But the concession made by one of the co-owners separately from the others obliges the assignor and his successors, even if they are in their own right, not to impede the exercise of the right granted.
Article 598.
The title and, where appropriate, the possession of the servitude acquired by prescription determine the rights of the dominant estate and the duties of the servant. If not, servitude shall be governed by the provisions of this Title which apply to it.
Article 599.
If the owner of the premises has been obliged, upon the establishment of the serfdom, to pay for the works necessary for the use and preservation of it, he may be released from this burden by abandoning his property to the owner of the dominant.
Article 600.
The community of pastures may henceforth be established only by express concession of the owners, resulting from contract or last will, and not in favour of a universality of individuals and a universality of goods, but in favour of certain individuals and on certain and certain properties.
The title of the institution shall be the bond established under this article.
Article 601.
The community of pastures on public land, already belonging to the municipalities, and to the State, will be governed by administrative laws.
Article 602.
If among the neighbors of one or more villages there is a community of pastures, the owner who fences with tapia or hedge a farm, will make it free of the community. However, the remaining servitudes which were established therein shall remain.
The owner who fences his estate will retain his right to the grass community on the other unenclosed estates.
Article 603.
The owner of land subject to pasture bondage may redeem this burden by paying its value to those entitled to servitude.
In the absence of an agreement, the capital for redemption shall be fixed on the basis of 4 per 100 of the annual value of pastures, regulated by expert valuation.
Article 604.
The provisions of the preceding article apply to servitudes established for the use of firewood and other products from privately owned forests.
TITLE VIII
From the Property Registry
SINGLE CHAPTER
Article 605.
The purpose of the Property Registry is to register or record acts and contracts relating to the domain and other rights in real estate.
Article 606.
Domain titles, or other real rights in immovable property, which are not duly registered or recorded in the Property Registry, do not harm third parties.
Article 607.
The Register of Property shall be public for those who have a known interest in ascertaining the status of the real property or rights recorded or registered.
Article 608.
In order to determine the titles subject to registration or annotation, the form, effects and extinction of the titles, the manner of keeping the Register and the value of the entries in their books, the provisions of the Mortgage Act.
THIRD BOOK
Of the different ways of acquiring property
Preliminary provision
Article 609.
The property is acquired by occupation.
Property and other rights in property are acquired and transferred by law, by donation, by tested and intestate succession, and by virtue of certain contracts through tradition.
They can also be acquired by prescription.
TITLE I
The occupation
Article 610.
Acquired by occupation are goods appropriated by their nature that lack ownership, hidden treasure and abandoned furniture.
With the exceptions that may arise from the rules for their identification, protection or preservation, animals without owners, including those that may be hunted and fished, are susceptible to occupation.
The right to hunt and fish is governed by special laws.
Article 611.
1. Anyone who finds a lost animal must return it to its owner or to those who are responsible for its care, if they know its identity.
2. With the exception of the provisions of the preceding paragraph, in the case of substantiated indications that the animal found is subjected to ill-treatment or abandonment, the finder shall be exempt from returning it to its owner or responsible for its care, immediately bringing those facts to the attention of the competent authorities.
3. If the animal is returned to its owner, or to whom it is responsible for its care, who after finding it has taken care of it may exercise the corresponding action of repetition of the expenses destined for the cure and care of the animal, as well as those generated by its restitution, and shall be entitled to compensation for the damage that may have been caused to it.
4. The provisions of the preceding paragraphs shall be without prejudice to the provisions of the relevant special legislation.
5. The provisions of this article shall not apply to the cases provided for in articles 612 and 613 of this Code.
Article 612.
The owner of a swarm of bees shall have the right to pursue it on the other person's fund, compensating the owner of the fund for the damage caused. If he's surrounded, he'll need the owner's consent to penetrate it.
If the owner has not pursued, or ceases to pursue the swarm for two consecutive days, the owner of the estate may occupy or retain it.
Article 613.
Doves, rabbits and fish that pass from their respective farm to another belonging to a different owner, shall be owned by the latter, provided that they have not been attracted by some artifice or fraud.
Article 614.
Anyone who by chance discovers a treasure hidden in the property of others shall have the right conferred upon him by article 351 of this Code.
Article 615.
Whoever finds a piece of furniture, which is not treasure, must return it to his former possessor. If the latter is not known, he shall immediately report it to the Mayor of the town where the finding has been verified.
The Mayor will have this published, in the usual way, two consecutive Sundays.
If the movable thing cannot be kept without deterioration or without making expenses that significantly decrease its value, it will be sold in public auction after eight days have passed since the second announcement without having submitted the owner, and its price will be deposited.
After two years, starting from the day of the second publication, without the owner having presented himself, the thing found or its value to which it had been found will be awarded.
Both the owner and the owner shall be obliged, if necessary, to meet the costs.
Article 616.
If the owner presents himself on time, he shall be obliged to pay, by way of prize, to the person who made the finding, one tenth of the sum or price of the thing found. When the value of the find exceeds 2,000 pesetas, the prize will be reduced to the twentieth part in terms of excess.
Article 617.
The rights to objects thrown into the sea or to which waves throw to the beach, of whatever nature they may be, or to plants and herbs that grow on its banks, are determined by special laws.
TITLE II
Donation
CHAPTER I
From the nature of donations
Article 618.
Donation is an act of liberality for which a person freely disposes of one thing in favor of another, which accepts it.
Article 619.
It is also a donation that is made to a person on the basis of his merits or for the services provided to the donor, provided that they do not constitute due debts, or that in which a tax is imposed on the donor less than the value of the donated.
Article 620.
Donations to produce their effects by the death of the donor participate in the nature of the provisions of last will, and shall be governed by the rules established in the chapter of the testamentary succession.
Article 621.
Donations to produce their effects between live shall be governed by the general provisions of contracts and obligations in all matters not determined in this Title.
Article 622.
Donations for onerous reasons shall be governed by the rules of contracts and remunerations by the provisions of this Title in respect of which they exceed the value of the tax imposed.
Article 623.
The donation has been perfected since the donor became aware of the donor's acceptance.
CHAPTER II
From people who can make or receive donations
Article 624.
Donation can be made by anyone who can hire and dispose of their property.
Article 625.
Donations may be accepted by all those who are not particularly incapacitated by law for this purpose.
Article 626.
Persons who cannot contract may not accept conditional or onerous donations without the intervention of their legitimate representatives.
Article 627.
Donations made to conceived and unborn children may be accepted by those who would legitimately represent them if their birth had already been verified.
Article 628.
Donations made to inhabile persons are null, even if they have been simulated, under the guise of another contract, per person filed.
Article 629.
The donation does not oblige the donor, nor does it produce effect, but from acceptance.
Article 630.
The donor must, subject to the penalty of nullity, accept the donation by himself or by means of authorized person with special power for the case, or with general power and quite a lot.
Article 631.
Persons who accept a donation on behalf of others who are unable to do so by themselves shall be obliged to seek the notification and annotation referred to in article 633.
Article 632.
A donation of movable property may be made orally or in writing.
The verbal requires the simultaneous delivery of the donated thing. In the absence of this requirement, it shall not take effect if it is not made in writing and acceptance is recorded in the same form.
Article 633.
In order for the donation of property to be valid, it must be made in public deed, expressing in it individually the donated goods and the value of the charges to be met by the donor.
Acceptance may be made in the same or separate deed of donation; but it shall not take effect if it is not made in the life of the donor.
Made in separate deed, the acceptance must be authentically notified to the donor, and this diligence shall be recorded in both deeds.
CHAPTER III
Effects and limitations of donations
Article 634.
The donation may include all or part of the assets present from the donor, provided that the donor reserves, in full ownership or in usufruct, what is necessary to live in a state corresponding to his circumstances.
Article 635.
The donation will not be able to understand future goods.
Future assets are those that the donor cannot dispose of at the time of the donation.
Article 636.
Notwithstanding the provisions of article 634, no one may give or receive, by way of donation, more than he may give or receive by will.
The donation will be innocuous in all that exceeds this measure.
Article 637.
Where the donation has been made to several persons together, it shall be understood as equal parts; and the right to increase shall not be given among them, if the donor has not otherwise arranged.
Except for this provision, donations made jointly to both spouses, including the right, shall take place, if the donor has not provided otherwise.
Article 638.
The donor is subrogated in all the rights and actions that in the event of a conviction would be the responsibility of the donor. However, the latter is not obliged to clean up the donated goods, unless the donation is onerous, in which case the donor of the eviction will be responsible until the charge is paid.
Article 639.
The donor may reserve the right to dispose of some of the donated goods or of any amount from them; but if he dies without having made use of this right, the property or the amount reserved shall belong to the donor.
Article 640.
The property may also be donated to one person and the usufruct to another or others, subject to the limitation set out in article 781 of this Code.
Article 641.
Reversion may be validly established in favour of only the donor for any case and circumstances, but not in favour of other persons but in the same cases and with the same limitations as determined by this Code for testamentary substitutions.
The reversal stipulated by the donor in favour of a third party against the provisions of the preceding paragraph is null and void; however, it will not result in the nullity of the donation.
Article 642.
If the donation has been made by imposing on the donor the obligation to pay the donor's debts, as the clause does not contain another declaration, only those that appeared earlier shall be deemed to be obliged to pay.
Article 643.
By no provision for the payment of debts, the donor shall be liable only when the donation has been made in the form of fraud by creditors.
Creditors shall always be presumed to be making a fraudulent donation when the donor has not made sufficient provision to pay the debts prior to the donation.
CHAPTER IV
Revocation and reduction of donations
Article 644.
Any gift made by a person who has no children or descendants between the living shall be revocable simply because any of the following cases occurs:
1. That the donor has, after the donation, children, even if they are posthumous.
2. May the child of the donor who was considered dead at the time of the donation be found alive.
Article 645.
Once the donation has been terminated due to the supervenence of children, the donated property or its value will be returned to the donor if the donor has sold it.
If mortgages are found, the donor may release the mortgage, paying the amount it guarantees, with the right to claim it from the donor.
When the goods cannot be returned, they will be appreciated for what they were worth at the time of making the donation.
Article 646.
The action of revocation for the survival or survival of children prescribes for the course of five years, counted since the last child was reported to have been born or the existence of the one believed dead.
This action is non-renunciable and is transmitted, by the death of the donor, to the children and their descendants.
Article 647.
The donation will be revoked at the request of the donor, when the donor has failed to comply with any of the conditions imposed by the donor.
In this case, the donated property will return to the donor, the disposals made by the donor and the mortgages imposed on them, subject to the limitation established, as regards third parties, by the Mortgage Act.
Article 648.
The donation may also be revoked, at the request of the donor, because of ingratitude in the following cases:
1. If the donor commits an offence against the person, honour or property of the donor.
2. If the donor imputes to the donor any of the offences that give rise to public prosecution or prosecution, even if he proves it; unless the offence was committed against the same donor, his spouse or children constituted under his authority.
3.o If you improperly deny food.
Article 649.
Revocation of the donation due to ingratitude will, however, remain the dispositions and mortgages prior to the entry of the demand for revocation in the Property Registry.
The subsequent ones will be void.
Article 650.
In the case referred to in the first paragraph of the preceding article, the donor shall be entitled to require from the donor the value of the assets disposed of that it cannot claim from third parties, or the amount in which they were mortgaged.
The time of donation shall be taken into account to regulate the value of such property.
Article 651.
When the donation is revoked for any of the reasons expressed in article 644 or by ingratitude, and when reduced by innocuousness, the donor will not return the fruits except from the filing of the claim.
If the revocation is based on the fact that any of the conditions imposed on the donation have ceased to be fulfilled, the donor shall return, in addition to the goods, the fruits which he would have received after he failed to fulfil the condition.
Article 652.
The action granted to the donor on account of ingratitude may not be waived in advance. This action prescribes within a year, counted since the donor had knowledge of the fact and possibility of exercising the action.
Article 653.
This action shall not be transmitted to the heirs of the donor, if the donor may not have exercised it.
Nor may the heir of the donor be brought against him, unless, upon his death, the application was brought.
Article 654.
Donations which, in accordance with Article 636, are innocuous in the liquid value of the donor's assets at the time of their death, shall be reduced in respect of excess, but this reduction shall not prevent them from having effect during the donor's life and for the donor to bear the fruits.
For the reduction of donations, the provisions of this chapter and of articles 820 and 821 of this Code shall apply.
Article 655.
Only those who are entitled to a legitimate or aliquot share of the inheritance and its heirs or successors may request a reduction in donations.
Those covered by the preceding paragraph may not waive their right during the life of the donor, either by express declaration, or by consenting to the donation.
Donors, non-aliquot legatees and creditors of the deceased may not request or take advantage of the reduction.
Article 656.
If, with two or more donations, they do not cover all in the available part, the more recent ones will be abolished or reduced in excess.
TITLE III
Inheritance
General provisions
Article 657.
The rights to succession of a person are transferred from the time of his death.
Article 658.
Succession is deduced by the will of man manifested in will and, in the absence of it, by the disposition of the law.
The first is called testamentaria, and the second is legitimate.
It may also be deduced in one part by the will of man, and in another by the disposition of the law.
Article 659.
Inheritance includes all property, rights and obligations of a person that are not extinguished by death.
Article 660.
Call yourself an heir to the one that happens on a universal basis, and a legate to the one that happens on a particular basis.
Article 661.
The heirs succeed the deceased by the fact only of his death in all his rights and obligations.
CHAPTER I
From the Wills
Section 1.a. Capacity to dispose by will
Article 662.
They can test all those who are not expressly prohibited by law.
Article 663.
They can't test:
1o A person under the age of fourteen.
2. The person who at the time of testing cannot conform or express his will or even with the help of means or supports for it.
Article 664.
The will made before mental alienation is valid.
Article 665.
A person with a disability may grant a will when, in the opinion of the Notary, he or she is able to understand and express the scope of its provisions. The Notary shall endeavour to ensure that the grantor develops its own decision-making process by supporting its understanding and reasoning and by facilitating, as necessary, adjustments that may express its will, wishes and preferences.
Article 666.
In order to appreciate the testator's ability, attention will be paid only to the state in which it is located at the time of granting the will.
Section 2.a On wills in general
Article 667.
The act by which a person disposes after his death of all his property or part thereof is called a will.
Article 668.
The testator may dispose of his property as inheritance or legacy.
In doubt, even if the testator has not materially used the word heir, if his will is clear about this concept, the provision will be worth as a universal or inheritance.
Article 669.
No two or more persons may jointly or in the same instrument, either for mutual benefit or for the benefit of a third party.
Article 670.
The will is a very personal act: its formation cannot be left, in all or in part, at the discretion of a third party, nor can it be done by means of commissioner or representative.
Nor may the subsistence of the appointment of heirs or legatees be left to a third party, nor may the designation of portions in which they are to occur when they are established nominally.
Article 671.
The testator may assign to a third party the distribution of the amounts that he leaves in general to specific classes, such as relatives, the poor or charitable establishments, as well as the choice of persons or establishments to which they are to apply.
Article 672.
Any provision made by the testator concerning the institution of the heir, command or legacies, referring to private documents or papers that appear at his home or outside his home after his death, shall be void if the documents or papers do not meet the requirements for the olographer's will.
Article 673.
The will granted with violence, wrong or fraud will be void.
Article 674.
Anyone who, by his or her own will, fraud or violence, prevents a person from freely granting his or her last will, shall be deprived of his or her right to inheritance, without prejudice to the criminal responsibility he or she has incurred.
Article 675.
Any testamentary disposition shall be understood in the literal sense of his words, unless it appears clearly that the testator's will was otherwise. In case of doubt, what appears most in accordance with the intention of the testator, according to the tenor of the same will, will be observed.
The testator may not prohibit a challenge to the will in cases where there is nullity declared by law.
Section 3.a On the Form of Wills
Article 676.
The will can be common or special.
The common one can be an olograph, open or closed.
Article 677.
Special wills are considered military, maritime and foreign.
Article 678.
The will is called an olograph when the testator writes it for himself in the form and with the requirements set out in Article 688.
Article 679.
The will is open whenever the testator manifests his last will in the presence of the persons who must authorize the act, being aware of what is provided for in it.
Article 680.
The will is closed when the testator, without revealing his last will, declares that it is contained in the statement he presents to the persons who are to authorize the act.
Article 681.
They may not be witnesses in wills:
First. Minors, except as provided for in article 701.
Second. No content.
Third. Those who do not understand the language of the testator.
Fourth. Those who do not present the discernment necessary to carry out the witness work.
Fifth. The spouse or relatives within the fourth degree of consanguinity or second degree of affinity of the authorizing Notary and those who have with this employment relationship.
Article 682.
In the open will, the heirs and legatees established therein, their spouses, or their relatives, within the fourth degree of consanguinity or second degree of affinity, shall not be witnesses.
This prohibition does not apply to legates or their spouses or relatives when the legacy is of a movable object or quantity of minor importance in relation to the hereditary flow.
Article 683.
In order for a witness to be declared unfit, the cause of his incapacity must exist at the time the will is granted.
Article 684.
When the testator expresses his will in language that the Notary does not know, the presence of an interpreter, chosen by him, shall be required to translate the testamentary disposition to the official at the place of the bestowal employed by the Notary. The instrument shall be written in the two languages with an indication of the language used by the tester.
The open will and the record of the closed will be written in the foreign language in which the testator and the official employed by the Notary are expressed, even if the Notary knows the foreign language.
Article 685.
The notary shall know the testator and if he does not know him, his person shall be identified with two witnesses who know him and who are known to the notary himself, or by the use of documents issued by the public authorities whose purpose is to identify the persons. The Notary must also ensure that, in his opinion, the testator has the legal capacity to test.
In the cases of Articles 700 and 701, witnesses shall be required to meet the testator and shall endeavour to ensure that the testator is capable.
Article 686.
If the person of the testator cannot be identified in the manner provided for in the preceding article, this circumstance shall be declared by the Notary, or by the witnesses, if any, describing the documents submitted by the testator for that purpose and the personal signs thereof.
If the will is challenged for such reason, the proof of the identity of the testator shall correspond to the person who maintains its validity.
Article 687.
The will in which the formalities laid down in this chapter have not been observed shall be null and void.
Section 4.a Of The Olograph Will
Article 688.
The olograph will only be granted by adults.
In order for this will to be valid it must be written all and signed by the testator, with expression of the year, month and day on which it is granted.
If you have words crossed out, amended or between lines, the testator will save them under your signature.
Foreigners may grant an olograph will in their own language.
Article 689.
The olograph will have to be protocolized, presented, within five years of the death of the testator, to Notary. It shall draw up the protocol in accordance with the laws of the Member States.
Article 690.
The person holding an olograph will must submit it to the competent Notary within 10 days of the person in whose possession the testator died. Failure to perform this duty shall hold you liable for any damages you have caused.
It may also be presented by anyone who has an interest in the will as an heir, legatee, executor or in any other concept.
Article 691.
When the olograph will is presented and the testator's death is confirmed, his adveration will be carried out in accordance with the notarized legislation.
Article 692.
After the will has been acknowledged and the identity of the author has been established, the author will be protocolized.
Article 693.
The notary, if he considers the authenticity of the will to be established, shall authorize the protocol act, in which he shall record the proceedings carried out and, where appropriate, the observations made.
If the will is not warned, because the identity of the grantor is not sufficiently established, the file will be filed without protocolizing it.
Whether authorized or not to protocolize the olograph will, non-compliant parties may exercise their rights in the appropriate trial.
Section 5.a of the Open Testament
Article 694.
The open will shall be granted to a Notary able to act at the place of bestowal.
Only those cases expressly identified in this section shall be excluded from this rule.
Article 695.
The testator shall express orally, in writing or by any technical, material or human means his last wish to the Notary. Written by this will according to it and with expression of the place, year, month, day and time of its bestowal and warned by the testator of the right to read it by itself, the Notary will read it aloud so that the testator will manifest if he is in conformity with his will. If so, it will be signed at the time by the testator who can do so and, where appropriate, by witnesses and other persons to attend.
If the testator declares that he does not know or cannot sign, one of the witnesses will do so for him and at his request.
When the testator has difficulty or inability to read the will or to hear the reading of its contents, the Notary shall ensure, using the appropriate technical, material or human means, that the testator has understood the necessary information and explanations and that he knows that the testament faithfully gathers his will.
Article 696.
The Notary shall attest to the testator or to have duly identified him and, failing that, shall make the declaration provided for in Article 686. He will also note that, in his opinion, the testator is in possession of the legal capacity to grant a will.
Article 697.
Two qualified witnesses must attend the act of granting:
1. When the testator declares that he does not know or cannot sign the will.
2.° When the testator or notary request it.
Article 698.
The award shall also include:
1. Witnesses of knowledge, if any, who may also intervene as instrumental witnesses.
2. The doctors who would have recognized the incapacitated testator.
3. The interpreter who would have translated the will of the testator into the official language used by the Notary.
Article 699.
All formalities expressed in this Section shall be performed in a single act which shall begin with the reading of the will, without any interruption being lawful, except that which may be motivated by a passing accident.
Article 700.
If the testator is in imminent danger of death, the will may be granted before five qualified witnesses, without the need of Notary.
Article 701.
In the event of an epidemic, the will may also be granted without Notary intervention before three witnesses over the age of sixteen.
Article 702.
In the cases of the two preceding articles, the will will will be written, if it is not possible, the will will be valid even if the witnesses are unable to write.
Article 703.
The will granted under the provisions of the preceding three articles will be ineffective if it takes two months after the testator has left the risk of death, or the epidemic has ceased.
If the testator dies within that period, the will will will also be ineffective if within three months of death the competent Notary is not sent to the competent Notary for public writing, it has already been granted in writing, already orally.
Article 704.
Wills granted without the Notary's authorization will be ineffective if they do not go to public writing and are protocolized in the form provided for in the notary legislation.
Article 705.
A will opened for failure to observe the solemnities established for each case has been declared void, and the Notary who has authorized it shall be liable for any damages incurred, if the fault results from its malice, or for negligence or inexcusable ignorance.
Section 6.a of the closed will
Article 706.
The closed will must be written.
If you write it by your fist and handwriting, the testator will finally sign it.
If it is written by any technical means or by another person at the testator's request, the testator will place his signature on all his sheets and at the bottom of the will. If the will has been written in electronic form, it must be signed with a recognized electronic signature.
When the testator does not know or cannot sign, he will do so at his request at the foot and on all the sheets another person, expressing the cause of the impossibility.
In any case, the words amended, crossed or written between lines will be saved before signature.
Article 707.
The following solemnities shall be observed in the granting of the closed will:
1.a The paper containing the will shall be placed inside a cover, closed and sealed so that it cannot be removed without breaking it.
2.a The testator will appear with the will closed and sealed, or will close and seal it in the act, before the Notary who will authorize it.
3.a In the presence of the Notary, the testator shall state by himself, or by means of the interpreter provided for in Article 684, that the document he presents contains his will, stating whether it is written and signed by him or whether it is written by someone else or by any mechanical means and signed at the end and on all his sheets by him or by another person at his request.
4.a On the cover of the testament the Notary shall extend the corresponding record of its bestowal, expressing the number and mark of the seals with which it is closed, and testifying to the knowledge of the testator or to the identification of the person in the manner provided for in Articles 685 and 686, and to the testator with the legal capacity to grant the testament in his opinion.
5.a Extended and read the minutes, it will be signed by the testator who can do so and, if necessary, the persons to attend, and will be authorized by the Notary with his sign and signature.
If the testator declares that he does not know or cannot sign, he will do so for him and at his request one of the two suitable witnesses who must attend in this case.
6.a This circumstance, in addition to the place, time, day, month and year of the grant, shall also be expressed in the minutes.
7.a Two suitable witnesses will attend the act of granting, if requested by the testator or the Notary.
Article 708.
A closed will cannot be made by people who do not know or cannot read.
Persons with visual impairments may grant it, using mechanical or technological means that allow them to write and read it, provided that the remaining validity requirements set forth in this Code are observed.
Article 709.
Persons who cannot express themselves verbally, but who can write, may grant a closed will, observing the following:
1. The will must be signed by the testator. For the other requirements, the provisions of Article 706 shall apply.
2. In making his presentation, the testator will write on the top of the cover, in the presence of the Notary, who within it contains his will, expressing how it is written and which is signed by him.
3. After the testator's writing, the certificate of award shall be drawn up, attesting to the notary's compliance with the provisions of the preceding number and the other provisions of article 707 as applicable to the case.
Persons with visual impairment, when making the presentation of the will, must have expressed on the cover, by mechanical or technological means that allow them to read the written, that within it is contained their will, expressing the means employed and that the will is signed by them.
Article 710.
The Notary, having authorized the closed will, will hand it over to the testator, after putting in the protocol authorized copy of the act of bestowal.
Article 711.
The testator may keep in his possession the closed will, or entrust his custody to a person of his confidence, or deposit it with the Notary Authorizing to keep it in his file.
In the latter case, the Notary shall give receipt to the testator and shall record in his or her current protocol, in the margin or after the copy of the act of bestowal, which shall remain in his or her possession. If the testator then withdraws it, he will sign a receipt after that note.
Article 712.
1. The person holding a closed will shall submit it to the competent Notary within 10 days of the person who is aware of the death of the testator.
2. The notary authorizing a closed will, constituted as the depositary of the will by the testator, shall, within ten days of his or her death, inform the surviving spouse, the descendants and the ascendants of the testator and, failing that, the collateral relatives up to the fourth degree.
3. In the previous two cases, if they do not know the identity or domicile of these persons, or if their existence is unknown, the Notary shall give the publicity determined by the notarial law.
Failure to comply with this duty, as well as failure to present the will by anyone in your possession or by the Notary, shall hold you liable for the damages caused.
Article 713.
Anyone who intentionally ceases to present the closed will in his possession within the time limit set out in the preceding article, in addition to the liability determined therein, shall forfeit any right to inheritance, if he has it as an abintestatous heir or as an heir or legatee by will.
The same penalty shall be imposed on any person who unlawfully steals the closed will of the home of the testator or of the person holding the witness in custody or deposit and who conceals, breaks or otherwise renders useless the witness, without prejudice to the criminal liability that may arise.
Article 714.
For the opening and protocolization of the closed will, the provisions of the notarial law shall be observed.
Article 715.
A closed will is null and void in which the formalities laid down in this section have not been observed; and the Notary who authorizes it shall be liable for any damages that may arise, if it is proved that the fault was caused by his malice or by inexcusable negligence or ignorance. It will, however, be valid as an olographer's will, if all of it is written and signed by the testator and has the other conditions of this will.
Section 7.a of the Military Will
Article 716.
In time of war, military campaigners, volunteers, hostages, prisoners and other individuals employed in, or who follow, the military may grant their will to an officer who has at least the status of Captain.
This provision applies to individuals in an army in a foreign country.
If the testator is ill or injured, he may grant it to the Chaplain or the Optional to assist him.
If he is in a detachment, to whom he sends him, even if he is a junior.
In all cases of this article, the presence of two suitable witnesses will always be necessary.
Article 717.
The persons referred to in the preceding article may also grant a closed will to a War Commissioner, who in this case shall exercise the functions of Notary, observing the provisions of Articles 706 et seq.
Article 718.
Wills granted under the two preceding articles must be forwarded as soon as possible to the headquarters and, by this, to the Ministry of Defence.
The Ministry, if the testator has died, will send the will to the Notary College corresponding to the last domicile of the deceased, and if this is not known, will forward it to the Notary College of Madrid.
The Notary College shall forward the will to the Notary corresponding to the last address of the testator. Received by the Notary, he must inform the heirs and others interested in the succession within ten days of his existence, so that they may appear before him for the purpose of protocolizing him in accordance with the law.
Article 719.
The wills referred to in article 716 shall expire four months after the testator has ceased to be in the campaign.
Article 720.
During a battle, assault, combat and generally in any near danger of war action, a military will may be granted by word of mouth before two witnesses.
But this will will be ineffective if the testator is spared the danger in which he tested.
Even if it is not saved, the will will will be ineffective if it is not formalized by the witnesses before the War Auditor or Justice Officer following the army, then proceeding in the manner provided for in article 718.
Article 721.
If the military will is closed, the provisions of articles 706 and 707 shall be observed; but it shall be granted before the officer and the two witnesses required by article 716 for the opening, all of whom must sign the act of bestowal, as well as the testator, if they can.
Section 8.a of the maritime will
Article 722.
Wills, open or closed, of which they are on board during a sea voyage, shall be granted as follows:
If the ship is a warship, before the Accountant or the person performing his duties, in the presence of two suitable witnesses, who see and understand the testator. The commander of the ship, or the one who does so, will also give his approval.
On merchant ships, the will shall be authorized by the Captain, or by the person who makes his/her own, with the assistance of two qualified witnesses.
In either case witnesses shall be chosen from among the passengers, if any; but one of them, at least, must be able to sign, which shall do so by itself and by the testator, if he does not know or cannot do so.
If the will is opened, the provisions of article 695 shall be observed, and if it is closed, which is ordered in section 6 of this chapter, excluding the number of witnesses and the intervention of the Notary.
Article 723.
The will of the warship counter and the will of the merchant captain shall be authorized by the person who is to replace them in office, observing for the rest the provisions of the preceding article.
Article 724.
Open wills made on the high seas will be guarded by the Commander or the Captain, and they will be mentioned in the Diary of Navigation.
The same mention shall be made of the olographs and the closed ones.
Article 725.
If the ship arrives at a foreign port where there is a diplomatic or consular agent of Spain, the Commander of the war, or the Captain of the merchant, shall give the said agent a copy of the open will or of the certificate of granting of the closed one, and of the note taken in the Journal.
The copy of the will or the record shall bear the same signatures as the original, if those who signed it live and are on board; otherwise it shall be authorized by the Accountant or Captain who has received the will, or the one who makes his/her own, and also by those who are on board who intervened in the will.
The diplomatic or consular agent shall transmit in writing a copy of the gift and, if it is closed, the copy of the will or of the act of the grant shall be closed and sealed. The copy shall be sent by the note of the Journal through the appropriate channel to the Minister of the Navy, who shall send it to the Archives of his Ministry.
The Commander or Captain making the delivery shall collect from the diplomatic or consular agent certification of having verified it, and shall take note of it in the Diary of Navigation.
Article 726.
When the ship, whether war or merchant, arrives at the first port of the Kingdom, the Commander or Captain shall deliver the original, closed and sealed will to the local Maritime Authority, with a copy of the note taken in the Journal; and, if the testator has died, a certificate proving it.
Delivery shall be credited in the manner provided for in the preceding article, and the Maritime Authority shall forward it without delay to the Minister of the Navy.
Article 727.
If the testator has died and the will is opened, the Minister of the Navy shall practise the provisions of article 718.
Article 728.
Where the will has been granted by an alien on a Spanish ship, the Minister of the Navy shall forward the will to the State, so that the appropriate course of action may be given through diplomatic channels.
Article 729.
If the will is olographed and the testator dies during the journey, the Commander or Captain shall collect the will to guard it, making mention of it in the Journal, and shall deliver it to the local Maritime Authority, in the form and for the purposes provided for in the preceding article, when the ship arrives at the first port of the Kingdom.
The same will be done when the will is closed, if it is kept in its possession by the testator at the time of his death.
Article 730.
Wills, open and closed, granted in accordance with the provisions of this section, will expire after four months, counted from when the testator disembarks at a point where he can test in the ordinary form.
Article 731.
If there is a danger of shipwreck, the provisions of Article 720 shall apply to crews and passengers of warships or merchants.
Section 9.a of the foreign will
Article 732.
The Spaniards may test outside the national territory by subjecting themselves to the forms established by the laws of the country in which they are located.
They may also test on the high seas during their navigation on a foreign ship, subject to the laws of the Nation to which the ship belongs.
They may also make an olograph will, in accordance with art. 688. Even in countries whose laws do not admit such a will.
Article 733.
The joint will, prohibited by article 669, for the Spanish to grant in a foreign country will not be valid in Spain, even if it is authorized by the laws of the nation where it was granted.
Article 734.
Also, Spaniards who are in a foreign country may grant their will, open or closed, to the diplomatic or consular official of Spain who exercises notarial functions at the place of the grant.
In these cases, all the formalities laid down in Sections 5 and 6 of this chapter shall be observed respectively.
Article 735.
The diplomatic or consular agent shall transmit, with his signature and seal, a copy of the open will, or of the certificate granting the closure, to the Ministry of State for deposit in its archives.
Article 736.
The diplomatic or consular agent, in whose possession he had deposited his olograph will or closed a Spanish, shall send it to the Ministry of State when the testator dies, with the death certificate.
The Ministry of State will have the news of the death published in the Gazette of Madrid, so that those interested in the inheritance can collect the will and manage its protocolization in the way anticipated.
Section 10.a Revocation and ineffectiveness of wills
Article 737.
All testamentary provisions are essentially revocable, even if the testator expresses in the will his will or determination not to revoke them.
The derogatory clauses of future provisions, and those in which the testator orders that the revocation of the will is not valid if he does not do so with certain words or signs, shall be deemed not to be applied.
Article 738.
The will cannot be revoked in all or in part but with the solemnities necessary to test.
Article 739.
The previous will is revoked in law by the perfect posterior, if the testator does not express in it his will that he should remain in whole or in part.
However, the previous will regains its strength if the testator later revokes the later one and expressly declares that his will is worth the first one.
Article 740.
The revocation shall have its effect even if the second testament lapses by the inability of the heir or the legatees named therein, or by the resignation of the heir or legatees named therein.
Article 741.
The recognition of a child does not lose its legal force even if the will in which it was made is revoked or it does not contain other provisions, or if the rest of it is void.
Article 742.
The closed will that appears at the home of the testator with broken covers or seals broken, or erased, scraped or amended the signatures that authorize it, is presumed revoked.
The will will, however, be valid when it is proved that the defect has occurred without the will or knowledge of the testator or is affected by serious alterations in his mental health; but if the cover appears broken or the seals broken, it will also be necessary to prove the authenticity of the testament for its validity.
If the will is in the possession of another person, it shall be understood that the vice comes from it and shall not be valid as it is not proven to be authentic, if the cover is broken or the seals are broken; and if one and the other are found to be whole, but with the signatures erased, scraped or amended, the testament shall be valid, as it is not justified to have been delivered in this form by the testator himself.
Article 743.
Wills shall expire, or the testamentary provisions shall be ineffective in whole or in part, only in the cases expressly provided for in this Code.
CHAPTER II
From the inheritance
Section 1.a of the ability to succeed by will and without it
Article 744.
Those who are not incapacitated by law may succeed by will or abintestatato.
Article 745.
They are unable to happen:
1. The abortive creatures, meaning those that do not meet the circumstances expressed in article 30.
2. Associations or corporations not permitted by law.
Article 746.
Churches and ecclesiastical councils, provincial councils and provinces, municipalities and municipalities, establishments for hospitality, charitable and public instruction, associations authorized or recognized by law and other legal persons may acquire by will subject to the provisions of article 38.
Article 747.
If the testator disposes of all or part of his property for the benefit of his soul for suffrage and pious works, doing so indeterminately and without specifying its application, the executors shall sell the goods and distribute the amount thereof, giving half to the Diocesan for the purpose of the aforementioned suffrages and the attentions and needs of the Church, and the other half to the corresponding civilian governor for the charitable establishments of the domicile of the deceased, and, failing that, for those of the province.
Article 748.
An institution in favour of a public establishment on condition or imposing a tax on it shall be valid only if approved by the Government.
Article 749.
Provisions made in favour of the poor in general, without designation of persons or population, shall be deemed to be limited to those of the home of the testator at the time of his death, if it is not clear that his will was otherwise.
The qualification of the poor and the distribution of goods shall be made by the person who has appointed the testator, in his absence by the executors, and, if there are none, by the Parroco, the Mayor and the municipal judge, who shall, by a majority of votes, resolve any doubts that may arise.
The same will be done when the testator has disposed of his property in favor of the poor in a particular parish or village.
Article 750.
Any provision in favour of an uncertain person shall be void unless by any event it may be true.
Article 751.
The provision made generically in favour of the relatives of the testator is understood to be made in favour of those closest to them in degree.
Article 752.
The testator's testamentary dispositions during his last illness in favor of the priest who confessed to him, his relatives within the fourth grade, or his church, council, community, or institute, shall not be effective.
Article 753.
Neither shall the testamentary provision be effective in favour of any person who is a tutor or curator representative of the testator, except where it has been made after the termination of guardianship or curatorship.
The provision made by persons who are detained for reasons of health or assistance, in favour of their carers who are holders, administrators or employees of the public or private establishment in which they were placed, shall be null and void. The provision made in favour of these establishments shall also be void.
Other natural persons providing care, care or services of a nature analogous to the originator may be favoured in the succession of the deceased only if ordered in an open will.
However, provisions made in favour of the guardian, curator or caregiver who is a relative entitled to succeed shall be valid. ab intestate.
Article 754.
The testator may not dispose of all or part of his or her inheritance in favour of the Notary who authorizes his or her will, or of the spouse, relatives or related persons within the fourth degree, with the exception provided for in Article 682.
This prohibition shall apply to witnesses of the open will, granted with or without a Notary.
The provisions of this article also apply to witnesses and persons before whom special wills are granted.
Article 755.
The testamentary provision in favour of an incompetent person shall be void, even if it is disguised in the form of a onerous contract or made in the name of an interposed person.
Article 756.
They are unable to happen because of indignity:
1. A person who was sentenced by a final judgement for having committed an offence against life or for causing injury or for having habitually exercised physical or mental violence in the family environment to the person responsible, his or her spouse, to whom he or she is associated by similar affectivity or any of his or her descendants or ascendants.
2. A person who is convicted by a final judgement for offences against freedom, moral integrity and sexual freedom and compensation, if the injured person is the cause, his spouse, the person to whom he is associated by similar affection or any of his descendants or ascendants.
Also, a person sentenced by a final sentence to a serious penalty for having committed an offence against the family rights and duties in respect of the inheritance of the aggrieved person.
Also, a person deprived by a final decision of parental authority, or removed from the exercise of the guardianship or foster care of a minor or from the exercise of the guardianship of a person with a disability for reasons attributable to him, in respect of the inheritance of the child.
3. The person who would have accused the perpetrator of an offence for which the law prescribes a serious penalty, if he is convicted of false denunciation.
4. The heir who is of legal age who, knowing of the violent death of the testator, would not have reported it to the courts within a month if the latter had not already proceeded ex officio.
This prohibition shall be lifted in cases where, according to the Law, there is no obligation to charge.
5.o Whoever, with threat, fraud or violence, forces the testator to make a will or change it.
6. The one who by equal means prevents another from making a will, or revokes the one who has made it, or supplants, hides or alters another later.
7th In the case of succession of a person with disabilities, persons entitled to inheritance who have not paid due attention to him or her, in the sense of the provisions of the Articles 142 and 146 of the Civil Code.
Article 757.
The causes of indignity cease to have effect if the testator knew them at the time of making a will, or if he had known them afterwards, he would forward them in public document.
Article 758.
In order to qualify the capacity of the heir or legatee, the time of death of the person in question shall be taken into account.
In cases 2 and 3 of article 756, the final judgement shall be expected to be delivered, and in case 4 or the month indicated for the complaint shall pass.
If the institution or legacy is conditional, the time of the condition shall also be taken care of.
Article 759.
The heir or legatee who dies before the condition is fulfilled, even if he survives the testator, does not transmit any rights to his heirs.
Article 760.
The person unable to succeed, who, contrary to the prohibition of the preceding articles, entered into possession of the estate property, shall be obliged to return it with his accessions and with all the fruits and income he has received.
Article 761.
If the person excluded from the inheritance by disability is the child or descendant of the testator and has children or descendants, they shall acquire their right to the right.
Article 762.
No action can be taken to declare incapacity after five years since the incompetent person is in possession of the inheritance or legacy.
Section 2.a of the institution of heir
Article 763.
A person who has no forced heirs may dispose by will of all his or her property or of part thereof in favour of any person who has the capacity to acquire them.
A person who has forced heirs may dispose of his property only in the manner and with the limitations set out in section 5 of this chapter.
Article 764.
The will shall be valid even if it does not contain an institution of heir, or the institution does not include the totality of the property, and even if the appointed person does not accept the inheritance, or is unable to inherit.
In such cases the testamentary provisions made under the laws shall be complied with, and the remainder of the property shall be transferred to the legitimate heirs.
Article 765.
Incorporated heirs without party designation shall inherit equally.
Article 766.
The voluntary heir who dies before the testator, the incapable of inheriting and the one who renounces the inheritance do not transfer any rights to their heirs, except as provided for in Articles 761 and 857.
Article 767.
The expression of a false cause of the institution of heir or of the appointment of legatee shall be considered as unwritten, unless it appears from the will that the testator would not have made such an institution or legacy if he had known the falsehood of the cause.
The expression of a case contrary to the law, even if true, shall also be regarded as unwritten.
Article 768.
The heir instituted in a certain and determined thing will be considered as legate.
Article 769.
When the testator names some heirs individually and others collectively, as if he were saying: "I institute for my heirs N. and N., and the children of N," those collectively appointed will be considered as if they were individually, unless it is clear that the testator's will has been otherwise.
Article 770.
If the testator establishes his brothers, and has them carnal and father or mother only, the inheritance will be divided as in the case of death intestate.
Article 771.
When the testator calls a person and their children to succession, they will all be understood to be instituted simultaneously and not successively.
Article 772.
The testator shall designate the heir by his first name and surname, and if there are two who have equal names, he shall indicate any circumstances by which the person instituted is known.
Even if the testator has omitted the name of the heir, if he designates it in such a way that it is not possible to doubt who is the instituted one will be worth the institution.
In the will of the adopter the generic expression child or children includes the adopters.
Article 773.
The error in the name, surname or qualities of the heir does not vitiate the institution when otherwise it can certainly be known which person is named.
If there is equality of circumstances between persons of the same name and surname and these are such that they do not allow to distinguish between the instituted, none shall be heir.
Section 3.a Substitution
Article 774.
The testator may substitute one or more persons for the heir or heirs instituted in the event that they die before he or she, or they do not want to, or cannot accept the inheritance.
Simple replacement, without expression of cases, includes the three expressed in the previous paragraph, unless the testator has provided otherwise.
Article 775.
Parents and other ascendants may appoint substitutes for their descendants under the age of fourteen, of both sexes, in the event of their death before that age.
Article 776.
(Deleted)
Take into account the fourth transitional provision of Act 8/2021.
Article 777.
The substitutions referred to in the two preceding articles, where the substitute has forced heirs, shall be valid only as long as they do not prejudice their legal rights.
Article 778.
Two or more persons may be replaced by one; on the contrary, one by two or more heirs.
Article 779.
If the heirs instituted in unequal parts are replaced reciprocally, they will have in the substitution the same parts as in the institution, unless clearly appears to have been another the will of the testator.
Article 780.
The substitute shall be subject to the same charges and conditions imposed on the instituted, unless the testator has expressly provided otherwise, or the charges or conditions are merely personal to the instituted.
Article 781.
The trustees' substitutions by virtue of which the heir retains and transmits to a third party the whole or part of the inheritance, shall be valid and shall take effect as long as they do not exceed the second degree, or are made in favour of persons who live at the time of the death of the testator.
Article 782.
Trustee replacements may never tax the lawful one, except where they are established, in accordance with the terms of Article 808, for the benefit of one or more children of the testator who are in a situation of disability.
If the fiduciary substitution falls on the third intended for improvement, it may be established only in favour of the descendants.
Article 783.
In order to be valid, appeals for trusteeship should be made express.
The trustee shall be obliged to hand over the inheritance to the trustee, without any deductions other than those for legitimate expenses, credits and improvements, except where otherwise provided by the testator.
Article 784.
The trustee will acquire the right to succession from the death of the testator, even if he dies before the trustee.
The right of the latter shall pass to his heirs.
Article 785.
They shall not take effect:
1o Trustary substitutions that are not made in an express way, already giving them this name, already imposing on the substitute the strict obligation to deliver the goods to a second heir.
2. Provisions containing a perpetual prohibition of alienation, and even a temporary prohibition, outside the limit set out in article 781.
3. Those that impose on the heir the order to pay to several persons successively, beyond the second degree, a certain income or pension.
4. Those which are intended to leave a person with the whole or part of the estate property for application or investment according to reserved instructions communicated to him by the testator.
Article 786.
The nullity of the trusteeship shall not prejudice the validity of the institution or the heirs of the first appeal; only the trusteeship clause shall be deemed unwritten.
Article 787.
The arrangement in which the testator leaves one person the whole or part of the inheritance, and another the usufruct, will be valid. If I call several persons to the usufruct not simultaneously, but successively, it shall be in accordance with the provisions of Article 781.
Article 788.
A provision imposing on the heir an obligation to invest certain amounts periodically in charitable works, such as gifts for poor maidens, student or pro-poor pensions or any charitable or public educational establishment, shall be valid under the following conditions:
If the charge is imposed on immovable property and is temporary, the heir or heirs may dispose of the taxed estate, without the lien being suspended, while its registration is not cancelled.
If the burden is perpetual, the heir may capitalize it and impose the capital at interest with first and sufficient mortgage.
Capitalization and imposition of capital will be effected through the intervention of the civilian Governor of the province and with the hearing of the Public Prosecutor's Office.
In any event, where the testator has not established an order for the administration and application of the charity, the administrative authority shall do so to whom it is responsible in accordance with the law.
Article 789.
Everything in this chapter with respect to heirs shall also be deemed to be applicable to legatees.
Section 4.a of the institution of heir and of conditional or term legacy
Article 790.
The testamentary provisions, both universal and individual, may be made on condition.
Article 791.
The conditions imposed on heirs and legates, in so far as this section does not prevent, shall be governed by the rules established for conditional obligations.
Article 792.
The impossible conditions and those contrary to laws or good customs shall be deemed not to be set, and shall in no way prejudice the heir or legatee, even if the testator otherwise provides.
Article 793.
The absolute condition of not entering into first or subsequent marriage shall be deemed not to have been imposed, unless it has been imposed on the widower or widow by his deceased consort or by the ascendants or descendants thereof.
However, you can bequeath to any usufruct, use or room, or a pension or personal benefit, for as long as you remain single or widowed.
Article 794.
The provision made on condition that the heir or legatee makes in his will any provision in favor of the testator or another person shall be void.
Article 795.
The purelypotestative condition imposed on the heir or legatee must be fulfilled by them, once they have heard of it, after the death of the testator.
Except where the condition, already fulfilled, cannot be reiterated.
Article 796.
If the condition is accidental or mixed, it is sufficient that it is carried out or fulfilled at any time, alive or dead, if the testator has not arranged otherwise.
If it had existed or had been fulfilled when the will was made, and the testator ignored it, it will be deemed to have been fulfilled.
If he knew it, it will only be considered fulfilled when it is of such a nature that it can no longer exist or be fulfilled again.
Article 797.
The expression of the object of the institution or legacy, or the application to be given to what is left by the testator, or the burden imposed by the testator, shall not be understood as a condition, unless it appears that this was his will.
This can of course be requested, and it is transmitted to the heirs who strengthen the compliance of the testator with the requirements, and the return of what is perceived with its fruits and interests, if they fail to comply with this obligation.
Article 798.
Where, without the guilt or deed of the heir or legatee, the institution or legacy referred to in the preceding article cannot have effect in the same terms as the testator has ordered, it shall be carried out in others, the more analogous and in accordance with its will.
If the person concerned who is or is not fulfilled prevents his or her performance without the fault or deed of the heir or legatee, the condition shall be deemed to have been fulfilled.
Article 799.
The suspensive condition does not prevent the heir or legatee from acquiring their respective rights and transferring them to their heirs, even before their compliance is verified.
Article 800.
If the possessive condition imposed on the heir or legatee is negative, or not to do or not to give, they will comply with the assurance that they will not do or fail to give what was forbidden by the testator, and that, in the event of a breach, they will return what they perceive with their fruits and interests.
Article 801.
If the heir is instituted under suspensive conditions, the property of the inheritance shall be placed in administration until the condition is fulfilled or there is certainty that it cannot be fulfilled.
The same shall be done where the heir or legatee does not provide the security in the case of the preceding article.
Article 802.
The administration referred to in the preceding article shall be entrusted to the heir or heirs instituted without condition, where there is a right to increase between them and the conditional heir. The same shall apply to legataries.
Article 803.
If the conditional heir does not have joint heirs, or if they have no right to increase among them, he shall enter into the administration, giving bail.
If he does not give it, the administration shall be conferred on the presumed heir, also on bail; and, if neither of them is established, the Tribunals shall appoint a third person, who shall take charge of it, also on bail, which shall be provided with the intervention of the heir.
Article 804.
Managers shall have the same rights and obligations as those of the assets of an absentee.
Article 805.
The designation of the day or time in which the effect of the institution of heir or of the legacy is to begin or cease shall be valid.
In both cases, until the above term arrives, or when the term ends, the legitimate successor shall be deemed to be called. But in the first case, he will not enter into possession of the goods but after providing sufficient security, with the intervention of the instituted.
Section 5.a: Legitimate
Article 806.
Legitimate is the portion of property that the testator cannot dispose of because he has reserved the law for certain heirs, called by this forced heirs.
Article 807.
They are forced heirs:
1. Children and descendants with respect to their parents and ascendants.
2. In the absence of the above, parents and ascendants with respect to their children and descendants.
3. The widower or widower in the form and measure established by this Code.
Article 808.
Two thirds of the hereditary status of the parents is the legal status of the children and descendants.
However, they may have a part of the two that make up the legitimate part, to apply it as an improvement to their children or descendants.
The remaining third shall be freely available.
Where one or more of the legal persons concerned are in a situation of disability, the testator may, in his favour, make the lawful use of the other legal persons without disabilities. In such a case, unless the testator provides otherwise, what is thus received by the beneficiary child shall be subject to a trustee ' s substitution of residue in favour of those who have been affected by its legitimate strictness and shall not dispose of such property free of charge or by act. Mortis cause.
Where the testator has made use of the power granted to him by the preceding paragraph, it shall be the responsibility of the child who contests the imposition of his lawful strictness to prove that he does not have cause to justify it.
Article 809.
Half of the inheritance of children and descendants is lawful for parents or ascendants, except in the case of the widowed spouse of the deceased descendant, in which case it shall be one third of the inheritance.
Article 810.
The rightful one reserved for the parents shall be divided between the two equally; if one of them has died, the entire survivor shall fall.
When the testator does not leave father or mother, but if ascendants, to the same degree, of the paternal and maternal lines, the inheritance will be divided in half between the two lines. If the ascendants are of a different degree, it will correspond entirely to the nearest ones of one line or another.
Article 811.
An ascendant who inherits from his or her descendant property acquired by him or her by a lucrative title of another ascendant, or a brother, is obliged to reserve those which he or she has acquired through the ministry of the law for relatives within the third degree and belonging to the line from which the property originates.
Article 812.
The ascendants happen with the exclusion of other people in the things given by them to their children or descendants dead without posterity, when the same donated objects exist in succession. If they have been alienated, they will occur in all the shares that the donor had in relation to them, and in the price if they have been sold, or in the goods with which they have been replaced, if they have remained or changed them.
Article 813.
The testator may not deprive the heirs of their legitimate rights except in cases expressly determined by law.
It may not impose on it a levy, condition or substitution of any species except as regards the use of the widower and the provisions of Articles 782 and 808.
Article 814.
The preterition of a forced heir does not prejudice the legitimate one. The institution of heir shall be reduced before legacies, improvements and other testamentary provisions.
However, unintentional preterition of children or descendants will have the following effects:
1. If they are all pretered, the testamentary provisions of patrimonial content shall be annulled.
2. In another case, the institution of heirs shall be annulled, but the orders and improvements ordered by any title shall be valid, as soon as they are not innocuous. However, the institution of heir in favour of the spouse shall be annulled only as soon as it prejudices the legitimate ones.
The descendants of another descendant who has not been preterized represent the latter in the inheritance of the ascendant and are not considered preteridae.
If the preterious forced heirs die before the testator, the will will have all its effects.
Except the legitimate ones will have preference in any case what ordered by the tester.
Article 815.
A forced heir who has been left by the testator for any title less than that of his or her own right may request the addition of that title.
Article 816.
Any waiver or compromise on the legitimate future between the one who owes it and its forced heirs is null and void, and they may claim it when the one dies; but they must bring to the fore what they have received for the renunciation or transaction.
Article 817.
The testamentary provisions that diminish the legitimate of the forced heirs shall be reduced, at their request, in so far as they are innocuous or excessive.
Article 818.
The value of the property left to the death of the testator, with deduction of debts and charges, without including those imposed in the will, shall be taken into account in determining the legitimate.
The liquid value of hereditary goods will be added to that of the co-financing donations.
Article 819.
Donations made to children, which do not have the concept of improvements, will be imputed to their legitimate.
Donations made to strangers will be charged to the free party that the testator could have disposed of by his last will.
As soon as they are innocuous or exceed the quota available, they will be reduced according to the rules of the following articles.
Article 820.
The reduction shall be as follows, as determined by the legitimate rule in accordance with the two preceding articles:
1. Donations shall be respected as long as the lawful one may be covered, reducing or nullifying, if necessary, the orders made in will.
2. The reduction of these shall be carried out on a pro rata basis, without distinction of any kind.
If the testator has ordered that a certain legacy be paid in preference to others, he shall not suffer such reduction except after they have been fully applied to the payment of the legitimate one.
3. If the order consists of a usufruct or income for life, the value of which is higher than the available part, the forced heirs may choose between fulfilling the testamentary provision or handing over to the legator the part of the inheritance that the testator could freely dispose of.
Article 821.
When the legacy subject to reduction consists of a property that does not accept comfortable division, it will remain for the legaterio if the reduction does not absorb half of its value, and if not for the forced heirs; but the latter and these must be paid their respective money.
The legatee who is entitled to the right may retain the entire estate, provided that its value does not exceed the amount of the available portion and the quota corresponding to it as legitimate.
If the heirs or legatees do not want to use the right granted to them in this article, the estate will be sold in public auction, at the request of any interested party.
Article 822.
The donation or legacy of a right of habitation over the habitual dwelling made by the owner in favour of a legal person who is in a situation of disability, shall not be counted for the calculation of the legitimates if at the time of death both are living together in it.
This right of accommodation shall be attributed by the Ministry of the Law under the same conditions to the legal person who is in the situation provided for in the preceding paragraph, who needs it and who is living together with the deceased, unless the testator has provided otherwise or expressly excluded it, but the holder may not prevent the other legal persons from continuing to live together as long as they need it.
The right referred to in the preceding two paragraphs shall be intransmissible.
The provisions of the first two paragraphs shall not prevent the spouse from being granted the rights set out in articles 1406 and 1407 of this Code, which shall coexist with that of a dwelling.
Section 6.a. Improvements
Article 823.
The father or mother may arrange for an improvement in favour of one or more of his children or descendants, either by nature or by adoption, of one of the two thirds intended for legitimate purposes.
Article 824.
No other charges may be imposed on the improvement than those imposed on legal persons or their descendants.
Article 825.
No donation by contract between living persons, whether simple or for onerous reasons, in favour of children or descendants, who are forced heirs, will be recognized for improvement, if the donor has not expressly declared its willingness to improve.
Article 826.
The promise to improve or not to improve, made by public writing in marriage capitulations, will be valid.
The tester's disposition contrary to the promise will have no effect.
Article 827.
The improvement, even if it has been verified with the delivery of goods, will be revocable, unless it has been made by marriage capitulations or by onerous contract concluded with a third party.
Article 828.
The testator sends it to one of the children or descendants only when the testator has expressly declared that this is his will, or when it does not fit in the free part.
Article 829.
The improvement may be indicated in a particular way. If the value of the upgrade exceeds the third for improvement and the legitimate part of the improvement, the improvement shall pay the difference in cash to the other interested parties.
Article 830.
The power to improve cannot be entrusted to another.
Article 831.
1. Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, the spouses may be empowered in will to make improvements in favour of the children or common descendants, if the testator has died, even from the third freely available and, in general, awards or attributions of specific property by any title or concept of succession or partitions, including those for which the property of the dissolved conjugal company is unliquidated.
These improvements, awards or privileges may be made by the spouse in one or more acts, simultaneously or successively. If he has not been given the power to do so in his own will or has not been given a period of time, he shall have two years from the opening of the succession or, where appropriate, from the emancipation of the last of the common children.
The provisions of the spouse which have specific and determined property, in addition to conferring ownership on the favored child or descendant, shall also confer possession on him/her by reason of acceptance, unless otherwise provided for therein.
2. The surviving spouse shall be responsible for the administration of the property over which the powers referred to in the preceding paragraph are suspended.
3. The spouse, in exercising his or her mandated powers, shall respect the legitimate strictness of the common descendants and the improvements and other provisions of the deceased in favour of them.
Failure to respect the legitimate strictness of any common descendant or the share in the property ordered by the deceased in his favour may result in the injured party requesting that the actions of the spouse be rescinded as soon as necessary to satisfy the injured interest.
The provisions of the deceased in favour of the common and legitimate children or descendants shall be deemed to be respected if either of them is sufficiently satisfied, even if in whole or in part they have been satisfied with property belonging only to the spouse exercising the powers.
4. The granting of the said powers to the spouse shall not alter the regime of legitimate powers or the provisions of the deceased, if the person favoured by either of them is not a common descendant. In such a case, a spouse who is not a direct relative of the person concerned shall have the power to act on behalf of the common descendants in the acts of execution or award relating to such legitimate provisions.
Where a descendant other than the surviving spouse has suffered unintentional preteritation in the inheritance of the pre-dead, the exercise of the powers conferred on the spouse may not impair the part of the preteritious spouse.
5. The powers conferred on the spouse shall cease as soon as he or she has entered into subsequent marriage or similar de facto relationship or has had an unusual child, unless the testator has provided otherwise.
6. The provisions of the preceding paragraphs shall also apply where persons of common descent are not married to each other.
Article 832.
Where the improvement has not been specified in a given thing, it shall be paid with the same estate property, observing, as soon as possible, the rules set out in articles 1,061 and 1,062 to ensure equality of heirs in the partition of property.
Article 833.
An improved child or descendant may renounce inheritance and accept improvement.
Section 7.a. Rights of the widowed spouse
Article 834.
A spouse whose spouse dies is not legally or de facto separated from the spouse, if he or she is in possession of children or descendants, shall be entitled to the benefit of the third intended for improvement.
Article 835.
If the separated spouses have been notified of reconciliation to the court hearing the separation or to the Notary who granted the public deed of separation in accordance with article 84 of this Code, the survivor shall retain his rights.
Article 836.
(Deleted)
Article 837.
There are no descendants, but ascendants, the surviving spouse will be entitled to the usufruct of half the inheritance.
Article 838.
No descendants or ascendants exist, the surviving spouse shall be entitled to the use of two thirds of the inheritance.
Article 839.
The heirs may satisfy the spouse of their share of usufruct, assigning him a lifetime income, the products of certain goods, or a cash capital, proceeding by mutual agreement and, failing that, by virtue of a court order.
As long as this is not done, all the property of the inheritance will be attached to the payment of the part of usufruct corresponding to the spouse.
Article 840.
Where the widowed spouse has children only from the deceased, he may require that his right of usufruct be satisfied, at the choice of the children, by allocating to him money capital or a lot of inheritance property.
Section 8.a Payment of inheritance portion in special cases
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 841.
The testator, or the meter-party expressly authorized by him, may award all or part of the estate property to any of the children or descendants by ordering that the hereditary portion of the other legal persons be paid in cash.
The right to pay in cash shall also be conferred in the same case as in the preceding paragraph on the disputing accountant referred to in the Article 1,057 of the Civil Code.
Article 842.
Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, any of the children or descendants obliged to pay in cash the inheritance quota of their siblings may require that such quota be paid in inheritance property, and in such a case, the provisions of articles 1,058 to 1,063 of this Code should be observed.
Article 843.
Unless express confirmation of all children or descendants, the partition referred to in the two preceding articles shall require approval by the judicial secretary or notary.
Article 844.
The decision to pay in cash shall not have effect unless the recipients are notified within one year of the commencement of the succession. Payment must be made within another year unless otherwise agreed. The recipient of the quantity shall bear the legal guarantees established for the legateur of the quantity.
After the period has elapsed without payment, the power conferred on the children or descendants by the testator or the meter-party will expire and the inheritance will be distributed according to the general provisions on partition.
Article 845.
The option dealt with in previous articles will not affect the legacies of specific thing.
Article 846.
Nor will it affect the partitional provisions of the tester indicated in particular things.
Article 847.
In fixing the amount to be paid to children or descendants, the value of the property shall be taken into account at the time of settlement of the portion, taking into account the fruits or income produced until then. Since the liquidation, the cash credit will be in the legal interest.
Section 9.a on disinheritment
Article 848.
Disinheritment may take place only on one of the grounds expressly stated by law.
Article 849.
Disinheritment can only be done in a will, expressing in it the legal cause in which it is founded.
Article 850.
The proof that the cause of the disinheritment is true will be the heirs of the testator if the disinherited person denies it.
Article 851.
Disinheritment made without the expression of cause, or for a reason whose certainty, if contradicted, is not proved, or which is not one of those indicated in the following four articles, shall nullify the institution of heir as soon as it prejudices the disinherited one; but legacies, improvements and other testamentary provisions shall be valid in so far as they do not prejudice that legitimate one.
Article 852.
They are just causes for disinheritment, in the terms specifically determined by articles eight hundred fifty-three, eight hundred fifty-four and eight hundred fifty-five, those of indignity inability to succeed, as indicated in article seven hundred fifty-six with numbers one, two, three, five and six.
Written according to the bug correction published in BOE No. 144, 17 June 1978. Ref. BOE-A-1978-15063.
Article 853.
There shall also be just causes for disinheriting children and descendants, in addition to those referred to in Article 756 with numbers 2, 3, 5 and 6, the following:
1. To have denied, for no legitimate reason, maintenance to the father or ascendant who disinherits him.
2. To have mistreated him of deed or seriously insulted him by word of mouth.
Written according to the bug correction published in BOE No. 144, 17 June 1978. Ref. BOE-A-1978-15063.
Article 854.
There shall be just grounds for disinheriting parents and ascendants, in addition to those referred to in article 756 with numbers 1, 2, 3, 5 and 6, the following:
1. To have lost parental authority for the reasons set forth in article 170.
2. To have denied food to their children or descendants for no legitimate reason.
3. To have attacked one of the parents against the life of the other, had there not been reconciliation between them.
Written according to the bug correction published in BOE No. 144, 17 June 1978. Ref. BOE-A-1978-15063.
Article 855.
There shall be just grounds for disinheriting the spouse, in addition to those referred to in Article 756 with the following numbers 2nd, 3rd, 5th and 6th:
1. To have seriously or repeatedly failed to perform marital duties.
2.a. Those which give rise to the loss of parental authority, in accordance with article 170.
3.a Denied maintenance to children or to the other spouse.
4. To have committed an offence against the life of the witness spouse, if he has not made reconciliation.
Article 856.
The subsequent reconciliation of the offender and the offended deprives him of the right to disinherit, and renders null and void the disinheritment already done.
Article 857.
The children or descendants of the disinherited shall take their place and retain the rights of forced heirs with respect to the lawful heir.
Section 10.a of the Commands and legacies
Article 858.
The testator may tax not only his heir, but also the legatees with commands and legates.
They will not be obliged to answer for the lien until they reach the value of the legacy.
Article 859.
When the testator seriously with a legacy to one of the heirs, he will only be bound to his fulfillment.
If you do not tax any particular person, they will all be bound to the same extent as they are heirs.
Article 860.
The person liable for the delivery of the legacy shall be liable in the event of an eviction, if the thing is undetermined and is indicated only by genus or species.
Article 861.
The legacy of something foreign if the testator, by legating it, knew it was, is valid. The heir shall be obliged to acquire it in order to give it to the legateur; and, not being able to do so, to give it its fair estimate.
The proof that the testator knew that the thing was foreign belongs to the legateur.
Article 862.
If the testator knew that the thing he bequeathed was foreign, the legacy will be null and void.
But it will be valid if you acquire it after the will has been granted.
Article 863.
The legacy made to a third party of a thing proper to the heir or a legatee shall be valid, who, upon accepting the succession, shall deliver the legate thing or its fair estimate, subject to the limitation set out in the following article.
The provisions of the preceding paragraph are without prejudice to the legitimate rights of the forced heirs.
Article 864.
Where the testator, heir or legatee has only one part or one right in the legate, the legacy to this part or right shall be deemed to be limited, unless the testator expressly declares that the whole legate is legible.
Article 865.
The legacy of things outside trade is null and void.
Article 866.
There will be no effect on the legacy of anything that at the time of making the will was already the legateur's own, even if it had some other right in it.
If the testator expressly provides that the thing is released from this right or lien, the legacy will be worth in this regard.
Article 867.
When the testator legates a thing committed or mortgaged for the security of some debt due, the payment of it will be left to the heir.
If the heir fails to pay, the legatee shall be subrogated in the place and rights of the creditor to claim against the heir.
Any other perpetual or temporary burden, to which it is found affects the legate thing, passes with it to the legaterio; but in both cases the rents and the interest or revenues earned until the death of the testator are the burden of inheritance.
Article 868.
If the legate is subject to usufruct, use or room, the legatee shall respect these rights until they are legally extinguished.
Article 869.
The legacy shall be null and void:
1. If the testator transforms the legit thing, so that it does not retain either the form or the denomination it had.
2. If the testator alienates, by any title or cause, the legated thing or part of it, it being understood in the latter case that the legacy is not effective only with respect to the alienated party. If after the alienation the thing returns to the domain of the testator, even if it is because of the nullity of the contract, it will not after this fact have the force of the legacy, except in the case in which the repurchase is verified by reverse sale agreement.
3. If the legate thing perishes at all living the testator or after his death without the guilt of the heir. However, the person liable to pay the legacy shall be liable for an eviction, if the legated thing has not been determined in kind, as provided for in Article 860.
Article 870.
The legacy of a credit against a third party, or of forgiveness or release of a debt of the legatee, shall take effect only on the portion of the credit or the remaining debt at the time of the death of the testator.
In the first case, the heir shall have the right to assign to the legatee all actions that might compete against the debtor.
In the second, to give the legateur a letter of payment, if requested.
In both cases, the legacy shall include interest due on credit or debt upon the death of the testator.
Article 871.
The legacy referred to in the preceding article lapses if the testator, after having done so, sues the debtor for payment of his debt, even if the debt has not been incurred at the time of death.
A legacy to the debtor of the committed thing means only the right to pledge.
Article 872.
The generic legacy of debt release or forgiveness includes those existing at the time of making the will, not subsequent ones.
Article 873.
A legacy made to a creditor shall not be imputed in payment of its claim, unless the testator expressly declares it.
In this case, the creditor shall be entitled to collect the excess of the receivable or legacy.
Article 874.
In the alternative legacies, the provisions for the obligations of the same species will be observed, saving the modifications that result from the express will of the testator.
Article 875.
The legacy of a generic piece of furniture will be valid even if there are no things of its kind in the inheritance.
The legacy of an undetermined property shall be valid only if it is of its kind in the inheritance.
The choice shall be made by the heir, who shall give a thing which is not of the inferior or superior quality.
Article 876.
Whenever the testator expressly leaves the choice to the heir or legatee, the first may give, or the second choose, what they think best.
Article 877.
If the heir or legatee cannot make the choice in the event of having been granted it, it shall pass its right to the heirs; but, once the election has been made, it shall be irrevocable.
Article 878.
If the legate was the legate's own at the date of the will, it is not worth the legacy, even if it has been later alienated.
If the legateur has acquired it for a profit after that date, nothing can ask for it; but if the acquisition has been made for a consideration, he may ask the heir to compensate him for what he has given to acquire it.
Article 879.
The legacy of education lasts until the legatee is of legal age.
Food lasts for as long as the legatee lives, if the tester has no other choice.
If the testator has not indicated any amount for these legacies, it shall be determined according to the status and condition of the legacies and the amount of the inheritance.
If the testator has become accustomed to giving the legatee a certain amount of money or other things by way of food, the same amount shall be understood to be legated, if it does not result in a noticeable disproportion with the amount of the inheritance.
Article 880.
A regular pension or a certain annual, monthly or weekly amount may be required by the legatee for the first period, so that the testator dies, and the following in the beginning of each of them, without the possibility of repayment even if the legatee dies before the end of the period begun.
Article 881.
The legatee acquires the right to pure and simple legacies since the death of the testator, and transmits it to his heirs.
Article 882.
When the legacy is specific and determined, proper to the testator, the legator acquires his property since he dies, and makes his own the outstanding fruits or rents, but not the accrued and unsatisfied income before death.
The legated thing will run from the same moment at the risk of the legatee, which will therefore suffer its loss or deterioration, as well as take advantage of its increase or improvement.
Article 883.
The legated thing must be delivered with all its accessories and in the state in which it is found at the death of the testator.
Article 884.
If the legacy is not specific and determined, but generic or quantity, its fruits and interests since the death of the testator shall correspond to the legateur when the testator has expressly provided for it.
Article 885.
The legatee may not occupy by his own authority the legate thing, but must request its delivery and possession to the heir or executor, when he is authorized to give it.
Article 886.
The heir must give the same legit thing, being able to do so, and does not comply with his estimation.
Money legacies must be paid for in this species, even if there is not in the inheritance.
The expenses necessary for the delivery of the legated thing shall be borne by the inheritance, but without prejudice to the legitimate.
Article 887.
If the assets of the inheritance do not reach to cover all legacies, the payment shall be made in the following order:
1st Remuneratory legacies.
2. The legacies of certain and determined thing, which is part of the hereditary wealth.
3.o The legacies that the testator has declared preferential.
4. Food.
5th Education.
6.o The others pro rata.
Article 888.
Where the legatee is unable or unwilling to admit the legacy, or the legacy, for any reason, has no effect, it shall be recast into the estate, outside the cases of substitution and the right to increase.
Article 889.
The legatee may not accept part of the legacy and repudiate the other part, if it is onerous.
If he died before accepting the legacy leaving several heirs, one of them may accept and another repudiate the part of the legacy that corresponds to him.
Article 890.
The legatee of two legates, of which one is expensive, may not renounce it and accept the other. If both are expensive or free, you are free to accept them all or repudiate anyone you want.
An heir who is a legate may renounce the inheritance and accept the legacy, or renounce it and accept it.
Article 891.
If the entire inheritance is distributed in legacies, the debts and levies of it will be apportioned among the legacies in proportion to their quotas, unless the testator had arranged otherwise.
Section 11.a. Of executors or testamentians
Article 892.
The testator may appoint one or more executors.
Article 893.
A person who has no capacity to be compelled shall not be executor.
The child may not be a child, even with the permission of the father or guardian.
Article 894.
The executor can be universal or particular.
In any case, executors may be appointed jointly, successively or jointly.
Article 895.
When the executors are pooled, it will only be worth what everyone does together, or what one of them does legally authorized by others, or what, in the event of dissent, agrees the highest number.
Article 896.
In cases of extreme urgency, one of the joint executors may perform, under his personal responsibility, such acts as may be necessary, giving immediate account to the others.
Article 897.
If the testator does not clearly establish the solidarity of the executors, nor does he fix the order in which they must carry out their assignment, they shall be jointly appointed and shall hold office as prevented by the two preceding articles.
Article 898.
The albaceazgo is a voluntary position, and shall be deemed to be accepted by the appointed person to perform it if he does not excuse himself within six days of the day on which he is informed of his appointment, or, if he was already known to him, within six days of the day on which he learned of the death of the testator.
Article 899.
The executor who accepts the position is obliged to perform it, but may resign on the basis of just cause at the discretion of the judicial secretary or notary.
Article 900.
The executor who does not accept the charge, or resigns it without just cause, will lose what the testator would have left him, save always the right that he had to the legitimate one.
Article 901.
The executors shall have all the powers expressly conferred upon them by the testator and shall not be contrary to the law.
Article 902.
The following shall not be the powers of the executors having been specially determined by the testator:
1. To arrange and pay the suffrages and the funeral of the testator in accordance with his will; and, failing that, according to the custom of the people.
2.a Satisfy legacies consisting of cash, with the knowledge and approval of the heir.
3.a To monitor the execution of all else ordered in the will, and to uphold, being just, its validity in judgment and outside it.
4.a Take the necessary precautions for the preservation and custody of the property, with the intervention of the heirs present.
Article 903.
If there is not enough money in the inheritance for the payment of funerals and legacies, and the heirs do not approve of their own, the executors will promote the sale of the movable property; and not reaching these, that of the real estate, with the intervention of the heirs.
If any minor, absentee, corporation or public establishment is interested in the inheritance, the sale of the property shall be effected in accordance with the formalities prescribed by law in such cases.
Article 904.
The executor, to whom the testator has not set a time limit, shall carry out his task within one year, counted from his acceptance, or from the end of the disputes that are promoted on the validity or nullity of the will or some of its provisions.
Article 905.
If the testator wishes to extend the legal period, he must expressly indicate the extension period. If it has not indicated this, the period shall be deemed to have been extended by one year. If, after this extension, the testator ' s will has not yet been fulfilled, the judicial secretary or notary may grant another for such time as is necessary, taking into account the circumstances of the case.
Article 906.
The heirs and legatees may, by mutual agreement, extend the term of the executor for as long as they deem necessary; but, if the agreement is only by majority, the extension may not exceed one year.
Article 907.
The executors shall report their commission to the heirs.
If they have been appointed not to hand over the property to particular heirs, but to give them the investment or distribution that the testator would have arranged in the cases permitted by law, they shall render their accounts to the Judge.
Any provision of the tester contrary to this article shall be void.
Article 908.
The albaceazgo is a free charge. The testator may, however, indicate to the executors the remuneration it deems appropriate; all without prejudice to the right of them to collect their dues for partition work or other optional work.
If the testator jointly gives or points out to the executors any retribution, the part of those who do not admit the position shall increase to those who perform it.
Article 909.
The executor may not delegate the post unless the testator has expressly authorized it.
Article 910.
The executor ends by the death, impossibility, renunciation or removal of the executor, and by the time the term indicated by the testator, by the law and, where appropriate, by those concerned. The removal shall be appreciated by the judge.
Article 911.
In the cases of the previous article, and in the case of the not having the executor accepted the charge, the heirs shall be responsible for the execution of the will of the testator.
CHAPTER III
Intestate succession
Section 1.a General provisions
Article 912.
Legitimate succession takes place:
1o When one dies without a will, or with a null will, or has later lost its validity.
2. When the will does not contain an institution of heir in whole or in part of the property or does not have all that correspond to the testator. In this case, the legitimate succession shall take place only in respect of property which it had not disposed of.
3. When the condition placed on the institution of the heir is missing, or the heir dies before the testator, or repudiates the inheritance without having a substitute and without the right to increase.
4. When the instituted heir is unable to succeed.
Article 913.
In the absence of testamentary heirs, the law defers the relatives of the deceased, the widower or widow and the State.
Article 914.
The provisions on incapacity to succeed by will apply equally to intestate succession.
Article 914 bis.
In the absence of a testamentary provision concerning the pet animals owned by the deceased, they shall be handed over to the heirs or legatees who claim them in accordance with the laws.
If it is not possible to do so immediately, in order to ensure the care of the pet and only when necessary for lack of provision of care, shall be handed over to the administrative body or centre entrusted with the collection of abandoned animals until the corresponding procedures are resolved by reason of succession.
If none of the successors wishes to take over the pet, the competent administrative body may assign it to a third party for care and protection.
If more than one heir claims the pet and there is no unanimous agreement on its fate, the judicial authority will decide its fate taking into account the animal's welfare.
Text added, published on 16/12/2021, in force from 05/01/2022.
Section 2.a About kinship
Article 915.
The proximity of the kinship is determined by the number of generations. Each generation forms a degree.
Article 916.
The range of degrees forms the line, which can be direct or collateral.
It is called direct the series of degrees between people who descend from each other.
And collateral is constituted by the series of degrees between people who do not descend from each other, but who come from a common trunk.
Article 917.
The straight line in descending and ascending is distinguished.
The first unites the head of the family with those who descend from him.
The second league to a person with those from whom he descends.
Article 918.
The lines count as many degrees as generations or as people, discounting that of the parent.
On the straight line you climb only to the trunk. Thus, the son is far from the father one degree, two from the grandfather and three from the great-grandfather.
In the collateral one climbs to the common trunk and then goes down to the person with whom the computation is done. For this reason, the brother is two degrees from the brother, three from the uncle, brother from his father or mother, four from the cousin brother and so on.
Article 919.
The calculation referred to in the preceding article applies in all matters.
Article 920.
Call it a double bond to kinship on the part of the father and mother together.
Article 921.
In inheritances, the closest relative in degree excludes the most remote, except the right of representation in cases where it should take place.
Relatives of the same rank shall inherit equally, except as provided for in article 949 on dual ties.
Article 922.
If there are several relatives of the same degree, and some or some do not wish or may not succeed, their share shall be increased to the others of the same degree, except the right of representation when it must take place.
Article 923.
By repudiating the inheritance, the nearest relative, if it is alone, or, if there are several, all the nearest relatives called by law will inherit those of the next degree by their own right and without being able to represent the repudiant.
Section 3.a of the Representation
Article 924.
Call it the right of representation that a person's relatives have to succeed him in all the rights he would have had if he lived or could have inherited.
Article 925.
The right of representation will always take place in the descending straight line, but never in the ascending line.
In the collateral line it will only take place in favor of the children of brothers, either of double bond, or of one side.
Article 926.
Whenever inherited by representation, the division of the inheritance shall be made by means of strains, so that the representative or representatives do not inherit more than their representative would inherit, if he lived.
Article 927.
Remaining children of one or more brothers of the deceased, they will inherit him by representation if they come with their uncles. But if they come alone, they will inherit equally.
Article 928.
The right to represent a person is not forfeited because of his/her renunciation of his/her inheritance.
Article 929.
A living person may not be represented except in cases of disinheritment or incapacity.
CHAPTER IV
In order to happen according to the diversity of lines
Section 1.a From the descending straight line
Article 930.
The succession corresponds first to the descending straight line.
Article 931.
Children and their descendants succeed their parents and other ascendants regardless of sex, age or filiation.
Article 932.
The children of the deceased will always inherit him in their own right, dividing the inheritance equally.
Article 933.
Grandchildren and other descendants shall inherit by right of representation, and, if any one has died leaving several heirs, the portion thereof shall be divided equally among them.
Article 934.
If there are children and descendants of other children who have died, the former shall inherit in their own right, and the latter shall inherit in their own right of representation.
Section 2.a From the ascending straight line
Article 935.
In the absence of children and descendants of the deceased, his ascendants will inherit him.
Article 936.
The father and mother will inherit equally.
Article 937.
In the event that one parent survives, he will succeed the child in all his inheritance.
Article 938.
In the absence of father and mother will succeed the nearest ascendants in degree.
Article 939.
If there are several ascendants of the same degree belonging to the same line, they shall divide the inheritance by heads.
Article 940.
If the ascendants are of different lines, but of equal degree, half will correspond to the paternal ascendants and the other half to the maternal ascendants.
Article 941.
In each line the division will be made by heads.
Article 942.
The provisions of this Section are without prejudice to the provisions of Articles 811 and 812, which apply to intestate succession and testamentary succession.
Section 3.a Succession of spouse and collateral
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 943.
In the absence of the persons covered by the two sections above, the spouse and collateral relatives shall inherit in the order set out in the following articles.
Article 944.
In the absence of ascendants and descendants, and before collateral, the surviving spouse will succeed in all the property of the deceased.
Article 945.
The appeal referred to in the preceding article shall not take place if the spouse is legally or de facto separated.
Article 946.
Brothers and children of brothers are preferred to other collaterals.
Article 947.
If there were only brothers of double bond, they would inherit equally.
Article 948.
If brothers with nephews, sons of double bonded brothers, the former will inherit by heads and the latter by strains.
Article 949.
If there are brothers of father and mother with half brothers, they will take double portions of the inheritance.
Article 950.
In the event that there are but half brothers, some on the part of the father and others on the part of the mother, they will inherit all equally, without any distinction of property.
Article 951.
The children of the half brothers will succeed by heads or by lineage, according to the rules established for the two - bonded brothers.
Article 952.
(Deleted)
Article 953.
(Deleted)
Article 954.
No surviving spouse, brothers or children of brothers, will succeed in the inheritance of the deceased the other relatives of the deceased in a collateral line until the fourth degree, beyond which the right to inherit abintestate does not extend.
Article 955.
The succession of these collaterals shall be verified without distinction of lines or preference between them on the basis of the double link.
Section 4.a State succession
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 956.
In the absence of persons entitled to inherit in accordance with the preceding sections, the State shall inherit who, having completed the liquidation of the estate, shall enter the resulting amount into the Public Treasury, unless, by reason of the nature of the assets inherited, the Council of Ministers agrees to give them, in whole or in part, another application. Two thirds of the value of this relict will be allocated for social interest purposes, and will be added to the tax allocation made for these purposes in the General Budgets of the State.
Article 957.
The rights and obligations of the State shall be the same as those of the other heirs, but the inheritance shall always be deemed to be accepted for inventory benefit, without the need for any declaration thereof, for the purposes listed in article 1023.
Article 958.
In order for the State to take possession of the property and hereditary rights, it must precede the administrative declaration of the heir, the assets being awarded for lack of legitimate heirs.
CHAPTER V
Provisions common to inheritances by or without a will
Section 1.a. Precautions to be taken when the widow is pregnant
Article 958 bis.
All references made to the widow in this section shall be deemed to be made to the widow or to the surviving pregnant spouse.
Text added, published on 01/03/2023, in force from 02/03/2023.
Article 959.
When the widow believes that she has become pregnant, she must inform those who have a right to inheritance of such a nature as to disappear or diminish by the birth of the posthumous.
Article 960.
Those concerned referred to in the preceding article may request the municipal or first instance judge, where appropriate, to issue appropriate orders to prevent the presumption of childbirth, or that the child born should be considered viable, not in fact.
The judge shall ensure that the measures he prescribes do not attack the modesty or the freedom of the widow.
Article 961.
Whether or not to give the notice referred to in article 959, as the time of childbirth approaches, the widow must inform the same persons concerned. They shall have the right to appoint a person of their confidence who shall ascertain the reality of the birth.
If the designated person is rejected by the patient, the judge shall make the appointment, the latter being to become a physician or a woman.
Article 962.
The omission of these measures alone is not sufficient to demonstrate the birth's assumption of birth or the lack of viability.
Article 963.
Where the husband has recognized in public or private documents the certainty of his wife's pregnancy, he shall be exempt from giving the notice provided for in article 959, but shall be subject to compliance with the provisions of 961.
Article 964.
A widow who is pregnant, even if she is rich, must be fed inheritance property, taking into account the part of the widow who may have the posthumous if she is born and is viable.
Article 965.
As long as it takes until the birth is verified, or the certainty is acquired that it will not take place, already because abortion has occurred, already because the maximum term for pregnancy has been exceeded, the security and administration of the property will be provided in the manner established for the necessary judgment of testamentary.
Article 966.
The division of the inheritance will be suspended until the birth or abortion is verified, or as a result of the length of time the widow was not pregnant.
However, the administrator may pay creditors, subject to a court order.
Article 967.
Once the birth or abortion has been verified, or after the end of the pregnancy, the administrator of the estate property ceases to carry out his or her assignment and shall report his or her performance to the heirs or their legitimate representatives.
Section 2.a. Assets subject to reserve
Article 968.
In addition to the reservation imposed in article 811, a widower who enters into a second marriage is obliged to reserve to the children and descendants of the former the ownership of all the property he has acquired from his deceased consort by will, by intestate succession, donation or any other gainful title; but not his half of the gain.
Article 969.
The provision of the preceding article applies to property acquired by the widower or widow of any of the children of his first marriage and that of the relatives of the deceased for consideration.
Article 970.
The obligation to reserve shall cease when the children of a marriage, who are of legal age, are entitled to property, expressly renounce it, or when it is a matter of things given or left by the children to their father or mother, knowing that they were married twice.
Article 971.
The reservation will also be terminated if at the death of the father or mother who entered into the second marriage there are no children or descendants of the former.
Article 972.
Notwithstanding the obligation to reserve, the second married father or mother may, in accordance with article 823, improve in the property reserved for any of the children or descendants of the first marriage.
Article 973.
If the father or mother has not used, in whole or in part, the power conferred upon him by the preceding article, the children and descendants of the first marriage shall succeed in the property subject to reservation, in accordance with the prescribed rules for descending succession, even if by virtue of a will they had unequally inherited the pre-dead spouse or had disowned his inheritance.
The child disinherited by the father or the mother shall lose any right to the reservation, but if he or she has children or descendants, he or she shall be subject to the provisions of articles 857 and 164 (2).
Article 974.
The dispositions of the real property reserved by the surviving spouse prior to the second wedding shall be valid, with the obligation, since the marriage, to ensure the value of those property to the children and descendants of the first marriage.
Article 975.
The alienation of the immovable property subject to reservation by the widower or widow after entering into second marriage shall continue only if there are no children or descendants of the widower at the time of his death, without prejudice to the provisions of the Convention on the Rights of the Child. Mortgage Act.
Article 976.
Disposals of movable property made before or after the second marriage shall be valid, always saves the obligation to compensate.
Article 977.
The widower or widow, upon remarriage, shall make inventory of all property subject to reservation, and shall record in the Register of Property the reservable status of the property in accordance with the provisions of the Mortgage Act and value the furniture.
Article 978.
In addition, the widower or widow shall be obliged, when remarrying, to secure by mortgage:
1. The restitution of movable property not alienated in the state that they had at the time of their death.
2. The payment of damage caused or caused by his fault or negligence.
3. The refund of the price received for the alienated movable property or the delivery of the value they had at the time of disposal, if it had been made free of charge.
4. The value of validly alienated immovable property.
Article 979.
The provisions of the previous articles for the second marriage also apply to the third and subsequent marriage.
Article 980.
The reservation obligation imposed in the preceding articles shall also apply:
1. A widower who during the marriage has had or is widowed has a non-marital child.
2. The widower who adopts another person. Except for the fact that the adopted person is the child of the consort from whom those who would be reserve are descended.
This obligation to reserve shall take effect, respectively, from the birth or adoption of the child.
Section 3.a On the right to increase
Article 981.
In legitimate successions the part of which repudiates the inheritance will always increase to the joint heirs.
Article 982.
In order for the right to increase in the testamentary succession to take place, it is required:
1. That two or more are called to the same inheritance, or to the same portion thereof, without special designation of parties.
2. That one of the called ones dies before the testator, or renounces the inheritance, or is unable to receive it.
Article 983.
A party designation shall be deemed to be made only if the testator has expressly determined a quota for each heir.
The phrase ‘half or equal parts’ or others which, even if they designate an aliquot part, do not fix it numerically or by signs which make each owner of a separate body of property, do not exclude the right to increase.
Article 984.
The heirs to whom the inheritance extends will succeed in all the rights and obligations of the one who did not or could not receive it.
Article 985.
Among the forced heirs, the right to increase will only take place when the part of free disposition is left to two or more of them, or to one of them and to a stranger.
If the disowned party is lawful, the joint heirs shall succeed in it in their own right, and not in the right to increase.
Article 986.
In the testamentary succession, when the right to increase does not take place, the vacant portion of the instituted, to whom no substitute has been appointed, shall pass to the legitimate heirs of the testator, who shall receive it with the same burdens and obligations.
Article 987.
The right to increase shall also take place between legatees and usufructaires in the terms established for the heirs.
Section 4.a. Acceptance and repudiation of inheritance
Article 988.
Acceptance and repudiation of inheritance are entirely voluntary and free acts.
Article 989.
The effects of acceptance and repudiation are always reversed at the time of the death of the person to whom it is inherited.
Article 990.
The acceptance or repudiation of the inheritance may not be made in part, in time, or conditionally.
Article 991.
No one may accept or repudiate without being certain of the death of the person to whom he or she is to inherit and of his or her right to inheritance.
Article 992.
All those who have the free disposition of their property can accept or repudiate an inheritance.
The acceptance of which is left to the poor shall be by the persons designated by the testator to qualify and distribute the goods, and in the absence of those referred to in article 749, and shall be deemed to be accepted for inventory benefit.
Article 993.
Legitimate representatives of associations, corporations and foundations capable of acquiring may accept the inheritance left to them; but to repudiate it they need judicial approval, with a hearing from the Public Ministry.
Article 994.
Official public establishments may not accept or repudiate inheritance without the approval of the Government.
Article 995.
Where the inheritance is accepted without inventory benefit, by a married person and the other spouse is not present, giving his consent to acceptance, the property of the conjugal society shall not be liable for the hereditary debts.
Article 996.
The acceptance of inheritance by the disabled person shall be provided by the disabled person, unless otherwise provided by the support measures in place.
Article 997.
The acceptance and repudiation of the inheritance, once made, are irrevocable, and may not be challenged except when they suffer from some of the vices that nullify the consent, or an unknown will appears.
Article 998.
The inheritance may be accepted purely and simply or for inventory benefit.
Article 999.
Pure and simple acceptance can be express or tacit.
It is expressed in public or private documents.
It is Tacite that is done by acts that necessarily imply the will to accept, or that there would be no right to execute but with the quality of heir.
Acts of mere preservation or provisional administration do not imply acceptance of the inheritance, if the title or the quality of heir has not been taken with them.
Article 1000.
Understand that the inheritance is accepted:
1. When the heir sells, donates or gives away his right to a stranger, to all his joint heirs or to any of them.
2. When the heir renounces it, even free of charge, for the benefit of one or more of his joint heirs.
3. When he renounces it by price in favour of all his joint heirs interchangeably; but if this renunciation is free and the joint heirs for whose favor it is done are those to whom the renounced portion should be increased, the inheritance shall not be deemed accepted.
Article 1001.
If the heir repudiates the inheritance to the detriment of its own creditors, they may ask the judge to authorize them to accept it on its behalf.
The acceptance will only take advantage of creditors as soon as it is sufficient to cover the amount of their claims. The excess, if any, shall in no case belong to the renouncer, but shall be awarded to the persons to whom it corresponds according to the rules established in this Code.
Article 1002.
The heirs who have subtracted or concealed some effects of the inheritance lose the power to renounce it and remain pure and simple heirs, without prejudice to the penalties they may have incurred.
Article 1003.
By pure and simple acceptance, or without benefit of inventory, the heir will be responsible for all the burdens of the inheritance, not only with its assets, but also with his own.
Article 1004.
Until nine days after the death of the one whose inheritance is concerned, no action may be brought against the heir to accept or repudiate.
Article 1005.
Any interested party who proves his interest in the heir accepting or repudiating the inheritance may turn to the Notary to inform the call that he has a period of thirty calendar days to accept either purely or simply, or to benefit from inventory, or to repudiate the inheritance. The notary shall further inform him that if he does not express his will within that time limit, the inheritance shall be deemed to be accepted purely and simply.
Article 1006.
By the death of the heir without accepting or repudiating the inheritance, the same right as he had will pass to his own.
Article 1007.
When several heirs are called to the inheritance, they may accept it and the others repudiate it. Each heir shall have equal freedom to accept it purely and simply or for inventory benefit.
Article 1008.
Dismissal of the inheritance shall be made before Notary in public instrument.
Article 1009.
He who is called to the same inheritance by will and ab intestate and repudiates it by the first title, is understood to have repudiated it by the two.
Repudiating her as heir ab intestate and without notice of her testamentary title, she can still accept her for this one.
Section 5.a of the Inventory Benefit and the Right to Deliberate
Article 1010.
Every heir can accept the inheritance for inventory benefit, even if the testator has forbidden it.
You may also request inventory formation before accepting or repudiating the inheritance, to deliberate on this point.
Article 1011.
The declaration to make use of the inventory benefit shall be made before Notary.
Article 1012.
If the heir referred to in the preceding article is in a foreign country, he may make such a declaration to the Spanish diplomatic or consular agent who is authorized to perform the functions of Notary at the place of the grant.
Article 1013.
The declaration referred to in the preceding articles shall have no effect unless it is preceded or followed by a faithful and accurate inventory of all assets of the inheritance, made with the formalities and within the time limits to be expressed in the following articles.
Article 1014.
The heir who holds the inheritance or part of it and wants to use the inventory benefit or the right to deliberate, must communicate it to Notary and request within thirty days from the one in which the formation of notarial inventory with summons to the creditors and legates to come to witness it if it suits them.
Article 1015.
Where the heir does not hold the inheritance or part thereof, nor has he exercised any management as such heir, the period specified in the preceding article shall be counted from the day following that on which the time limit set for accepting or repudiating the inheritance pursuant to Article 1005 expires, or from the day on which he accepted it or managed it as an heir.
Article 1016.
Apart from the cases referred to in the two preceding articles, if no claim has been brought against the heir, the heir may accept for inventory benefit, or with the right to deliberate, until he prescribes the action to claim the inheritance.
Article 1017.
The inventory shall begin within thirty days of the citation of creditors and legatees, and shall end within sixty days.
If, because the goods are found at a long distance or are very large, or for another just cause, those sixty days appear insufficient, the Notary may extend this term for as long as he deems necessary, without exceeding one year.
Article 1018.
If due to the guilt or negligence of the heir the inventory is not started or completed within the deadlines and with the solemnities prescribed in the preceding articles, it shall be understood that it accepts the inheritance purely and simply.
Article 1019.
The heir who has reserved the right to deliberate shall, within thirty days from the next day to the day on which the inventory was completed, declare to the Notary whether he repudiates or accepts the inheritance and whether or not he makes use of the inventory benefit.
After the thirty days without making such a manifestation, it will be understood to accept it purely and simply.
Article 1020.
During the formation of the inventory and until the acceptance of the inheritance, at the request of the party, the Notary may adopt the necessary provisions for the administration and custody of the estate property in accordance with the provisions of this Code and the notary legislation.
Article 1021.
Anyone who claims an inheritance from another person to be in possession for more than a year, if he overcomes the judgment, shall not be required to make inventory to enjoy this benefit, and shall only be liable for the burdens of the inheritance with the goods that are given to him.
Article 1022.
The inventory made by the heir who later repudiates the inheritance shall benefit the substitutes and heirs ab intestate, for which the thirty days to deliberate and to make the manifestation that prevents article 1,019 shall be counted from the next day to that in which they have knowledge of the repudiation.
Article 1023.
The inventory benefit results in the following effects in favour of the heir:
1. The heir is not obliged to pay the debts and other burdens of the inheritance, but to the extent that the property of the inheritance reaches.
2. Conserves against the hereditary wealth all rights and actions it has against the deceased.
3. For no purpose are their particular property confused, in damage to the heir, with those belonging to the inheritance.
Article 1024.
The heir will lose the inventory benefit:
1. If you knowingly cease to include in the inventory any of the assets, rights or actions of the inheritance.
2. If, before completing the payment of the debts and legacies, assets of the inheritance were disposed of without the authorization of all interested parties, or if the price of the sale was not given the application determined when granting the authorization.
However, it may have marketable securities quoted on a secondary market through disposal on that market, and other goods by sale at notarial public auction previously notified to all interested parties, specifying in both cases the application to be given to the price obtained.
Article 1025.
During the formation of the inventory and the term for deliberation, the legatees may not demand payment of their legacies.
Article 1026.
Until all known creditors and legatees are paid, the estate is deemed to be in administration.
The administrator, either the same heir or any other person, will have, in this concept, the representation of the inheritance to exercise the actions that compete with it and to answer the demands that are made against it.
Article 1027.
The administrator may not pay the bequests except after having paid all creditors.
Article 1028.
Where there is a pending judgement among creditors on the preference of their claims, they will be paid in the order and according to the degree of the final judgment of graduation.
In the absence of pending judgement among creditors, first-time creditors will be paid; but, on the basis that any known claims are preferred, payment will not be made without prior security in favour of the best-performing creditor.
Article 1029.
If the legacies appear after payment, the creditors can only claim against the legacies if they do not have sufficient assets to pay them.
Article 1030.
Where the sale of estate property is necessary for the payment of claims and legacies, it shall be carried out in the manner set out in the second paragraph of Article 1024 (2) of this Code, unless all heirs, creditors and legacies agree otherwise.
Article 1031.
By not reaching hereditary assets for the payment of debts and legacies, the administrator shall report its administration to creditors and legacies who have not fully collected, and shall be liable for the damage caused to the inheritance by his fault or negligence.
Article 1032.
After payment of the creditors and legatees, the heir shall remain in full enjoyment of the remnant of the inheritance.
If the inheritance has been administered by another person, the person concerned shall render to the heir the account of his administration, under the responsibility imposed by the preceding article.
Article 1033.
The costs of the inventory and the other actions to which the administration of the inheritance accepted for the benefit of inventory and the defence of its rights will be responsible for the same inheritance. Except for those expenses attributable to the heir who had been personally convicted for his or her wrong or bad faith.
The same shall apply to expenses incurred in making use of the right to deliberate, if the inheritance is repudiated by the heir.
Article 1034.
The particular creditors of the heir may not be mixed in the transactions of the inheritance accepted by the heir for inventory benefit until the creditors of the heir and the legatees are paid; but they may request the retention or seizure of the remainder that may result in favour of the heir.
CHAPTER VI
From collation and partition
Section 1.a of collation
Article 1035.
The forced heir who is present, with others who are also, to a succession must bring to the estate the goods or values he or she would have received from the estate owner, in his or her life, for dowry, donation or other gainful title, in order to calculate it in the regulation of legitimates and in the partition account.
Article 1036.
If the donor has expressly provided for this, or if the donor repudiates the inheritance, there shall not be any place between the forced heirs, except in the case where the donation is to be reduced as innocuous.
Article 1037.
It is not understood subject to reference what is left in will if the testator does not have the opposite, being in any case safe the legitimate ones.
Article 1038.
When the grandchildren succeed the grandfather on behalf of the father, conversing with his uncles or cousins, they will bring up everything the father should have if he lived, even if they have not inherited it.
They shall also make a contribution to what they have received from the person responsible for the inheritance during the life of the estate, unless the testator has provided otherwise, in which case their will shall be respected if it does not prejudice the legitimate will of the joint heirs.
Article 1039.
Parents shall not be obliged to raise in the inheritance of their ascendants what they donate to their children.
Article 1040.
The gifts given to the son's consort will not be brought to the audience either; but if they have been made by the father together with the two, the son will be obliged to raise half of the donated thing.
Article 1041.
The costs of food, education, cure of diseases, even if extraordinary, learning, or gifts of custom, shall not be subject to quotation.
The costs incurred by parents and ascendants to meet the special needs of their children or descendants who are required by their disability situation shall also not be subject to the levy.
Article 1042.
They shall not be brought up, except when the father so arranges or harms the lawful, the expenses he has incurred in giving his children a professional or artistic career; but when they are to be brought up, the child shall be reduced from them what he would have spent living in the house and company of his parents.
Article 1043.
The sums paid by the father to redeem his children from the fate of a soldier, to pay their debts, to obtain a title of honor and other similar expenses will be collationable.
Article 1044.
Wedding gifts, consisting of jewels, dresses and equipment, will not be reduced as innocuous but in the part exceeding one tenth or more of the amount available per will.
Article 1045.
The same donated things are not to be brought up and partitioned, but their value at the time that hereditary goods are evaluated.
The increase or physical deterioration following donation and even its total loss, accidental or guilty, will be the responsibility and risk or benefit of the donor.
Article 1046.
The dowry or gift made by both spouses shall be divided into half of the inheritance of each of them. The one made by one will only be colluded in his inheritance.
Article 1047.
The donor shall take as much less in the hereditary mass as he had already received, receiving his joint heirs the equivalent, as far as possible, in goods of the same nature, species and quality.
Article 1048.
The above article cannot be verified, if the donated property is immovable, the joint heirs shall be entitled to be equalled in cash or transferable securities to the type of quotation; and, in the absence of any money or securities listed in the inheritance, other goods shall be sold in public auction in the necessary amount.
When the donated goods are furniture, the co-heirs will only be entitled to be equalized in other inheritance furniture for the fair price, at their free choice.
Article 1049.
The fruits and interests of the goods subject to submission are not due to the hereditary mass but from the day the succession is opened.
In order to regulate them, the income and interest of the estate property of the same species as those that have been sold will be taken care of.
Article 1050.
If between the co-heirs there is a dispute over the obligation to collate or over the objects to be brought up, that is why the partition will not cease to be continued, providing the corresponding bond.
Partition Section 2.a
Article 1051.
No co-heir may be forced to remain in the indivision of inheritance unless the testator expressly prohibits division.
But even if it is prohibited, division will always take place through one of the causes for which society is extinguished.
Article 1052.
Any joint heir who has the free administration and disposition of his property may at any time request the partition of the inheritance. If the joint heir is absent, his legal representatives will do so. If the co-heir has support measures based on disability, it will be within the scope of these measures.
Article 1053.
Either of the spouses may request the partition of the inheritance without the intervention of the other.
Article 1054.
The heirs on condition may not request partition until it is fulfilled. But the other joint heirs may request it, competently ensuring the right of the former in the event of the condition being fulfilled; and, until it is known that the condition has been or cannot be verified, the partition shall be considered provisional.
Article 1055.
If one of the co-heirs dies before the partition is made, leaving two or more heirs, one of them will suffice to ask; but all those involved in the latter concept must appear under a single representation.
Article 1056.
When the testator makes, by act between alive or by last will, the partition of his goods, will pass through it, as soon as it does not harm the legitimate of the forced heirs.
A testator who, in view of the preservation of the undertaking or in the interest of his family, wishes to preserve an economic exploitation undivided or to maintain control of a capital company or group thereof may use the power granted in this article, providing that his legitimate right is paid in cash to the other interested parties. To this end, it will not be necessary that there be sufficient cash in the inheritance for payment, it being possible to make the payment with extra-inherited cash and to establish by the testator or by the meter-party designated by him, provided that this does not exceed five years from the death of the testator; any other means of termination of the obligations may apply. If the form of payment has not been established, any legal person may demand his or her legal right in property of the inheritance. The provisions of Article 843 and the first paragraph of Article 844 shall not apply to partitioning.
Article 1057.
The testator may entrust by act ‘inter vivos’ or ‘mortis causa’ to any person who is not one of the co-heirs for partition after his death.
In the absence of a will, an estate partitioner appointed or vacant the office, the judicial secretary or the notary, at the request of heirs and legatees representing at least 50 per cent of the estate, and with the summons of the other interested parties, if their domicile is known, may appoint an estate partitioner, in accordance with the rules which the Civil Procedure Act and the Notarized set for the appointment of experts. Such partition shall require the approval of the judicial secretary or notary, unless express confirmation of all heirs and legates.
The provisions of this article and of the previous article shall be observed even if there is one subject to parental authority or guardianship among the joint heirs; but in these cases the estate partitioner shall make an inventory of the assets of the inheritance, with a summons from the legal representatives of those persons.
If the co-heir has support measures in place, it will be in accordance with the provisions of the measures.
Article 1058.
When the testator has not made the partition, or entrusted this power to another, if the heirs are greater and have the free administration of their property, they may distribute the inheritance in the manner they deem appropriate.
Article 1059.
When the adult heirs do not understand how to make the partition, their right to exercise it in the manner provided for in the Civil Procedure Act.
Article 1060.
When minors are legally represented in the partition, no intervention or judicial authorization will be required, but the guardian will need judicial approval of the participative. The judicial counsel appointed to represent a minor in a partition shall obtain the approval of the judicial authority, if the Counsel of the Administration of Justice had not provided otherwise in making the appointment.
Nor shall authorization or judicial intervention be required in the division carried out by the curator with powers of representation. Partitioning once practiced will require judicial approval.
The division by the judicial counsel appointed to act on behalf of a minor or a person for whom support measures have been established will require judicial approval, unless otherwise provided for in the appointment.
Article 1061.
In the partition of the inheritance it is necessary to keep the possible equality, making lots or assigning to each of the joint heirs things of the same nature, quality or species.
Article 1062.
When one thing is indivisible or is greatly undervalued by its division, it may be awarded to one, as a payment to the others of the excess in money.
But it will be enough for only one of the heirs to ask for its sale in public auction, and with the admission of foreign bidders, to do so.
Article 1063.
Co-heirs must pay each other the income and fruits they have received from the inheritance property, the useful and necessary unimaginables made there, and the damage caused by malice or negligence.
Article 1064.
Partition costs, made in the common interest of all co-heirs, shall be deducted from the inheritance; the facts in the particular interest of one of them shall be borne by the inheritance.
Article 1065.
The acquisition or ownership certificates shall be handed over to the successful joint heir of the estate or estates to which they relate.
Article 1066.
Where the same title includes several estates awarded to various joint heirs, or only one that has been divided between two or more, the title shall remain in the possession of the major interested in the estate or estates, and shall be provided to the other reliable copies, at the expense of the hereditary flow. If the interest is equal, the title shall be given, in the absence of agreement, to whom it is lucky to be appropriate.
Originally, the one in whose possession it remains must also display it to the other interested parties when requested.
Article 1067.
If any of the heirs sell to a stranger their hereditary right before partition, they may all or any of the joint heirs subrogate in place of the buyer, refunding the purchase price, as long as they verify it within a month, to count since this is made known to them.
Section 3.a Of Partition Effects
Article 1068.
The legally made partition confers on each heir the exclusive ownership of the property that has been awarded to him.
Article 1069.
After partitioning, the joint heirs shall be obliged to each other to ensure the eviction and reorganisation of the goods awarded.
Article 1070.
The obligation referred to in the preceding article shall cease only in the following cases:
1.o When the testator himself had made the partition, unless it appears, or is rationally presumed, to have wanted otherwise, and always saves the legitimate one.
2.o When it was expressly agreed upon when partitioning.
3.o Where the eviction results from post-partition cause, or is caused by the fault of the successful tenderer.
Article 1071.
The reciprocal obligation of the co-heirs to be evicted is proportionate to their respective hereditary obligation; but if any of them is insolvent, the other co-heirs shall be liable for their part in the same proportion, the corresponding part being deducted from the part to which they are to be compensated.
Those who pay for the insolvent will keep their action against him for when he improves his fortune.
Article 1072.
If a claim is awarded as receivable, the joint heirs shall not be liable for the subsequent insolvency of the hereditary debtor, and shall be liable for its insolvency only at the time of partitioning.
Credits qualified as uncollectible are not liable; but, if they are collected in whole or in part, the received shall be distributed proportionately among the heirs.
Section 4.a of the partition termination
Article 1073.
Partitions may be terminated for the same reasons as obligations.
Article 1074.
Partitions may also be terminated due to injury in more than a quarter, taking into account the value of things when they were awarded.
Article 1075.
The partition made by the deceased cannot be challenged on the grounds of injury, but in the event that it harms the legitimate of the forced heirs or that it appears, or is rationally presumed, that the will of the testator was another.
Article 1076.
The rescission action due to injury will last four years, counted since the partition was made.
Article 1077.
The respondent heir may choose to compensate for the damage or consent to a new partition.
Compensation may be made in numerary or in the same thing as the injury.
If a new partition is made, it will not reach those who have not been harmed or perceived more than justly.
Article 1078.
An heir who has disposed of all or a substantial part of the immovable property awarded to him or her may not bring an action for damages.
Article 1079.
The omission of any or some objects or values of the inheritance does not result in the partition being terminated by injury, but rather in the completion or addition of the omitted objects or values.
Article 1080.
Partition made with the preterition of one of the heirs shall not be rescinded, unless it is proved that there was bad faith or wrong on the part of the other interested ones; but they shall have the obligation to pay the preterido the part correspondingly to it.
Article 1081.
The partition made with one who was believed heir without being heir will be null and void.
Section 5.a. Payment of hereditary debts
Article 1082.
Creditors recognised as such may object to the partitioning of the inheritance until the amount of their claims is paid to them or secured.
Article 1083.
The creditors of one or more of the joint heirs may intervene at their own expense in the partition to prevent it from being made into a fraud or damage to their rights.
Article 1084.
After partitioning, creditors may demand payment of their debts in full from any of the heirs who have not accepted the inheritance for inventory benefit, or to the extent that they reach their hereditary portion, in the event that they have accepted it with such benefit.
In either case the defendant shall have the right to summon and place his joint heirs, unless by the disposition of the testator, or as a result of the partition, he has been obliged to pay the debt alone.
Article 1085.
A joint heir who has paid more than his share of the inheritance may claim his proportional share from the others.
The same will be observed when, because it is the mortgage debt or consists of a given body, it would have paid it in full. The successful tenderer may, in this case, claim only the proportional share from his joint heirs, even if the creditor has transferred his shares to him and subrogating him instead.
Article 1086.
While one of the estates of the inheritance is taxed with income or perpetual royal charge, it will not be extinguished, even if it is redeemable, but when most of the joint heirs agree.
Not according to this, or being the irredeemable burden, will be reduced its value or capital of the farm, and this will pass with the load to which it touches in lot or by award.
Article 1087.
The creditor co-heir of the deceased may claim from the others the payment of his claim, deducted his proportional share as such heir, and without prejudice to the provisions of Section 5a, Chapter VI, of this title.
FOURTH BOOK
Obligations and contracts
TITLE I
Obligations
CHAPTER I
General provisions
Article 1088.
Every obligation is to give, to do or not to do anything.
Article 1089.
Obligations arise from the law, contracts and quasi-contracts, and from unlawful acts and omissions or in which any kind of fault or negligence is involved.
Article 1090.
Obligations under the law are not presumed. Only those expressly specified in this Code or in special laws are enforceable, and shall be governed by the precepts of the law which has established them; and, in so far as it has not provided for, by the provisions of this book.
Article 1091.
The obligations arising from contracts have the force of law between the contracting parties and must be fulfilled under the contracts.
Article 1092.
Civil obligations arising from offences or misdemeanours shall be governed by the provisions of the Convention on the Rights of the Child. Spanish Criminal Code.
Article 1093.
Those arising from acts or omissions involving fault or negligence not punishable by law shall be subject to the provisions of Chapter II of Title XVI of this book.
CHAPTER II
The nature and effect of obligations
Article 1094.
He who is forced to give something is also obliged to keep it with the diligence of a good father of family.
Article 1095.
The creditor is entitled to the fruits of the thing since the birth of the obligation to deliver it. However, it shall not acquire a right in the property until it has been handed over to it.
Article 1096.
Where a particular thing is to be delivered, the creditor, irrespective of the right conferred on it by article 1.101, may compel the debtor to deliver.
If the matter is undetermined or generic, it may request that the obligation be fulfilled at the expense of the debtor.
If the person liable is in arrears, or is committed to handing over the same thing to two or more different persons, the incidental cases shall be his account until the surrender is made.
Article 1097.
The obligation to give a given thing includes the obligation to deliver all its accessories, even if they have not been mentioned.
Article 1098.
If the person forced to do anything does not do it, he will be ordered to execute at his own expense.
The same shall be observed if it does so in contravention of the terms of the obligation. In addition, it may be decreed to undo what has been done wrong.
Article 1099.
The second paragraph of the preceding article shall also be observed when the obligation is not to do and the debtor enforces what had been prohibited.
Article 1100.
Those who are obliged to surrender or to do something have been in arrears since the creditor requires them to perform their obligation judicially or out of court.
The creditor shall not, however, be required to have the default:
1. When the obligation or the law so expressly declares.
2. Where it appears of its nature and circumstances that the designation of the time at which the thing was to be delivered or the service was a determining reason for establishing the obligation.
In mutual obligations, none of those who are bound is in default if the other fails or fails to comply properly with his duties. Since one of those who are obliged to perform their duties, the default begins for the other.
Article 1101.
Compensation for damage caused by the performance of their duties is subject to the penalty of wrongfulness, negligence or late payment, and to damages which are in any way contrary to the terms of those obligations.
Article 1102.
Responsibility for the offence is enforceable in all obligations. The waiver of action to make it effective is null and void.
Article 1103.
Liability arising from negligence is equally enforceable in the performance of all kinds of obligations, but may be moderated by the Tribunals as the case may be.
Article 1104.
The fault or negligence of the debtor consists in the omission of any diligence that requires the nature of the obligation and corresponds to the circumstances of the person, the time and the place.
Where the obligation does not express the diligence to be given in its fulfilment, the duty of a good parent shall be required.
Article 1105.
Apart from the cases expressly mentioned in the law, and where the obligation so declares, no one shall be held responsible for events which could not have been foreseen or which were inevitable.
Article 1106.
Compensation for damages includes not only the value of the loss suffered, but also the value of the loss lost by the creditor, which is covered by the provisions of the following articles.
Article 1107.
The damages to which the debtor is liable in good faith are those anticipated or which may have been anticipated at the time of the creation of the obligation and which are a necessary consequence of its non-performance.
In the event of an offence, the debtor shall be liable to all those known to arise from the non-performance of the obligation.
Article 1108.
If the obligation consists in the payment of an amount of money, and the debtor is in arrears, compensation for damages, without agreement to the contrary, shall consist in the payment of the agreed interest, and in the absence of agreement, in the legal interest.
Article 1109.
Expired interests are in the legal interest since they are judicially claimed, even though the obligation has remained silent on this point.
In commercial business it will be at the disposal of the Commercial Code.
The Monts de Pietà and the Savings Banks will be governed by their special regulations.
Article 1110.
The creditor's receipt of the capital, without any reservation with respect to interest, extinguishes the debtor's obligation in respect of interest.
The receipt of the last period of a debit, when the creditor also makes no reservations, shall terminate the obligation in respect of the previous periods.
Article 1111.
Creditors, after having pursued the assets of which the debtor is in possession in order to realize their dues, may exercise all the debtor ' s rights and actions for the same purpose, except for those inherent in the debtor ' s person; they may also challenge acts that the debtor has performed in fraud of his right.
Article 1112.
All rights acquired under an obligation are transferable subject to the law, if not agreed otherwise.
CHAPTER III
Of the various types of obligations
Section 1.a Pure and conditional obligations
Article 1113.
An obligation which is not dependent on a future or uncertain event or past event which is ignored by the parties concerned shall of course be enforceable.
An obligation containing a condition of resolution shall also be enforceable, without prejudice to the effects of the decision.
Article 1114.
In conditional obligations the acquisition of rights, as well as the resolution or loss of those already acquired, will depend on the event constituting the condition.
Article 1115.
Where the fulfilment of the condition depends on the sole will of the debtor, the conditional obligation shall be void. If it depends on the fate or will of a third party, the obligation shall have all its effects in accordance with the provisions of this Code.
Article 1116.
The impossible conditions, those contrary to good morals and those prohibited by law, shall nullify the obligation to which they depend.
The condition of not doing an impossible thing is that it is not put on.
Article 1117.
The condition that an event occurs in a given time will terminate the obligation from the passage of time or it is already clear that the event will not take place.
Article 1118.
The condition that no event occurs in a given time makes the obligation effective since the time indicated or it is already evident that the event cannot occur.
If there is no fixed time, the condition must be recognised as having been fulfilled in which it would have been likely to have been indicated, taking into account the nature of the obligation.
Article 1119.
The condition shall be deemed to have been fulfilled when the person liable voluntarily prevented it from being fulfilled.
Article 1120.
The effects of the conditional obligation to give, once the condition has been fulfilled, are taken back to the day of the constitution of the condition. However, where the obligation imposes reciprocal benefits on the parties concerned, the fruits and interests of the time during which the condition has been pending shall be deemed to be offset against each other. If the obligation is unilateral, the debtor shall endorse the fruits and interest received, unless it is inferred from the nature and circumstances of the obligation that it was otherwise the will of the debtor.
In the obligation to do and not to do, the Tribunals shall, in each case, determine the retroactive effect of the condition fulfilled.
Article 1121.
The creditor may, prior to the fulfilment of the conditions, institute the appropriate actions for the preservation of its right.
The debtor can repeat what he would have paid at the same time.
Article 1122.
Where the conditions are imposed in an attempt to suspend the effectiveness of the obligation to give, the following rules shall be observed, in the event that the condition improves or is lost or deteriorates pending:
1.a If the thing was lost without the fault of the debtor, the obligation shall be terminated.
2.a If the thing was lost because of the debtor, the debtor is liable to damages.
Understand that the thing is lost when it perishes, is left out of trade or disappears so that its existence is ignored, or cannot be recovered.
3.a When the property deteriorates without the fault of the debtor, the impairment is on the account of the creditor.
4.a The creditor may opt for the termination of the obligation and its performance, with compensation for damages in both cases, resulting from the debtor ' s fault.
5.a If the thing is improved by its nature, or by time, the improvements yield in favor of the creditor.
6.a If it is improved at the expense of the debtor, the debtor shall have no other right than that granted to the usufructuary.
Article 1123.
Where the conditions are intended to resolve the obligation to give, the persons concerned, who have complied with them, shall be reimbursed as they have received.
In the event of loss, deterioration or improvement of the property, the provisions of the preceding article concerning the debtor shall apply to the person to whom restitution is due.
With regard to obligations to do and not to do, the provisions of the second paragraph of Article 1.120 shall be observed with regard to the effects of the resolution.
Article 1124.
The power to resolve obligations is understood to be implicit in reciprocal obligations, in the event that one of the parties does not fulfil his or her duties.
The injured party may choose between requiring the performance or termination of the obligation, with compensation for damages and payment of interest in both cases. It may also request the resolution, even after it has opted for compliance, when it will be impossible.
The Court shall order the decision sought, in the absence of any justified cases authorizing it to set a time limit.
This is without prejudice to the rights of third parties acquiring the goods, in accordance with Articles 1.295 and 1.298 and the provisions of the Mortgage Act.
Section 2.a On time obligations
Article 1125.
Obligations for which a certain day has been indicated shall be enforceable only on the day of the date of the date of the date of the date of the date of the date of the date of the date of entry into force.
Understand for the day certain one who is necessarily to come, even if he ignores when.
If the uncertainty consists of whether or not the day is due, the obligation is conditional, and will be governed by the rules of the preceding section.
Article 1126.
What would have been paid in advance in the term obligations, cannot be repeated.
If the payer ignored, when he did, the existence of the time limit, he shall have the right to claim from the creditor the interest or fruits which the creditor would have received from the thing.
Article 1127.
Provided that a term is designated in the obligations, it is presumed to be established for the benefit of the creditor and debtor, unless the terms of those or other circumstances result in the favour of either.
Article 1128.
If the obligation does not indicate a period of time, but of its nature and circumstances it is inferred that it has intended to be granted to the debtor, the Tribunals shall determine the duration of that period.
The duration of the period shall also be fixed by the Tribunals when the term has been left to the debtor.
Article 1129.
The debtor shall lose any right to use the time limit:
1. When, after the obligation has been entered into, it becomes insolvent, unless it guarantees the debt.
2. If it does not grant the creditor the security to which it is bound.
3. Where such guarantees have been diminished by their own acts after they have been established, and where, by chance, they have disappeared, unless they are immediately replaced by new and equally secure ones.
Article 1130.
If the period of the obligation is fixed by days from a given date, the period shall be excluded from the calculation, which shall begin on the following day.
Section 3.a on Alternative Obligations
Article 1131.
An alternative to various benefits must fully comply with one of these.
The creditor cannot be compelled to receive part of the creditor.
Article 1132.
The choice is for the debtor, unless expressly granted to the creditor.
The debtor shall not be entitled to choose which benefits are impossible, unlawful or could not have been the subject of the obligation.
Article 1133.
The choice will not take effect until it has been notified.
Article 1134.
The debtor shall lose the right of choice where only one of the benefits to which it is alternatively liable is realizable.
Article 1135.
The creditor shall be entitled to compensation for damages if all the things that were otherwise the subject of the obligation or the performance of the obligation had been made impossible by the fault of the debtor.
Compensation shall be fixed on the basis of the value of the last thing that had disappeared, or of the service that had recently become impossible.
Article 1136.
Where the choice has been expressly attributed to the creditor, the obligation shall cease to be an alternative from the day on which the creditor was notified to the debtor.
Until then, the debtor's responsibilities shall be governed by the following rules:
1.a If any of the things had been lost by chance, it shall perform by delivering the one chosen by the creditor from among the remaining, or the one left, if only one remained.
2.a If the loss of any of the things has occurred because of the debtor, the creditor may claim any of the remaining things, or the price from which, because of the debtor, it has disappeared.
3.a If all things have been lost because of the debtor, the choice of the creditor shall be on its price.
The same rules shall apply to obligations to do or not to do, in the event that some or all benefits prove impossible.
Section 4.a. On joint and joint obligations
Article 1137.
The participation of two or more creditors or two or more debtors in a single obligation does not imply that each of them has the right to request, nor should each of them be required to lend the whole of the things that are the object of the obligation. This will only take place when the obligation expressly determines it, constituting the character of solidarity.
Article 1138.
If the text of the obligations referred to in the preceding article does not appear otherwise, the claim or the debt shall be presumed to be divided into as many equal parts as creditors or debtors have, with claims or debts being repudiated different from each other.
Article 1139.
If the division is impossible, only the collective actions of creditors shall be prejudicial to the law of creditors and the debt may be paid only by proceeding against all debtors. If any of these prove insolvent, the others will not be obliged to make up for their fault.
Article 1140.
Solidarity may exist even if creditors and debtors are not bound in the same way and for the same periods and conditions.
Article 1141.
Each of the creditors in solidarity can do what is useful to others, but not what is harmful to them.
Actions brought against any of the debtors in solidarity shall harm all of them.
Article 1142.
The debtor may pay the debt to any of the creditors in solidarity; but, if the debtor has been sued by any of them, the debtor must pay the debt.
Article 1143.
Novation, set-off, confusion or remission of the debt, made by any of the creditors in solidarity or with any of the debtors of the same class, terminates the obligation, without prejudice to the provisions of article 1.146.
The creditor who has executed any of these acts, as well as the creditor who collects the debt, shall be liable to the other creditors of their share of the obligation.
Article 1144.
The creditor may appeal against any of the debtors in solidarity or against all of them simultaneously. Claims filed against one shall not be an obstacle to those subsequently brought against the others, until the debt is fully collected.
Article 1145.
Payment made by one of the debtors in solidarity extinguishes the obligation.
The person who made the payment can only claim from his co-workers the share that corresponds to each of them, with the interest on the advance.
Failure to fulfil the obligation due to the insolvency of the joint debtor shall be met by its co-debtors, on a pro rata basis of the debt of each of them.
Article 1146.
The removal or remission made by the creditor of the party that affects one of the debtors in solidarity, does not relieve him of his liability to the co-debtors, in the event that the debt has been fully paid by either of them.
Article 1147.
If the matter had perished or the benefit had become impossible without the fault of the debtors in solidarity, the obligation would be extinguished.
If he has been guilty of any of them, all of them shall be liable, with respect to the creditor, for the price and compensation of damages and the payment of interest, without prejudice to their action against the guilty or negligent.
Article 1148.
The debtor in solidarity may use, against the creditor's claims, all exceptions arising from the nature of the obligation and those which are personal to the creditor. For those that correspond personally to the others, they can only be used in the part of the debt for which they are responsible.
Section 5.a. On divisible and indivisible obligations
Article 1149.
The divisibility or indivisibility of the subject matter of the obligations in which there is a single debtor and a single creditor does not alter or modify the precepts of chapter II of this title.
Article 1150.
The indivisible obligation pooled is resolved to indemnify damages since any debtor defaults on its commitment. Debtors who have been willing to perform theirs shall not contribute to the compensation in more quantity than the corresponding portion of the price of the thing or service in which the obligation consists.
Article 1151.
For the purposes of the preceding articles, the obligations to give certain bodies and those which are not subject to partial compliance shall be considered indivisible.
Obligations to perform shall be divisible when they are intended to provide a number of working days, to perform works by metric units or other similar things which are by their nature liable to partial performance.
In the obligation not to do so, the divisibility or indivisibility shall be decided by the nature of the benefit in each particular case.
Section 6.a: Obligations under a criminal clause
Article 1152.
In obligations under a criminal clause, the penalty shall replace compensation for damages and the payment of interest in the event of non-performance, if otherwise not agreed.
The penalty may be imposed only if it is enforceable in accordance with the provisions of this Code.
Article 1153.
The debtor may not waive the obligation by paying the penalty, but in the event that this right has been expressly reserved to it. Nor may the creditor jointly demand the performance of the obligation and the satisfaction of the sentence, without this power having been clearly granted to it.
Article 1154.
The judge shall amend the sentence fairly where the principal obligation has been partly or irregularly performed by the debtor.
Article 1155.
The nullity of the criminal clause does not entail that of the main obligation.
The nullity of the principal obligation carries with it that of the criminal clause.
CHAPTER IV
Expiry of obligations
General provisions
Article 1156.
Obligations are extinguished:
For payment or fulfillment.
For the loss of the right thing.
For debt forgiveness.
The confusion of creditor and debtor rights.
For the compensation.
For the novation.
Section 1.a Payment
Article 1157.
A debt shall not be deemed to have been paid except when the thing or the performance of the obligation had been fully surrendered.
Article 1158.
Payment may be made by any person, whether or not he or she has an interest in the performance of the obligation, whether he or she knows and approves it, or whether the debtor ignores it.
A person who pays on behalf of another person may claim from the debtor what he or she would have paid, unless he or she has done so against his or her express will.
In this case, the debtor may only repeat what the payment would have been useful to the debtor.
Article 1159.
Anyone who pays on behalf of the debtor, ignoring it, may not compel the creditor to subrogate him in his rights.
Article 1160.
Payment by a person who is not free to dispose of the thing due and has the capacity to dispose of it shall not be valid in the obligation to give. However, if the payment was made in the form of an amount of money or expendable property, there will be no repetition against the creditor who had spent or consumed it in good faith.
Article 1161.
The obligation to perform the creditor may not be compelled to receive the performance or service of a third party, where the quality and circumstances of the person of the debtor have been taken into account in establishing the obligation.
Article 1162.
Payment must be made to the person in whose favour the obligation was made, or to another person authorized to receive it on his behalf.
Article 1163.
The payment made to a minor person shall be valid as soon as it becomes useful. This rule shall also apply to payments made to a person with disabilities with support measures established to receive it and acting without such support, in the event that the debtor or the person making the payment knew of the existence of support measures at the time of recruitment or otherwise took advantage of the disability situation by obtaining an unfair advantage from it.
Payment made to a third party shall also be valid as soon as the creditor has become useful.
Article 1164.
Payment made in good faith to the person in possession of the receivable shall release the debtor.
Article 1165.
Payment made to the creditor by the debtor after the debtor has been ordered to withhold the debt shall not be valid.
Article 1166.
The debtor of a thing cannot compel its creditor to receive a different thing, even if it is of equal or greater value than the one due.
Neither in the obligations to do may one act be replaced by another against the will of the creditor.
Article 1167.
Where the obligation is to deliver an undetermined or generic thing, the quality and circumstances of which have not been expressed, the creditor may not require it of the highest quality, nor may the debtor deliver it of the lower one.
Article 1168.
Extrajudicial expenses incurred by payment shall be the account of the debtor. The Court shall decide on judicial matters in accordance with Civil Procedure Act.
Article 1169.
Unless expressly authorized by the contract, the creditor may not be obliged to receive part of the benefits in which the obligation is based.
However, when the debt has a liquid and an illiquid part, the creditor may demand and make payment of the first without waiting for the second part to be settled.
Article 1170.
The payment of the debts of money must be made in the agreed species and, being not possible to deliver the species, in the silver or gold coin that has legal course in Spain.
The delivery of promissory notes to the order, or bills of exchange or other commercial documents, will only produce the effects of the payment when they have been made, or when the creditor has caused them damage.
In the meantime, the action arising from the primitive obligation will be suspended.
Article 1171.
The payment shall be executed at the place designated by the obligation.
In the absence of a statement and in the case of the delivery of a particular item, payment must be made where it existed at the time of the creation of the obligation.
In any other case, the place of payment shall be that of the debtor's domicile.
The imputation of payments
Article 1172.
A person who has several debts of the same kind in favour of a single creditor may, at the time of payment, declare which of them to apply.
If you accept from the creditor a receipt in which the payment was made, you cannot claim against the creditor unless you have filed a case invalidating the contract.
Article 1173.
If the debt produces interest, the payment on behalf of the capital cannot be estimated as long as the interest is not covered.
Article 1174.
Where payment cannot be charged under the above rules, the most onerous debt to the debtor shall be considered to be satisfied among those that are due.
If they are of the same nature and tax, the payment shall be charged to all on a pro rata basis.
Payment for assignment of property
Article 1175.
The debtor may assign its assets to creditors in payment of their debts. This transfer, unless otherwise agreed, only relieves the person of responsibility for the liquid amount of the assets transferred. The agreements on the effect of the assignment between the debtor and its creditors shall comply with the provisions of Title XVII of this book and with the provisions of the Civil Procedure Act.
Offer of payment and appropriation
Article 1176.
If the creditor to whom the offer of payment is made in accordance with the provisions governing it refuses, expressly or in fact, without reason to admit it, to grant the document justifying the payment of the security, or to cancel the security, if any, the debtor shall be released from liability by the appropriate provision.
The entry itself shall have the same effect when the creditor is absent from the place where the payment is to be made, or when it is prevented from receiving it at the time it is to be made, and when several persons claim to be entitled to collect, whether the creditor is unknown, or the title in which the obligation is incorporated has been lost.
In any event, the provision shall be made in all cases where the performance of the obligation is made more burdensome to the debtor for reasons not attributable to the obligation.
Article 1177.
In order for the person to be released from the consignment of the goods, the person concerned must be notified in advance of the obligation.
The appropriation would be ineffective if it did not comply strictly with the provisions governing payment.
Article 1178.
The consignment shall be made by the debtor or by a third party, making the dues available to the Court or the Notary, as provided for in the Voluntary Jurisdiction Act or in the notarial legislation.
Article 1179.
The costs of the appropriation, where appropriate, shall be borne by the creditor.
Article 1180.
Acceptance by the creditor of the assignment or the court declaration that it is well made will terminate the obligation and the debtor may request that the obligation and security be cancelled, if necessary.
In the meantime, the debtor may withdraw the item or quantity entered, leaving the obligation to remain.
Article 1181.
If the creditor has made the entry, authorizes the debtor to withdraw it, it shall lose any preference it has over the matter. The co-workers and guarantors will be set free.
Section 2.a. Loss of dues
Article 1182.
The obligation to deliver a particular thing shall be terminated if it is lost or destroyed without the fault of the debtor and before it has been established in arrears.
Article 1183.
Provided that the thing was lost in the debtor's possession, the loss shall be presumed to have occurred because of the debtor and not fortuitous, unless proved otherwise, and without prejudice to article 1,096.
Article 1184.
The debtor is also discharged from the obligations to perform where the benefit is legally or physically impossible.
Article 1185.
Where the debt of a certain and determined thing is a crime or misdemeanour, the debtor shall not be exempt from payment of its price, whatever the reason for the loss, unless, offered by him the thing to which he was to receive it, the debtor would have for no reason refused to accept it.
Article 1186.
The obligation for the loss of the property shall be discharged and the creditor shall be responsible for all actions of the debtor against third parties by reason of the loss of the property.
Section 3.a Debt forgiveness
Article 1187.
The remission may be made either expressly or tacitly.
Both will be subject to the precepts governing innocuous donations. The express remission must also be in accordance with the forms of the donation.
Article 1188.
The delivery of the private document supporting a claim, made voluntarily by the creditor to the debtor, implies the waiver of the action that the former had against the latter.
If this waiver is claimed to be innocuous, the debtor and its heirs may support it by proving that the document was delivered by virtue of the payment of the debt.
Article 1189.
Provided that the private document from which the debt arises is held by the debtor, the creditor shall be presumed to have surrendered it voluntarily, unless proved otherwise.
Article 1190.
The cancellation of the principal debt will extinguish the ancillary obligations, but the latter will remain the former.
Article 1191.
The ancillary obligation to pledge shall be presumed to be transferred if the pledged thing, after delivery to the creditor, is in the possession of the debtor.
Section 4.a On the confusion of rights
Article 1192.
The obligation shall cease to apply once the concepts of creditor and debtor have been met.
Except for the case in which this confusion occurs under title of inheritance, if it has been accepted for inventory benefit.
Article 1193.
The confusion of the person of the debtor or of the principal creditor benefits the guarantors. The one performed in any of these does not extinguish the obligation.
Article 1194.
The confusion does not extinguish the pooled debt but in the portion of the creditor or debtor in which the two concepts occur.
Section 5.a Compensation
Article 1195.
The set-off shall take place when two persons, in their own right, are reciprocal creditors and debtors of one another.
Article 1196.
In order to obtain compensation, it is necessary to:
1. That each of those who are bound is primarily bound, and is the principal creditor of the other.
2. That both debts consist of an amount of money, or, when consumables are due, they are of the same kind and also of the same quality, had it been designated.
3o That the two debts are expired.
4. That they are liquid and enforceable.
5. that there is no retention or contention promoted by third parties and notified in due course to the debtor.
Article 1197.
Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, the guarantor may oppose the set-off in respect of what the creditor owes to its principal debtor.
Article 1198.
A debtor who has consented to the assignment of rights made by a creditor in favour of a third party may not object to the assignee the set-off that would be due against the assignor.
If the creditor made the assignment known to the creditor and the debtor did not consent to it, it may object to the set-off of the debts arising prior to the assignment, but not of the subsequent debts.
If the assignment is made without the knowledge of the debtor, the debtor may object to the set-off of the claims prior to the assignment and subsequent claims until it has become aware of the assignment.
Article 1199.
Debts payable at different locations can be offset by compensation for transportation costs or change to the place of payment.
Article 1200.
Compensation shall not proceed where any of the debts arise from deposit or from the obligations of the depositary or co-donor.
Nor may it object to the creditor for maintenance due by free title.
Article 1201.
If a person has several compensable debts against him, the provisions regarding the charging of payments shall be observed in the order of the set-off.
Article 1202.
The effect of the set-off is to extinguish both debt and debt in the concurrent amount, even if it is not known to creditors and debtors.
Section 6.a Novation
Article 1203.
The obligations may be amended by:
1o Varianting its object or its main conditions.
2nd Substituting the debtor's person.
3rd Subrogating a third party in the rights of the creditor.
Article 1204.
In order for an obligation to be extinguished by an obligation that replaces it, it must be strictly declared, or that the old and the new obligation must be completely incompatible.
Article 1205.
The novation, which consists of replacing a new debtor instead of the primitive, can be made without the knowledge of the latter, but not without the consent of the creditor.
Article 1206.
The insolvency of the new debtor, which the creditor would have accepted, will not revive the debtor's action against the original debtor, unless the insolvency had been prior and public or known to the debtor by delegating its debt.
Article 1207.
Where the principal obligation is terminated by the effect of the novation, ancillary obligations may only continue as soon as they benefit from third parties who have not given their consent.
Article 1208.
Novation is void if it is also the original obligation, unless the cause of invalidity can only be invoked by the debtor, or ratification is valid for null acts at the source.
Article 1209.
The subrogation of a third party in the rights of the creditor cannot be presumed outside the cases expressly mentioned in this Code.
In others, it will need to be clearly established for its effect.
Article 1210.
Subrogation shall be presumed:
1o When a creditor pays another preferential creditor.
2nd Where a third party, not interested in the obligation, pays with express or tacit approval of the debtor.
3. When the person having an interest in the performance of the obligation pays, except for the effects of confusion as to the portion of the obligation.
Article 1211.
The debtor may make the subrogation without the creditor's consent, when to pay the debt it has borrowed the money by public deed, stating its purpose in it, and expressing in the letter of payment the origin of the amount paid.
Article 1212.
Subrogation transfers the claim to the subbrogated person with the rights attached to it, either against the debtor or against third parties, whether guarantors or holders of mortgages.
Article 1213.
The creditor, to whom a partial payment has been made, may exercise its right for the remainder in preference to that which was subrogated in its place by virtue of the partial payment of the same claim.
CHAPTER V
Evidence of obligations
General provisions
Article 1214.
(Repealed)
Article 1215.
(Repealed)
Section 1.a Public documents
Article 1216.
Public documents are those authorized by a Notary or competent public employee, with the solemnities required by law.
Article 1217.
The documents in which Notary Public intervenes shall be governed by the notarial law.
Article 1218.
Public documents prove, even against a third party, the fact that they are granted and the date of the award.
They shall also give evidence against the contracting parties and their successors as to the statements made therein by the former.
Article 1219.
Deeds made to distort another earlier deed between the same interested parties shall have effect against third parties only if the contents of those deeds have been entered in the competent public register or outside the parent deed and the transfer or copy under whose virtue the third party has proceeded.
Article 1220.
Copies of public documents in which there is a matrix or protocol, contested by those to whom they harm, shall have evidentiary force only when they have been properly cross-checked.
If there is any variation between the matrix and the copy, it will be in the contents of the first.
Article 1221.
When the original script, protocol or records have disappeared, they shall test:
1. The first copies, taken by the public official who authorized them.
2. Subsequent copies, issued by court order, with subpoenas from the parties concerned.
3. Those which, without a warrant, had been removed in the presence of the persons concerned and in accordance with them.
In the absence of the above copies, any other copies that have the age of thirty or more years shall be tested, provided that they have been taken from the original by the authorized official or other person in charge of his custody.
A copy of a minor, or authorized by a public official in whom the circumstances referred to in the preceding paragraph do not apply, shall serve only as a principle of proof in writing.
The evidentiary force of copies of copies will be appreciated by the Tribunals according to the circumstances.
Article 1222.
The registration, in any public register, of a document that has disappeared, shall be appreciated according to the rules of the last two paragraphs of the preceding article.
Article 1223.
The faulty deed, due to the incompetence of the Notary or otherwise in the form, shall have the concept of a private document, if signed by the grantors.
Article 1224.
The deeds of recognition of an act or contract do not prove against the document in which they were recorded, if by excess or omission they deviate from it, unless expressly stating the novation of the former.
Private documents
Article 1225.
The private document, legally recognized, will have the same value as the public deed between those who have subscribed it and its successors.
Article 1226.
(Repealed)
Article 1227.
The date of a private document shall not be counted in respect of third parties but from the day on which it was entered or registered in a public register, since the death of any of those who signed it, or from the day on which it was handed over to a public official on account of his office.
Article 1228.
Private seats, records, and papers only prove against the one who has written them in all that is clearly stated; but whoever wants to take advantage of them must accept them on the part that harms him.
Article 1229.
The note written or signed by the creditor then, on the margin or on the back of a deed in its possession, testifies to everything that is favourable to the debtor.
The same shall apply to the written or signed note by the creditor on the back, in the margin or after the duplicate of a document or receipt held by the debtor.
In both cases, the debtor who wants to take advantage of what is in his favour will have to go through what is harmful to him.
Article 1230.
Private documents made to alter what was agreed in public deed have no effect against third parties.
Section 2.a Confession
Article 1231 a 1253.
(Repealed)
Text added, published on 08/01/2000, in force from 08/01/2001.
TITLE II
Contracts
CHAPTER I
General provisions
Article 1254.
The contract exists since one or more persons consent to be obliged, in respect of another or others, to give something or to perform some service.
Article 1255.
Contracting parties may establish such agreements, clauses and conditions as may be appropriate, provided that they are not contrary to law, morals or public order.
Article 1256.
The validity and performance of contracts cannot be left to the discretion of one of the contracting parties.
Article 1257.
Contracts have effect only between the parties granting them and their heirs, except in cases where the rights and obligations arising from the contract are not transferable, either by nature, or by agreement, or by law.
If the contract contains any stipulation in favour of a third party, the third party may require its performance, provided that it has made known its acceptance to the obligor prior to the termination of the contract.
Article 1258.
Contracts are concluded by mere consent, and since then they require not only the fulfilment of what is expressly agreed upon, but also all the consequences which, according to their nature, are in conformity with good faith, use and law.
Article 1259.
No one may hire in the name of another without being authorized by him or without legal representation by law.
A contract concluded in the name of another person who does not have his or her authorization or legal representation shall be void unless ratified by the person in whose name it is granted before it is revoked by the other contracting party.
Article 1260.
No oath shall be accepted in contracts. If it is done, it will be taken for granted.
CHAPTER II
The essential requirements for the validity of contracts
General provision
Article 1261.
There is no contract except when the following requirements are met:
1. Consent of the contracting parties.
2. Admitted object that is subject matter of the contract.
3. Cause of the obligation established.
Section 1.a Consent
Article 1262.
The consent is expressed by the contest of the offer and the acceptance of the thing and the cause to constitute the contract.
In different places, the one who made the offer and the one who accepted it, there is consent since the offeror knows the acceptance or since, having sent it the acceptor, he cannot ignore it without failing to good faith. The contract, if any, is presumed to have been concluded at the place where the offer was made.
In contracts concluded by automatic devices there is consent since the acceptance is expressed.
Article 1263.
Unemancipated minors may enter into such contracts as may be made by law for themselves or with the assistance of their representatives and those relating to goods and services of ordinary life of their age in accordance with social usages.
Article 1264.
The provisions of the previous article are without prejudice to any legal prohibitions or special capacity requirements that may be established by law.
Article 1265.
The consent given by mistake, violence, intimidation or wrong shall be null and void.
Article 1266.
In order for the error to invalidate the consent, it must fall on the substance of the thing that is the subject of the contract, or on those terms of the contract that have mainly given reason to conclude it.
The error concerning the person shall invalidate the contract only if the consideration of the person has been the main cause of the contract.
The simple error of account will only result in its correction.
Article 1267.
Violence occurs when an irresistible force is used to extract consent.
Intimidation occurs when one of the contractors is inspired by a rational and well-founded fear of imminent and serious evil in his person or property, or in the person or property of his or her spouse, descendants or ascendants.
In order to qualify intimidation, the person ' s age and condition must be taken into account.
The fear of displeasing the persons to whom submission and respect is due will not nullify the contract.
Article 1268.
Violence or intimidation shall nullify the obligation, even if it has been employed by a third party not involved in the contract.
Article 1269.
There is an offence when, with insidious words or machinations on the part of one of the contracting parties, the other is induced to conclude a contract which, without them, it would not have done.
Article 1270.
In order for the offence to result in the nullity of the contracts, it must be serious and not have been used by the two contracting parties.
The incidental wrong only obliges the person who employed it to compensate damages.
Section 2.a. Subject-matter of contracts
Article 1271.
All things that are not out of the trade of men, even future ones, can be contracted.
In the case of future inheritance, however, no contract may be concluded other than that for which the purpose is to practise between the living the division of a flow and other partitionary provisions, as provided for in Article 1056.
All services which are not contrary to law or morals may also be the subject of contracts.
Article 1272.
Impossible things or services shall not be subject to contract.
Article 1273.
The subject matter of any contract must be a given thing in terms of its species. Indetermining the quantity shall not impede the existence of the contract, provided that it is possible to determine it without the need for a new agreement between the contracting parties.
Section 3.a on the cause of contracts
Article 1274.
In onerous contracts, the provision or promise of a thing or service by the other party is understood as a reason for each contracting party; in remuneratives, the service or benefit that is remunerated, and in purely charitable contracts, the mere liberality of the benefactor.
Article 1275.
Contracts without cause, or with unlawful cause, have no effect. The cause is unlawful when it opposes laws or morals.
Article 1276.
The expression of a false cause in the contracts will result in nullity, if it is not proved that they were based on another true and lawful.
Article 1277.
Even if the case is not expressed in the contract, it is presumed to exist and is lawful as long as the debtor does not prove otherwise.
CHAPTER III
The effectiveness of contracts
Article 1278.
Contracts shall be binding, whatever the form in which they have been concluded, provided that the essential conditions for their validity are met.
Article 1279.
If the law requires the granting of a deed or other special form to give effect to the obligations inherent in a contract, the contracting parties may mutually oblige each other to fill that form once the consent and other requirements necessary for its validity have intervened.
Article 1280.
They shall be recorded in a public document:
1. Acts and contracts which have the purpose of creating, transmitting, modifying or extinguishing real rights in immovable property.
2. The leases of the same property for six or more years, provided that they are to harm a third party.
3. Marriage capitulations and their modifications.
4. The assignment, repudiation and renunciation of the hereditary rights or those of the conjugal society.
5. The power to enter into marriage, the general power to sue and the special powers to appear in court; the power to administer property; and any other power to administer property for the purpose of an act drafted or to be written in public writing, or to harm a third party.
6. The transfer of shares or rights arising from an act recorded in public deed.
Other contracts in which the amount of benefits of one or both contractors exceeds 1,500 pesetas shall also be recorded in writing, even if it is private.
CHAPTER IV
Interpretation of contracts
Article 1281.
If the terms of a contract are clear and leave no doubt about the intention of the contracting parties, it will be in the literal sense of its terms.
If the words appear contrary to the obvious intention of the contracting parties, the latter shall prevail over them.
Article 1282.
In order to judge the intention of the contracting parties, the acts of the contracting parties, contemporaneous and subsequent to the contract, must be dealt with in particular.
Article 1283.
Whatever the generality of the terms of a contract, it should not be understood to include different things and cases other than those on which the parties intended to contract.
Article 1284.
If a contract clause allows for a variety of meanings, it must be understood in the most appropriate way for it to take effect.
Article 1285.
The terms of the contracts must be interpreted by one another, giving the dubious the meaning of the whole.
Article 1286.
Words that may have different meanings shall be understood in those which are more in accordance with the nature and subject-matter of the contract.
Article 1287.
The use or custom of the country will be taken into account in interpreting the ambiguities of the contracts, providing for the omission of clauses that are usually established.
Article 1288.
The interpretation of the dark clauses of a contract shall not favour the party who would have caused the darkness.
Article 1289.
Where it is absolutely impossible to resolve doubts under the rules laid down in the preceding articles, if they fall into accidental circumstances of the contract, and the contract is free of charge, they shall be resolved in favour of the lesser transmission of rights and interests. If the contract is onerous, the doubt shall be resolved in favour of the greater reciprocity of interest.
If the doubts referred to in this article concern the main subject matter of the contract, so that it cannot be known what the intention or will of the contracting parties was, the contract shall be null and void.
CHAPTER V
Termination of contracts
Article 1290.
Validly concluded contracts may be terminated in cases established by law.
Article 1291.
They are rescindible:
(1) Contracts that may have been concluded without judicial authorization by guardians or curators with representational powers, provided that the persons they represent have suffered injury in more than a quarter of the value of the things that they have been subjected to.
2. Those held on behalf of the absent, provided that they have suffered the injury referred to in the previous number.
3. Those committed in creditor fraud, where the creditors are otherwise unable to collect what is due to them.
4. Contracts relating to contentious matters, where they were concluded by the respondent without the knowledge and approval of the disputing parties or the competent judicial authority.
5. or any others in which it is especially determined by law.
Article 1292.
Payments made in the state of insolvency on the account of obligations to which the debtor could not be bound at the same time are also compensable.
Article 1293.
No contract shall be terminated for injury, other than the cases referred to in the first and second issues of Article 1.291.
Article 1294.
The action for termination is subsidiary; it may be brought only if the injured party lacks any other legal remedy for obtaining reparation for the injury.
Article 1295.
The termination requires the return of the things that were the subject of the contract with its fruits, and of the price with its interest; consequently, it can only be carried out when the person who intended to do so can return that to which he was obliged.
Nor shall termination take place where the subject matter of the contract is lawfully held by third parties who have not acted in bad faith.
In this case, compensation for damage may be claimed from the cause of the injury.
Article 1296.
Termination referred to in article 1.291 (2) shall not take place in respect of contracts concluded with judicial authorization.
Article 1297.
All contracts under which the debtor disposes of assets free of charge are presumed to have been entered into in creditor fraud.
In addition, fraudulent dispositions for a valuable purpose by persons against whom a conviction was previously handed down in any instance or an order for the seizure of property are also presumed.
Article 1298.
Anyone who has acquired in bad faith the property disposed of in the form of creditor fraud shall compensate the creditors for the damages caused by the disposal, provided that it is impossible for him to return them for any reason.
Article 1299.
The action for termination lasts four years.
For minors subject to guardianship, for persons with disabilities with support measures that establish representational powers and for those who are absent, the four years shall not begin to be counted until the guardianship or representative support measure is extinguished, or the situation of legal absence ceases.
CHAPTER VI
Annulment of contracts
Article 1300.
Contracts which meet the requirements of article 1,261 may be annulled, even if there is no injury to the contracting parties, provided that they suffer from any of the defects which render them invalid under the law.
Article 1301.
The action for annulment shall expire at the age of four. That time will begin to run:
1. In cases of intimidation or violence, from the day on which they ceased.
2. In those of error, or wrong, or falsehood of the cause, from the consummation of the contract.
3. Where the action relates to contracts concluded by minors, from the moment they leave parental authority or guardianship.
4o Where the action concerns contracts concluded by persons with disabilities, irrespective of the support measures envisaged when necessary, since the conclusion of the contract.
5.o If the action is directed at invalidating acts or contracts made by one of the spouses without the consent of the other, where such consent is necessary, from the day of dissolution of the conjugal partnership or marriage unless it has previously been sufficiently known of such act or contract.
Article 1302.
1. An action for annulment of a contract may be brought by the principal or subsidiary parties under the contracts.
2. Contracts concluded by minors may be annulled by their legal representatives or by them when they reach the age of majority. Except for those who can celebrate validly for themselves.
3. Contracts concluded by persons with disabilities with support measures for the exercise of their ability to contract without such measures where necessary may be cancelled by them, with the support they require. They may also be annulled by their heirs for as long as they have not yet completed the period, if the person with disabilities has died before the time during which he was able to pursue the action.
The contracts referred to in the preceding paragraph may also be cancelled by the person to whom support would have been due. In this case, the annulment shall only take place where the other contracting party is aware of the existence of support measures at the time of the procurement or otherwise has taken advantage of the disability situation, thereby obtaining an unfair advantage.
4. Contracting parties may not claim the minority or the lack of support of the minor with whom they hired; neither those who caused the intimidation or violence or used the wrong or caused the error, may base their action on these defects of the contract.
Article 1303.
Once an obligation has been declared null and void, the contracting parties must return to each other the goods which had been the subject of the contract, with their fruits, and the price with interest, except as provided for in the following articles.
Article 1304.
Where the invalidity arises from the minority, the minor employer shall not be obliged to repay it except as soon as it was enriched by the benefit received. This rule shall apply where the nullity results from the absence of any support measures established where they are necessary, provided that the rightful contractor is aware of the existence of support measures at the time of the procurement or otherwise has taken advantage of the disability situation by obtaining an unfair advantage from it.
Article 1305.
Where the nullity results from the wrongfulness of the cause or subject matter of the contract, if the act constitutes an offence or offence common to the two contracting parties, they shall not have any action against each other, and shall be brought against them, and shall also be subject to the provisions of the contract, the application of which is provided for in the Spanish Criminal Code with respect to the effects or instruments of the offence or misdemeanour.
This provision applies to a case where there is only a crime or a lack of part of one of the contracting parties; but the unconvicted person may claim what he has given, and shall not be obliged to fulfil what he has promised.
Article 1306.
If the act of the clumsy case does not constitute a crime or a misdemeanour, the following rules shall be observed:
1.a Where the fault is on the part of both contracting parties, neither contracting party may repeat what it has given under the contract, nor claim performance of what the other party has offered.
2.a Where it is on the part of a single contracting party, the contracting party may not repeat what it has given under the contract, nor request the performance of what has been offered to it. The other, who was strange to the clumsy cause, may claim what he would have given, without obligation to do what he would have offered.
Article 1307.
Provided that the person liable for the declaration of invalidity to return the thing cannot return it because he has lost it, he must return the fruits received and the value that the thing had when it was lost, with interest from the same date.
Article 1308.
As long as one of the contracting parties fails to return what is required by the declaration of invalidity, the other contracting party cannot be compelled to comply with its obligations.
Article 1309.
The action for annulment is extinguished from the moment the contract has been validly confirmed.
Article 1310.
Only contracts which meet the requirements of Article 1.261 are confirmable.
Article 1311.
Confirmation can be made either expressly or tacitly. Any tacit confirmation shall be deemed to exist if, with knowledge of the cause of invalidity, and having ceased to exist, the person entitled to invoke it carries out an act which necessarily implies the will to renounce it.
Article 1312.
Confirmation does not require the assistance of the contracting party to whom it was not appropriate to bring an action for annulment.
Article 1313.
Confirmation purifies the contract of vices that it suffered from the time of its conclusion.
Article 1314.
The action for annulment of contracts shall also be extinguished if the object of the contracts was lost because of the wrong or the fault of which the contract could be carried out.
If the cause of the action was the minority of any of the contracting parties, the loss of the thing would not prevent the action from prevailing, unless it had occurred on the basis of intent or fault of the claimant after reaching the age of majority.
If the cause of the action was to have been waived by the disabled contractor from the support measures established when they were necessary, the loss of the thing would not prevent the action from prevailing, provided that the other contracting party was aware of the existence of support measures at the time of the procurement or would otherwise have taken advantage of the disability situation by obtaining an unfair advantage from it.
TITLE III
The matrimonial property regime
CHAPTER I
General provisions
Article 1315.
The economic regime of marriage shall be that which the spouses stipulate in marriage capitulations, without any other limitations than those laid down in this Code.
Article 1316.
In the absence of capitulations or when they are ineffective, the regime will be that of the society of joint ventures.
Article 1317.
The modification of the matrimonial property regime made during the marriage shall in no case prejudice the rights already acquired by third parties.
Article 1318.
The property of the spouses is subject to the lifting of the marriage charges.
When one of the spouses fails to fulfil his duty to contribute to the lifting of these burdens, the judge shall, at the request of the other, issue such precautionary measures as he deems appropriate in order to ensure their fulfilment and the necessary advances or to provide for future needs.
Where a spouse lacks sufficient property, the necessary expenses incurred in litigation against the other spouse without bad faith or recklessness, or against a third party if they are in the interest of the family, shall be borne by the common wealth and, failing that, shall be borne at the expense of the property of the other spouse where the latter's economic position prevents the former, by virtue of the requirement of the Civil Procedure Act, obtaining the benefit of legal aid.
Article 1319.
Any of the spouses may perform acts aimed at meeting the ordinary needs of the family, entrusted to their care, in accordance with the use of the place and the circumstances of the place.
The debts incurred in the exercise of this power shall be jointly and severally liable for the common property and the property of the spouse who incurs the debt and, subsidiarily, the property of the other spouse.
A person who has provided his own funds to satisfy such needs shall be entitled to be reintegrated in accordance with his matrimonial regime.
Article 1320.
In order to have the rights to habitual housing and furniture for ordinary use of the family, even if such rights belong to only one of the spouses, the consent of both spouses or, where appropriate, judicial authorization shall be required.
The wrong or false expression of the owner on the character of the dwelling shall not prejudice the acquirer in good faith.
Article 1321.
One of the spouses died, the clothes, furniture and goods constituting the trolling of the spouses' common dwelling shall be given to the surviving spouse, without computing him or her.
They shall not be understood as being part of the troweling of jewellery, artistic, historical and other objects of extraordinary value.
Article 1322.
Where the Act requires for an act of administration or provision that one of the spouses acts with the consent of the other, those performed without it and which have not been expressly or tacitly confirmed may be annulled at the request of the spouse whose consent has been omitted or of his heirs.
However, acts free of charge in common property shall be void if the consent of the other spouse is not in such cases.
Article 1323.
Spouses may be transferred by any title property and rights and enter into any contract with each other.
Article 1324.
In order to prove between spouses that certain property is the property of one of them, the confession of the other will be sufficient, but such confession alone will not prejudice the forced heirs of the confessor, or creditors, whether of the community or of each of the spouses.
CHAPTER II
From marriage capitulations
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 1325.
In matrimonial capitulations, grantors may stipulate, modify or replace the economic regime of their marriage or any other provisions thereof.
Article 1326.
Marriage capitulations may be granted before or after the marriage is concluded.
Article 1327.
For its validity, capitulations must be recorded in public deed.
Article 1328.
Any provision contrary to the Laws or to good morals or limiting the equal rights of each spouse shall be null and void.
Article 1329.
An unemancipated minor who may be married under the Act may grant capitulations, but shall need the consent and consent of his parents or guardian, unless he agrees only to the separation or participation regime.
Article 1330.
(Deleted)
Article 1331.
In order for the modification of marriage capitulations to be valid, it must be carried out with the assistance and assistance of the persons involved as grantors if they live and the modification affects the rights granted by such persons.
Article 1332.
The existence of amending agreements in previous capitulations shall be indicated by note in the deed containing the above stipulation and shall be recorded by the Notary in the copies it issues.
Article 1333.
Any registration of marriage in the Civil Registry shall mention, where appropriate, any marriage capitulations granted, as well as any covenants, judicial decisions and other acts that change the property regime of the marriage. If they or these affect real estate, the Property Registry shall take account of the manner and effects provided for in the Mortgage Act.
Article 1334.
All that is stipulated in capitulations under the assumption of future marriage shall be null and void if it is not contracted within one year.
Article 1335.
The invalidity of marriage capitulations shall be governed by the general rules of contracts. The consequences of the annulment shall not prejudice bona fide third parties.
CHAPTER III
Marriage donations
Article 1336.
It is a marriage gift that any person makes, before it is celebrated, in consideration of the marriage and in favour of one or both spouses.
Article 1337.
These donations are governed by the ordinary rules as soon as they are not modified by the following articles.
Article 1338.
An unemancipated minor who may be married under the Act may also make donations on the basis of his marriage in marriage capitulations or outside marriage, with the authorization of his parents or guardian. In order to accept them, the provisions of Title II of Book III of this Code shall be applied.
Article 1339.
The property donated jointly to the spouses shall belong to both spouses on an undivided basis and in equal parts, unless otherwise provided by the donor.
Article 1340.
A person who dies or promises on the basis of marriage shall be obliged to be healed only by virtue of eviction or hidden vices if he has acted in bad faith.
Article 1341.
By reason of marriage, the future spouses may donate present property.
Likewise, future property may be donated before marriage in capitulations, only for the case of death, and to the extent of the provisions concerning the tested succession.
Article 1342.
Grants on the basis of marriage shall be terminated if they are not contracted within one year.
Article 1343.
These donations will be revocable for common causes, except for the survival or survival of children.
In those granted by third parties, non-compliance with charges, in addition to any other specific charges to which the donation might have been subordinated, the annulment of marriage for any reason, separation and divorce shall be considered if the giving spouse is attributable, according to the judgment, to the facts that caused them.
In those granted by the spouses, the annulment of the marriage, in addition to the specific ones, shall be recognized if the donor has acted in bad faith. In addition to the legal circumstances, it shall be considered that the donor is responsible for the disinheritment of article 855 or is liable, according to the judgement, for the cause of separation or divorce.
CHAPTER IV
From the society of profits
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Section 1.a General provisions
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 1344.
Through the partnership of joint ventures, the earnings or benefits obtained by any of them, which will be attributed to them in half upon dissolution, are made common for the spouses.
Article 1345.
The society of joint ventures shall begin at the time of the celebration of the marriage or, subsequently, at the time of agreement in capitulations.
Section 2.a: Private and common property
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 1346.
They are the property of each of the spouses:
1. The property, animals and rights that belonged to him at the beginning of society.
2. Those acquired later by free title.
3. Those acquired at the expense or in replacement of private property.
4. Acquired by right of withdrawal belonging to only one of the spouses.
5. Property and property rights inherent in the person and non-communicable persons living in the State.
6. Compensation for damages inflicted on the person of one of the spouses or his or her property.
7. Clothing and articles of personal use that are not of extraordinary value.
8. The instruments necessary for the exercise of the profession or occupation, except where they are an integral part or belongings of an establishment or exploitation of a common character.
The assets referred to in paragraphs 4 and 8 shall not lose their proprietary status on the ground that their acquisition was made with common funds; but in this case, the company shall be the creditor of the spouse who owns the property for the value satisfied.
Article 1347.
These are joint property:
1. Those obtained by the work or industry of either of the spouses.
2. The fruits, income or interest produced by both private and joint property.
3. Those acquired for a consideration at the expense of the common flow, either the acquisition is made for the community or for only one of the spouses.
4. Those acquired by right of withdrawal of a gainful character, even if they were acquired by private funds, in which case the company shall be liable to the spouse for the value satisfied.
5. Enterprises and establishments founded during the life of the company by either of the spouses at the expense of the common property. If private capital and common capital are involved in the formation of the undertaking or establishment, the provisions of Article 1,354 shall apply.
Article 1348.
Provided that an amount or credit payable over a number of years belongs privately to one of the spouses, the sums collected during the marriage shall not be communautaires, but shall be estimated as the capital of either spouse, depending on the person to whom the credit belongs.
Article 1349.
The right of usufruct or pension, belonging to one of the spouses, shall be part of their own property; but the fruits, pensions or interest earned during the marriage shall be joint property.
Article 1350.
Livestocks which at the dissolution of the company exceed the number contributed by each of the spouses in a private capacity shall be recognized as property.
Article 1351.
Earnings obtained by either spouse in the game or those derived from other causes that exempt from restitution shall belong to the joint-stock company.
Article 1352.
The new shares or other securities or social shares subscribed as a result of ownership of other private property shall also be proprietary. The amounts obtained by the alienation of the right to subscribe shall also be the same.
If the subscription is paid in common funds or if the shares are issued out of benefits, the value satisfied will be refunded.
Article 1353.
Property donated or left in will to the spouses together and without special designation of parties, constant the society, shall be understood as joint property, provided that the liberality was accepted by both and the donor or testator did not arrange otherwise.
Article 1354.
Property acquired by way of price or consideration, partly beneficial and partly proprietary, shall be undivided to the joint venture and to the spouse or spouses in proportion to the value of the respective contributions.
Article 1355.
The spouses may, by mutual agreement, attribute the status of joint property to property they acquire for a consideration during marriage, whatever the origin of the price or consideration and the manner and time limits in which it is satisfied.
If the acquisition is made jointly and without the allocation of quotas, its willingness to favour the beneficial character of such assets shall be presumed.
Article 1356.
Property acquired by one of the spouses, which is a continuous company for deferred prices, shall be of a beneficial nature if the first instalment is of such a nature, even if the remaining instalments are satisfied by private money. If the first disbursement is of a proprietary nature, the good shall be of this nature.
Article 1357.
Goods purchased in instalments by one of the spouses before the start of the partnership shall always be of a proprietary nature, even if all or part of the deferred price is satisfied with profit money.
Except for housing and family affairs, for which article 1,354 shall apply.
Article 1358.
Where, under this Code, the assets are private or joint, irrespective of the source of the proceeds from which the acquisition is made, the value satisfied at the cost, respectively, of the common or own flow, shall be refunded by returning its updated amount at the time of settlement.
Article 1359.
Buildings, plantations and any other improvements to joint and private property shall be of a corresponding nature to the property to which they relate, without prejudice to the reimbursement of the value satisfied.
However, if the improvement in private property is due to the investment of common funds or to the activity of either spouse, the company shall be entitled to the increase in the value of the assets resulting from the improvement, at the time of the dissolution of the company or the disposal of the improved asset.
Article 1360.
The same rules of the previous article shall apply to property increases incorporated into a holding, business establishment or other type of enterprise.
Article 1361.
Property existing in marriage is presumed to be joint property until proved to belong privately to one of the spouses.
Section 3.a. On the liabilities and liabilities of the joint venture
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 1362.
The expenses incurred by the joint venture shall be the responsibility of the joint venture for any of the following:
1. The maintenance of the family, the feeding and education of the common children and the care of provision adapted to the uses and circumstances of the family.
The feeding and education of the children of only one of the spouses shall be provided by the society of joint ventures when they live together in the family home. Otherwise, the costs arising from these items shall be borne by the joint venture, but shall result in repayment at the time of liquidation.
2.a The acquisition, possession and enjoyment of common property.
3.a The ordinary administration of the property of either spouse.
4.a Regular exploitation of business or the performance of the profession, art or trade of each spouse.
Article 1363.
The amounts donated or promised by both spouses by mutual agreement shall also be the responsibility of the company, if they have not agreed to be satisfied with the private property of one of them in whole or in part.
Article 1364.
A spouse who has contributed property that is proprietary to the expenses or payments that are the responsibility of the company shall be entitled to be reinstated from the value at the expense of the common property.
Article 1365.
The joint property shall be liable directly to the creditor of the debts incurred by a spouse:
1. In the exercise of domestic authority or the management or disposition of joints, which by law or by chapter corresponds to him.
2. In the exercise of the profession, art or trade or in the ordinary administration of the property itself.
Article 1366.
The non-contractual obligations of a spouse arising out of his or her actions for the benefit of the conjugal company or in the administration of the property shall be the responsibility and responsibility of the spouse, except if they are due to the wrongfulness or grave fault of the debtor spouse.
Article 1367.
The joint property shall in any case be liable for the obligations undertaken by the two spouses jointly or by one of them with the express consent of the other.
Article 1368.
The joint property of the obligations of only one of the spouses in the event of de facto separation shall also be liable for the maintenance, provision and education costs of the children in charge of the joint venture.
Article 1369.
The debts of a spouse, which are also debts of the company, shall also be held jointly and severally liable for the assets of the company.
Article 1370.
For the deferred price of the property acquired by a spouse without the consent of the other spouse, he shall always be liable for the property acquired, without prejudice to the liability of other property under the rules of this Code.
Article 1371.
What is lost and paid during marriage by one of the spouses in any kind of game shall not diminish their respective share of the estates provided that the amount of such loss may be considered moderate according to the use and circumstances of the family.
Article 1372.
What is lost and not paid by one of the spouses in the games in which the law grants action to claim what is earned are solely the debtor's own property.
Article 1373.
Each spouse is liable with his or her personal property for his or her own debts and, if his or her private property is not sufficient to give effect to it, the creditor may apply for the attachment of joint property, which shall be immediately notified to the other spouse and the latter may require that the joint property be replaced by the share of the debtor spouse in the conjugal society, in which case the attachment shall entail the dissolution of the joint property.
If enforcement is carried out on common assets, it shall be held that the debtor spouse has received the value of the shares at the time of payment of the shares with other own funds or at the time of liquidation of the conjugal company.
Article 1374.
After the dissolution referred to in the preceding article, the regime of separation of assets shall apply, unless, within three months, the spouse of the debtor chooses in a public document to start a new joint venture.
Section 4.a on the administration of the joint venture
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 1375.
In the absence of a pact in capitulations, the management and disposition of joint property is jointly the responsibility of the spouses, without prejudice to the provisions of the following articles.
Article 1376.
Where the consent of both spouses is necessary in the performance of administrative acts and one is prevented from giving it, or unreasonably refuses to do so, the judge may provide such a remedy if he finds the petition well founded.
Article 1377.
The consent of both spouses shall be required for the performance of acts of disposition for a valuable purpose on joint property.
If one refuses or is prevented from lending it, the judge may authorize one or more acts of a device when he considers it to be of interest to the family. Exceptionally, it shall agree on such limitations or precautions as it deems appropriate.
Article 1378.
Acts shall be null and void free of charge if the consent of both spouses is not obtained. However, each of them may perform with the common goods usage liberalities.
Article 1379.
Each of the spouses may dispose of half of the joint property by will.
Article 1380.
The testamentary disposition of a good will produce all its effects if it is awarded to the inheritance of the testator. Otherwise, the value it had at the time of death shall be understood as legacies.
Article 1381.
The fruits and profits of the private estates and the profits of either spouse are part of the company's assets and are subject to the burdens and responsibilities of the joint venture. However, each spouse, as administrator of his or her private estate, may dispose of the fruits and products of his or her property for this purpose alone.
Article 1382.
Each spouse may, without the consent of the other, but always with his knowledge, take as advance the cash sum necessary for the exercise of his profession or the ordinary administration of his property, in accordance with the family's uses and circumstances.
Article 1383.
Spouses must inform each other and periodically about the status and performance of any economic activity of theirs.
Article 1384.
The acts of administration of property and the disposition of money or securities by the spouse in whose name they are or in whose possession they are held shall be valid.
Article 1385.
Credit rights, whatever their nature, shall be exercised by that of the spouses in whose name they appear to be constituted.
Either spouse may exercise the defence of common property and rights by way of action or exception.
Article 1386.
The consent of only one of the spouses shall be sufficient to incur urgent expenses of a necessary nature, even if they are extraordinary.
Article 1387.
The administration and disposition of the property of the joint-stock company shall be transferred by the Ministry of the Law to the spouse appointed as curator of his consort with disabilities, where full powers of representation have been conferred upon him.
Article 1388.
The Courts may grant administration to only one of the spouses if the other spouse is unable to give consent or has left the family or there is de facto separation.
Article 1389.
The spouse to whom the administration falls under the provisions of the two preceding articles shall have full powers to do so, unless the judge, when he considers it to be of interest to the family, establishes caution or limitations.
In any case, in order to carry out acts of disposition on real estate, commercial establishments, precious objects or transferable securities, except the right of preferential subscription, you will need judicial authorization.
Article 1390.
If, as a result of an act of administration or disposition carried out by only one of the spouses, the latter has obtained a benefit or profit exclusively for him or caused damage to the company, he shall be liable to the company for the amount of the damage, even if the other spouse does not contest the effectiveness of the act.
Article 1391.
Where the spouse has committed an act in breach of the rights of his spouse, the provisions of the preceding article shall apply in any event and, in addition, if the acquirer has acted in bad faith, the act shall be terminated.
Section 5.a Dissolution and liquidation of the joint venture
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 1392.
The partnership shall conclude:
1. When marriage is dissolved.
2nd When declared null.
3rd When the legal separation of the spouses is agreed.
4. Where the spouses agree on a different economic regime in the manner provided for in this Code.
Article 1393.
The joint venture shall also be terminated by a court decision at the request of one of the spouses in one of the following cases:
1. If support measures involving full representation in the property sphere have been ordered by the court in respect of the other spouse, if he has been declared absent or in competition, or sentenced for abandonment of the family. For the judicial authority to agree to the dissolution, it is sufficient for the spouse requesting the dissolution to present the corresponding judicial decision.
2. To come to the other spouse by itself carrying out acts of disposition or property management that involve fraud, damage or danger to the rights of the other in the society.
3. To be separated in fact more than one year by mutual agreement or by abandonment of home.
4. Failure to comply seriously and repeatedly to report on the progress and performance of their economic activities.
With regard to the dissolution of the company by the seizure of the part of one of the spouses for their own debts, the provisions of this Code shall be in particular.
Article 1394.
The effects of the dissolution provided for in the preceding article shall occur from the date on which it is agreed. If proceedings are brought against the case of dissolution, the proceedings initiated, the inventory shall be carried out, and the judge shall take the necessary measures to administer the case, requiring judicial leave for all acts exceeding the ordinary administration.
Article 1395.
Where the partnership is dissolved by nullity of the marriage and one of the spouses has been declared in bad faith, the other may choose to settle the matrimonial regime according to the rules of this Section or the provisions relating to the partnership scheme, and the party in bad faith shall not be entitled to participate in the earnings obtained by his spouse.
Article 1396.
Dissolved the company will proceed to its liquidation, which will begin with an inventory of the asset and liabilities of the company.
Article 1397.
The following shall be understood in the asset:
1. The joint property existing at the time of dissolution.
2. The updated amount of the value of the assets when they were disposed of by illegal or fraudulent business if they had not been recovered.
3. The updated amount of the amounts paid by the company which were the responsibility of only one spouse and in general those which constitute claims of the company against it.
Article 1398.
The liability of the company shall consist of the following items:
1.a The outstanding debts owed by the company.
2.a The updated amount of the value of the proprietary property when its restitution is to be made in cash for having been spent in the interest of the company.
The same rule shall apply to damage to such property resulting from its use for the benefit of the company.
3.a The updated amount of the amounts which, having been paid by only one of the spouses, were the responsibility of the company and, in general, those constituting the spouses ' claims against the company.
Article 1399.
Once the inventory is completed, the company's debts will be paid first, starting with those that will in any case have preference.
For the rest, if the inventory is not sufficient, the provisions for the competing and priority of claims shall be observed.
Article 1400.
Where there is insufficient cash for the payment of debts, awards of joint property may be made for that purpose, but if any participant or creditor so requests, they shall be disposed of and paid in their amount.
Article 1401.
Until the company's debts have been paid in full, creditors shall retain their claims against the debtor spouse. The non-debtor spouse shall be liable for the assets assigned to him, if properly formulated, judicial or extrajudicial inventory.
If as a result it appears that one of the spouses has paid more than is attributable to him or her, he or she may repeat against the other.
Article 1402.
The creditors of the joint-stock company shall have the same rights in their liquidation as are recognized by the Laws in the division and liquidation of inheritances.
Article 1403.
After payment of the company's debts and charges, the compensations and refunds due to each spouse to the extent of the inventory shall be paid, making the corresponding compensation when the spouse is the debtor of the company.
Article 1404.
After deductions in the inventory that prefix the previous articles, the remainder shall constitute the share of the joint stock, which shall be divided by half between the spouses or their respective heirs.
Article 1405.
If one of the spouses is found at the time of the liquidation of the other's personal creditor, he or she may require that his or her claim be satisfied by granting him or her common property, unless the debtor pays voluntarily.
Article 1406.
Each spouse shall have the right to be included preferably in his or her account, to the extent that the spouse reaches:
1. Property for personal use not included in article 1,346, item 7.
2. The economic exploitation that it effectively manages.
3. The place where he would have been practicing his profession.
4. In the event of the death of the other spouse, the dwelling where he or she had the habitual residence.
Article 1407.
In the cases of numbers 3 and 4 of the preceding article, the spouse may request, at his or her choice, that the property be attributed to him or her in property or that a right of use or room be constituted in his or her favour. If the value of the goods or the right exceeds the value of the successful spouse, the spouse shall pay the difference in money.
Article 1408.
The spouses or, where appropriate, the survivor and children shall be provided with maintenance of the common mass of property while the inventory is being settled and until their assets are handed over to them; but they shall be reduced from it in any part exceeding those which they would have had due for their fruits and incomes.
Article 1409.
Where the settlement of two or more marriages contracted by the same person in order to determine the capital of each company is to be executed simultaneously, all kinds of evidence in the absence of inventories shall be admitted. In case of doubt, the joint ventures will be attributed to the different companies proportionally, taking into account the length of their duration and the property and income of the respective spouses.
Article 1410.
In all matters not covered by this chapter on inventory formation, rules on valuation and sales of goods, division of the flow, awards to shareholders and others not expressly determined, the provisions for the partition and liquidation of the inheritance shall be observed.
CHAPTER V
The participation scheme
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 1411.
Under the scheme of participation, each spouse acquires the right to participate in the profits obtained by his or her spouse during the period during which the scheme has been in force.
Article 1412.
Each spouse is responsible for the administration, enjoyment and free disposal of both the property belonging to him or her at the time of marriage and that which he or she may subsequently acquire by any title.
Article 1413.
In all matters not covered by this chapter, the rules governing the separation of assets shall apply during the term of the participation regime.
Article 1414.
If married persons jointly acquire any property or right, it belongs to them on an ordinary basis.
Article 1415.
The scheme of participation is extinguished in cases where the joint venture is prevented, in application of Articles 1,394 and 1,395.
Article 1416.
A spouse may apply for the termination of the participation scheme if the irregular administration of the other spouse seriously compromises his or her interests.
Article 1417.
After extinction, the earnings will be determined by the differences between the initial and final assets of each spouse.
Article 1418.
The initial assets of each spouse shall be deemed to be:
1. For the property and rights that belonged to him at the beginning of the regime.
2. For those acquired later by inheritance, donation or legacy.
Article 1419.
The obligations of the spouse shall be deducted at the commencement of the scheme and, where appropriate, the successors or the charges inherent in the donation or legacy, as soon as they do not exceed the inherited or donated property.
Article 1420.
If the liability is greater than the asset, there will be no initial equity.
Article 1421.
The assets constituting the original assets shall be estimated according to the status and value they had at the time of commencement of the regime or, where applicable, at the time they were acquired.
The amount of the estimate shall be updated on the day on which the scheme has ceased.
Article 1422.
The final assets of each spouse shall consist of the property and rights of which the spouse is the holder at the time of termination of the regime, with deduction from obligations not yet fulfilled.
Article 1423.
The value of the property which one of the spouses had made available free of charge without the consent of his or her consort shall be included in the final estate, except in the case of usage liberalities.
Article 1424.
The same rule shall apply in respect of acts performed by one of the spouses in violation of the rights of the other.
Article 1425.
The assets constituting the final estate shall be estimated according to the status and value of the property at the time of termination of the regime and those disposed of free or fraudulently, in accordance with the status of the assets on the day of disposal and the value of the assets that they would have had if they had been retained until the day of termination.
Article 1426.
Credits which one of the spouses has against the other, for any title, including by having served or fulfilled the obligations of the latter, shall also be counted in the final estate of the creditor spouse and deducted from the estate of the debtor spouse.
Article 1427.
Where the difference between the final and initial assets of one spouse and another results in a positive result, the spouse whose estate has increased less shall receive half of the difference between his or her own increase and that of the other spouse.
Article 1428.
Where only one of the assets produces a positive result, the right of participation shall consist, for the non-owning spouse, of half of that increase.
Article 1429.
The establishment of the scheme may involve participation other than that laid down in the two preceding articles, but shall be equal in proportion to both assets and to both spouses.
Article 1430.
Participation may not be agreed on other than by half if there are non-common descendants.
Article 1431.
The participation credit must be satisfied in money. In the event of serious difficulties for immediate payment, the judge may grant a postponement, provided that the debt and its legal interests are not more than three years old and are sufficiently guaranteed.
Article 1432.
The participation claim may be paid by the award of specific assets, by agreement of the interested parties or if granted by the judge at the debtor's reasoned request.
Article 1433.
If there are no assets in the debtor estate to give effect to the right to share in profits, the creditor spouse may challenge dispositions that have been made free of charge without his consent and those that have been made in violation of his rights.
Article 1434.
The challenge actions referred to in the preceding article shall expire two years after the termination of the participation scheme and shall not be brought against the acquirers for a consideration and in good faith.
CHAPTER VI
The property separation regime
Text added, published 19/05/1981, in force from 08/06/1981.
Article 1435.
There will be separation of property between the spouses.
1. When they had so agreed.
2. Where the spouses have entered into matrimonial capitulations which shall not be governed between them by the partnership of joint property, without expressing the rules by which their property shall be governed.
3. When marriage is extinguished, the partnership or the system of participation, unless by the will of the persons concerned they are replaced by a different regime.
Article 1436.
The claim for the separation of property and the final judgment in which it is declared must be entered and registered, respectively, in the appropriate Property Registry, if it falls to immovable property. The final judgement shall also be entered in the Civil Registry.
Article 1437.
In the separation regime, each spouse shall have the property which he or she had at the time of the separation and which he or she subsequently acquires by any title. Each shall also be responsible for the administration, enjoyment and free disposal of such property.
Article 1438.
Spouses shall contribute to the maintenance of the burden of marriage. In the absence of an agreement, they shall do so in proportion to their respective economic resources. The work for the house will be counted as contribution to the charges and will give the right to obtain a compensation that the judge will indicate, in the absence of agreement, to the extinction of the separation regime.
Article 1439.
If one of the spouses has administered or managed property or interests of the other, he or she shall have the same obligations and responsibilities as a representative, but shall not be held accountable for the fruits received and consumed, except where it is established that he or she has invested them in care other than the lifting of the marriage charges.
Article 1440.
The obligations undertaken by each spouse shall be the sole responsibility of each spouse.
With regard to the obligations assumed in the exercise of ordinary domestic power, both spouses shall be liable in the manner determined by articles 1,319 and 1,438 of this Code.
Article 1441.
Where it is not possible to prove to which of the spouses any good or right belongs, it shall be the responsibility of both in half.
Article 1442.
The provisions of the insolvency law shall apply when a spouse has been declared in competition.
Article 1443.
The separation of property decreed shall not be altered by the reconciliation of the spouses in the event of personal separation or by the disappearance of any other cause that would have motivated it.
Article 1444.
Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, spouses may agree in capitulations to re-rule the same rules as before the separation of property.
The capitulations shall state the assets which each person contributes again and shall be considered proprietary, even if, in whole or in part, they had been beneficial before the liquidation carried out because of the separation.
TITLE IV
The contract of purchase and sale
CHAPTER I
The nature and form of this contract
Article 1445.
By the contract of purchase and sale one of the contracting parties is obliged to deliver a certain thing and the other to pay for it a certain price, in money or sign representing it.
Article 1446.
If the price of the sale consists of part of money and part of something else, the contract shall be qualified by the express intention of the contracting parties. Not knowing this, it will be taken as a swap, if the value of the thing given in part of the price exceeds that of the money or its equivalent; and by sale in the opposite case.
Article 1447.
For the price to be held, it will be sufficient for it to be so with reference to something else certain, or for its indication to be left to the discretion of a particular person.
If the latter cannot or does not wish to indicate this, the contract will be ineffective.
Article 1448.
The price shall also be taken for the sale of securities, grains, liquids and other consumables, when it is indicated that the thing sold had on a given day, stock exchange or market, or is set at a level greater or lower than the price of the day, stock exchange or market, provided that it is true.
Article 1449.
The indication of the price may never be left to the discretion of one of the contracting parties.
Article 1450.
The sale shall be made between buyer and seller, and shall be compulsory for both, if they have agreed on the subject matter of the contract and on the price, even if neither has been delivered.
Article 1451.
The promise to sell or buy, in conformity with the thing and the price, shall entitle the contracting parties to claim reciprocal performance of the contract.
Provided that the promise of purchase and sale cannot be fulfilled, the provisions on obligations and contracts in this book shall apply to the seller and buyer, as appropriate.
Article 1452.
The damage or profit of the thing sold, after completion of the contract, shall be regulated by the provisions of articles 1,096 and 1,182.
This rule shall apply to the sale of consumables made in isolation and for a single price, or without regard to their weight, number or measure.
If the consumables are sold for a price fixed in relation to weight, number or measure, the risk shall not be attributed to the buyer until they have been weighed, counted or measured, unless the buyer has become in arrears.
Article 1453.
The sale made as a test or proof of the thing sold, and the sale of the things that it is customary to taste or try before receiving them, will be presumed always made under suspensive condition.
Article 1454.
If they have mediated or signaled in the contract of purchase and sale, the contract may be terminated by the buyer closing to lose them, or the seller returning them duplicated.
Article 1455.
The expenses of granting deeds shall be the seller's account, and those of the first copy and the others after sale shall be the buyer's account, unless otherwise agreed.
Article 1456.
Forced alienation on the basis of public utility shall be governed by the provisions of special laws.
CHAPTER II
The ability to buy or sell
Article 1457.
The contract of purchase and sale may be concluded by all persons to whom this Code authorizes to bind themselves, except for the modifications contained in the following articles.
Article 1458.
The spouses may sell property to each other.
Article 1459.
They may not acquire by purchase, even at public or judicial auctions, by themselves or by any intermediary:
1. Those who perform the position of guardian or supporting functions, the property of the person or persons they represent.
2. The agents, the property for whose administration or disposal they were responsible.
3. The executors, the goods entrusted to them.
4. Public employees, property of the State, municipalities, peoples and establishments also public, for whose administration they are responsible.
This provision shall apply to judges and experts who in any way intervene in the sale.
5. The judges, judges, individuals of the Public Prosecutor ' s Office, registrars of courts and courts and officials of justice, the property and rights in dispute before the Tribunal, in whose jurisdiction or territory they exercised their respective functions, extending this prohibition to the act of acquisition by assignment.
This rule shall be exempt in the case of hereditary actions between joint heirs, assignment in payment of receivables, or security of the property they hold.
The prohibition contained in this number 5 shall include the lawyers and attorneys in respect of property and rights which are the subject of a dispute in which they intervene for their profession and office.
CHAPTER III
The effects of the purchase and sale contract when the thing sold has been lost
Article 1460.
If at the time of the sale the object of the sale was lost in its entirety, the contract shall be terminated.
But if it had been lost only in part, the buyer may choose between withdrawing from the contract or claiming the existing party, paying its price in proportion to the total agreed upon.
CHAPTER IV
Obligations of the seller
Section 1.a. General provision
Article 1461.
The seller is obliged to deliver and clean up the item under sale.
Section 2.a of the delivery of the thing sold
Article 1462.
The sale shall be deemed to be delivered when the buyer is in possession and in possession.
Where the sale is made by public deed, the granting of the deed shall be equivalent to the delivery of the object of the contract, if the same deed does not result or is clearly deduced to the contrary.
Article 1463.
Apart from the cases expressed in the preceding article, the delivery of the movable property shall be effected: by the delivery of the keys to the place or place where they are stored or stored, and by the agreement or agreement of the contracting parties alone, if the thing sold cannot be transferred to the buyer at the moment of sale, or if the buyer already had it in his possession for some other reason.
Article 1464.
In respect of tangible property, the provisions of article 1,462, paragraph 2, shall apply. In any other case in which the latter does not apply, delivery shall be understood to mean the possession by the buyer of the titles of belonging, or the use by the buyer of his right, and shall be deemed to have been consented by the seller.
Article 1465.
The costs for the delivery of the thing sold shall be the seller's account, and those for its carriage or transfer of charge from the buyer, except in the case of special stipulation.
Article 1466.
The seller shall not be obliged to deliver the thing sold if the buyer has not paid the price or a deadline for payment has not been indicated in the contract.
Article 1467.
Nor shall the seller be required to deliver the sold thing when it has been agreed to defer or terminate payment, if after the sale it is discovered that the buyer is insolvent, so that the seller is at imminent risk of losing the price.
Except for the case where the buyer is required to pay within the agreed time limit.
Article 1468.
The seller must deliver the thing sold in the state in which it was found upon completion of the contract.
All fruits will belong to the buyer from the day the contract was perfected.
Article 1469.
The obligation to deliver the thing sold includes the obligation to place in the buyer's possession everything expressed in the contract, by the following rules:
If the sale of immovable property has been made with an expression of its place, by reason of a price per unit of measurement or number, the seller is obliged to deliver to the buyer, if the buyer so requires, all that has been expressed in the contract; but if this is not possible, the buyer may choose between a proportional reduction in the price or termination of the contract, provided that, in the latter case, the reduction of the price attributed to the property does not fall from one tenth of the place.
The same will be done, even if it is the same, if any part of it is not of the quality expressed in the contract.
Termination, in this case, shall take place only at the will of the buyer, if the least value of the thing sold exceeds one tenth of the agreed price.
Article 1470.
If, in the case of the preceding article, a greater place or number in the property than those expressed in the contract, the buyer is obliged to pay the excess price if the greater place or number does not exceed the twentieth part of those mentioned in the same contract; but if they exceed that twentieth part, the buyer may choose to satisfy the greater value of the property or to withdraw from the contract.
Article 1471.
In the sale of a property, made by flat price and not by reason of a unit of measure or number, there shall be no increase or decrease in it, even if there is a greater or lesser place or number of those expressed in the contract.
The same shall apply when two or more properties are sold for a single price, but if, in addition to expressing the boundaries, which are indispensable in any disposal of immovable property, their place or number are designated in the contract, the seller is obliged to deliver everything within the same boundaries, even if it exceeds the place or number expressed in the contract; and, if it is not able, it shall suffer a reduction in the price, proportional to what is missing in the place or number, unless the contract is cancelled by the buyer who fails to deliver what was stipulated.
Article 1472.
Actions arising from the three preceding articles shall be prescribed within six months, counted from the day of delivery.
Article 1473.
If the same thing has been sold to different buyers, the property will be transferred to the person who first took possession of it in good faith, if it is furniture.
If it is property, the property shall belong to the purchaser who has previously registered it in the Register.
Where there is no inscription, the property shall belong to whomever in good faith is first in possession; and, failing this, to whom it is given the oldest title, provided that there is good faith.
Section 3.a Sanitation
Article 1474.
Under the reorganisation referred to in article 1,461, the seller shall respond to the buyer:
1. Legal and peaceful possession of the thing sold.
2. Of the vices or hidden defects you have.
§ 1. Remediation in the event of eviction
Article 1475.
Eviction shall take place when the buyer is deprived, by final judgement and under a pre-purchase right, of all or part of the thing purchased.
The seller shall be liable for the avoidance even if nothing has been expressed in the contract.
Contracting parties may, however, increase, diminish or terminate this legal obligation of the seller.
Article 1476.
Any agreement that exempts the seller from being held accountable for the eviction shall be void, provided that there is bad faith on its part.
Article 1477.
Where the buyer has waived the right to sanitation in the event of avoidance, whichever is the case, the seller shall deliver only the price of the thing sold at the time of the eviction, unless the buyer has made the waiver with knowledge of the risks of the eviction and subject to its consequences.
Article 1478.
Where the provision of sanitation has been made or where nothing has been agreed on this point, if the avoidance has been made, the buyer shall have the right to require from the seller:
1. The refund of the price of the thing sold at the time of the eviction, whether greater or less than the price of the sale.
2. The fruits or yields, if he has been sentenced to surrender them to the one who has overcome him in judgment.
3. The costs of the proceedings which have led to the avoidance and, where appropriate, those of the seller for the recovery.
4. The costs of the contract, if paid by the buyer.
5.o Damages and interests and expenses of voluntary or pure recreation or ornate, if sold in bad faith.
Article 1479.
If the buyer loses, by the effect of the avoidance, a part of the thing sold of such importance in relation to everything that without that party had not bought it, it may demand the termination of the contract; but with the obligation to return the thing without any charges other than those that it had when acquiring it.
The same shall be observed when two or more items are sold together for a flat price, or particular price, for each of them, if it is clearly established that the buyer would not have bought one without the other.
Article 1480.
Remedies may not be required until the final judgment has been handed down condemning the buyer to the loss of the purchased property or part thereof.
Article 1481.
The seller shall be obliged to make appropriate relief, provided it is proven that it was notified of the demand for avoidance at the buyer's request. In the absence of notification, the seller shall not be obliged to repair.
Article 1482.
The defendant buyer shall request, within the term of the Civil Procedure Act states in response to the claim that the claim is notified to the seller(s) as soon as possible.
The notification shall be made as the same law provides for the placement of the defendants.
The term of defence for the buyer shall be suspended in the meantime, unless the time limits for the appearance and the reply to the claim are indicated to the seller or sellers, which shall be the same as those laid down for all respondents. Civil Procedure Actfrom the notification provided for in the first subparagraph of this Article.
If the eviction summonses do not appear in time and form, the term to respond to the claim shall continue with respect to the buyer.
Article 1483.
If the property sold was taxed, not to mention the deed, with any non-apparent burden or servitude, of such a nature that it should be presumed would not have been acquired by the buyer if it had known it, it may request the termination of the contract, unless it prefers the corresponding compensation.
For one year, from the time the deed is granted, the buyer may take the decision or apply for compensation.
After the year, he may claim compensation only within an equal period, from the day on which he has discovered the burden or servitude.
§ 2nd Sanitation due to defects or hidden charges of the thing sold
Article 1484.
1. The seller shall be obliged to remedy the hidden defects of the thing sold, if they make it unfit for the use to which it is intended, or if they diminish in such a way that, had the buyer known them, he would not have acquired it or would have given less price for it; but he shall not be liable for the manifest defects or for those which are not, if the buyer is an expert who, by reason of his trade or profession, should have easily known them.
2. The seller of an animal is liable to the buyer for non-compliance with its duties of veterinary care and care necessary to ensure its health and well-being, if the animal suffers an injury, illness or significant alteration of the conduct that originates prior to the sale.
Article 1485.
The seller responds to the buyer of the sanitation for the defects or hidden defects of the animal or the thing sold, even if it ignores them.
This provision shall not apply where otherwise provided, and the seller shall ignore the defects or defects hidden from the sale.
Article 1486.
In the cases of the two preceding articles, the buyer may choose to withdraw from the contract, paying the costs he paid, or reducing a proportional amount of the price, in the opinion of experts.
If the seller knew the defects or hidden defects of the thing sold and did not express them to the buyer, the buyer will have the same option and will also be compensated for the damages, if he chooses to terminate.
Article 1487.
If the thing sold is lost by the effect of the hidden vices, knowing them the seller, it will suffer the loss, and it will have to refund the price and pay the expenses of the contract, with the damages. If you did not know them, you should only refund the price and pay the costs of the contract paid by the buyer.
Article 1488.
If the thing sold had some vice hidden at the time of sale, and is later lost by chance or by the buyer, it may claim from the seller the price it paid, with the reduction of the value that the thing had at the time it was lost.
If the seller acted in bad faith, it shall pay the buyer the damages and interest.
Article 1489.
In judicial sales there will never be liability for damages; but everything else provided for in the preceding articles.
Article 1490.
Actions arising from the provisions of the preceding five articles shall be extinguished within six months, counted from the date of delivery of the thing sold.
Article 1491.
Selling two or more animals together, whether at a flat price, or pointing it to each one of them, each one's redemptive vice will only lead to their redemptive, and not to the others', unless it appears that the buyer would not have bought the healthy or healthy without the vicious.
The latter is presumed when buying a shot, yunta, pair or game, even if a separate price has been indicated for each of the animals that make up it.
Article 1492.
The provisions of the preceding article concerning the sale of animals are also understood to apply to that of things.
Article 1493.
The recovery for hidden defects of animals intended for a productive purpose shall not take place in sales made at fair or at public auction, or where they are intended for slaughter or killing in accordance with applicable law, except in the case provided for in the following Article.
Article 1494.
Livestock and animals suffering from contagious diseases shall not be subject to the sale contract. Any contract made in respect of them shall be void.
The contract for the sale of livestock and animals shall also be void, if, by expressing in the same contract the service or use to be acquired, they prove useless to provide it.
Article 1495.
Where the hidden vice of animals, even if optional recognition has been carried out, is of such a nature that expertise is not sufficient for their discovery, redhibatory shall be recognized.
But if the teacher, out of ignorance or bad faith, stops discovering or manifesting it, he will be liable for the damages.
Article 1496.
The re-inhibition action based on the defects or defects of the animals shall be brought within forty days of delivery to the buyer, unless, by use in each locality, longer or shorter periods are established.
This action in the sale of animals may be exercised only in respect of defects and defects of animals which are determined by law or local usages.
Article 1497.
If the animal dies within three days of purchase, the seller will be liable, provided that the disease that caused the death existed before the contract, in the opinion of the doctors.
Article 1498.
Resolved the sale, the animal must be returned in the state in which it was sold and delivered, the buyer being responsible for any deterioration due to its negligence, and not resulting from vice or redhibatory defect.
Article 1499.
In the sale of animals and livestock with re-inhibitory defects, the buyer shall also enjoy the power set out in Article 1.486; but he shall use it within the same term as for the exercise of the re-inhibitory action is indicated respectively.
CHAPTER V
Obligations of the buyer
Article 1500.
The buyer is obliged to pay the price of the thing sold in the time and place set by the contract.
If they have not been fixed, payment shall be made in the time and place of delivery of the sold item.
Article 1501.
The buyer shall have interest for the time between delivery of the item and payment of the price, in the following three cases:
1. If so agreed.
2. If the thing sold and delivered produces fruit or income.
3. If it has been established in arrears, in accordance with article 1,100.
Article 1502.
If the buyer is disturbed in the possession or domain of the acquired thing, or has a well-founded fear of being disturbed by a claim or mortgage, he may suspend payment of the price until the seller has ceased the disturbance or danger, unless the refund of the price in his case is secured, or it has been stipulated that, notwithstanding any contingency of that kind, the buyer shall be obliged to verify the payment.
Article 1503.
If the seller has good reason to fear loss of the property sold and the price, he may immediately promote the resolution of the sale.
If this ground does not exist, the provisions of Article 1.124 shall be observed.
Article 1504.
In the sale of immovable property, even if it had been stipulated that for failure to pay the price within the agreed time the termination of the contract will take place in full, the buyer may pay, even after the expiry of the term, in the meantime it has not been required by court or notarial act. Once the order has been made, the judge may not grant it a new term.
Article 1505.
With regard to movable property, the resolution of the sale shall be given in full right, in the seller's interest, if the buyer, before the expiry of the term fixed for the delivery of the item, has not presented himself to receive it, or, when presented, has not offered the price at the same time, unless the payment of the item had been agreed further delay.
CHAPTER VI
The resolution of the sale
Article 1506.
The sale is resolved by the same causes as all obligations and, in addition, by those expressed in the previous chapters, and by the conventional retract or by the legal.
Section 1.a From conventional retracting
Article 1507.
The conventional withdrawal shall take place when the seller reserves the right to recover the thing sold, with an obligation to comply with the provisions of article 1,518 and the rest of the agreement.
Article 1508.
In the absence of an express agreement, the right referred to in the preceding article shall last four years from the date of the contract.
In the event of a stipulation, the period may not exceed 10 years.
Article 1509.
If the seller does not comply with the requirements of article 1.518, the buyer will irrevocably acquire the domain of the thing sold.
Article 1510.
The seller may bring proceedings against any possessor who brings the buyer's right, even if the second contract does not contain any mention of the treaty retraction, except as provided for in the Mortgage Act in respect of third parties.
Article 1511.
The buyer replaces the seller in all its rights and shares.
Article 1512.
The seller's creditors may not make use of the treaty retraction against the buyer, but after having made an exemption on the seller's assets.
Article 1513.
The buyer with a reverse sale agreement of a part of an undivided estate that acquires the whole of the same in the case of article 404, may oblige the seller to redeem the whole, if the seller wishes to make use of the retract.
Article 1514.
When several, jointly and in a single contract, sell an undivided estate with retro agreement, none of them will be able to exercise this right more than on their respective part.
The same will be observed if the one who has sold a farm on his own has left several heirs, in which case each of these will be able to redeem only the part that he has acquired.
Article 1515.
In the cases of the preceding article, the buyer may require all sellers or joint heirs to agree on the redemption of the whole sold thing; and, if they do not, the buyer may not be obliged to partially withdraw.
Article 1516.
Each of the co-owners of an undivided estate, which had sold its share separately, may exercise, with the same separation, the right to withdraw for its respective portion, and the buyer may not oblige him to redeem the entire estate.
Article 1517.
If the buyer leaves several heirs, the action for withdrawal may not be brought against each other but on its respective part, it may be undivided, or it may have been distributed among them.
But if the inheritance has been divided, and the thing sold has been awarded to one of the heirs, the action of withdrawal may be attempted against him for the whole.
Article 1518.
The seller may not avail itself of the right of withdrawal without refunding the price of the sale to the buyer, and in addition:
1.o The expenses of the contract and any other legitimate payment made for sale.
2.o The necessary and useful expenses made in the thing sold.
Article 1519.
Where there are manifest or born fruits on the farm at the time of sale, no subscription or pro rata shall be made to those at the time of withdrawal.
If there were not at the time of the sale, and there are those at the time of the retraction, they will be apportioned between the retractor and the buyer, giving the buyer the corresponding part as long as he owned the estate in the last year, to count from the sale.
Article 1520.
The seller who recovers the sold thing will receive it free of any charge or mortgage imposed by the buyer, but will be obliged to pass through the leases that the buyer has made in good faith and according to the custom of the place where it is based.
Section 2.a Legal withdrawal
Article 1521.
The legal withdrawal is the right to subrogate, under the same conditions as stipulated in the contract, instead of the one that acquires a thing by purchase or giving in payment.
Article 1522.
The co-owner of a common thing may use the retract in the case of alienating to a stranger the part of all other owners or of any of them.
When two or more co-owners want to use the retract, they will only be able to do so pro rata to the portion they have in the common thing.
Article 1523.
The right of withdrawal shall also be granted to the owners of neighbouring lands in the case of the sale of a rustic farm whose size does not exceed one hectare.
The right referred to in the preceding paragraph does not apply to adjacent lands separated by streams, ditches, ravines, roads and other apparent servitudes for the benefit of other farms.
If two or more adjacents use the retract at the same time, it will be preferred for them to own the adjacent land of lesser size; and if the two had the same, the first to request it.
Article 1524.
The right of legal withdrawal may not be exercised except within nine days, counted from registration in the Register, and in its absence, from the time the retractor has known of the sale.
The withdrawal of community members excludes that of adjacent members.
Article 1525.
The provisions of Articles 1.511 and 1.518 shall be taken into account in the legal retraction.
CHAPTER VII
Transfer of claims and other incorporeal rights
Article 1526.
The assignment of a receivable, right or action does not take effect against a third party but only after its date is to be taken as certain in accordance with Articles 1.218 and 1.227.
If you refer to a property, from the date of your registration in the Register.
Article 1527.
A debtor who, before being aware of the assignment, satisfies the creditor shall be released from the obligation.
Article 1528.
The sale or assignment of a receivable includes that of all ancillary rights, such as security, mortgage, pledge or privilege.
Article 1529.
The seller in good faith shall be liable for the existence and legitimacy of the claim at the time of sale, unless it has been sold as doubtful; but not for the creditworthiness of the debtor, unless expressly stipulated, or the insolvency was prior and public.
Even in these cases it shall only be liable for the price received and for the costs expressed in the first number of Article 1.518.
The seller of bad faith shall always be liable for the payment of all expenses and damages.
Article 1530.
Where the assignor in good faith has been held liable for the debtor's solvency, and the contracting parties have not stipulated anything on the duration of the liability, the liability shall last only for one year, counted from the assignment of the receivable, if the period of time has expired.
If the claim is due in term or term not yet due, the liability shall cease one year after the expiry of the claim.
If the credit consists of a perpetual income, the liability shall be extinguished at the age of ten, counted from the date of the assignment.
Article 1531.
Whoever sells an inheritance without listing the things it is made up of, will only be obliged to answer for his quality as heir.
Article 1532.
Anyone who sells all of certain rights, incomes or products in the world shall be liable for the legitimacy of the whole in general; but shall not be obliged to restore to each of the parts of which they are composed, except in the case of the total or most of the eviction.
Article 1533.
If the seller has taken some fruit or has received something from the estate he sells, he shall pay it to the buyer if the agreement has not been made otherwise.
Article 1534.
The buyer must, for its part, satisfy the seller all the debts and burdens of the inheritance and the claims it has against it, unless otherwise agreed.
Article 1535.
The debtor is entitled to extinguish the claim by selling the disputed claim, refunding the price it paid, the costs incurred and the interest on the price from the day it was satisfied.
A claim shall be deemed to have been in dispute after the claim relating thereto has been answered.
The debtor may use its right within nine days, counted after the assignee claims payment.
Article 1536.
Except as provided in the preceding article, the sale or sales made are:
1. To a joint heir or holder of the right transferred.
2nd To a creditor in payment of its claim.
3. To the owner of an estate subject to the law of litigation to be transferred.
CHAPTER VIII
General provision
Article 1537.
All provisions of this Title are understood subject to what is determined in respect of immovable property Mortgage Act.
TITLE V
Of the swap
Article 1538.
The swap is a contract by which each of the contracting parties is obliged to give one thing to receive another.
Article 1539.
If one of the contractors had received the thing promised to him in exchange, and proved that it was not proper to the one who gave it, he could not be forced to deliver the one he offered instead, and he would have to return the one he had received.
Article 1540.
A person who loses by eviction the thing received in exchange may choose to recover the one he gave instead, or to claim damages; but he may only use the right to recover the thing which he gave while it remains in the possession of the other permutator, and without prejudice to the rights acquired in the meantime over it in good faith by a third party.
Article 1541.
In all matters not specifically determined in this Title, the exchange shall be governed by the provisions concerning the sale.
TITLE VI
The lease agreement
CHAPTER I
General provisions
Article 1542.
The lease may be for things, or works or services.
Article 1543.
In the leasing of things, one party is obliged to give the other the enjoyment or use of a thing for a certain time and price.
Article 1544.
In the leasing of works or services, one party is obliged to perform one work or to provide the other with a service for a certain price.
Article 1545.
Consumables consumed with the use cannot be covered by this contract.
CHAPTER II
Of the leases of rustic and urban farms
Section 1.a General provisions
Article 1546.
It is called a landlord who is forced to give up the use of the thing, perform the work or provide the service, and a tenant to whom he acquires the use of the thing or the right to the work or service that he is obliged to pay.
Article 1547.
Where the performance of a verbal lease has commenced and evidence of the agreed price is lacking, the lessee shall return the leased thing to the lessor, paying it the regulated price for the time it has enjoyed.
Article 1548.
Parents or guardians, in respect of the property of minors, and administrators of property that do not have special power, may not lease the property for a term exceeding six years.
Article 1549.
In relation to third parties, real estate leases that are not duly registered in the Property Registry shall not take effect.
Article 1550.
Where the lease agreement does not expressly prohibit the lease, the lessee may sublet in whole or in part the lease, without prejudice to his liability for the performance of the contract with the lessor.
Article 1551.
Without prejudice to its obligation to the sub-lender, the sub-lender is bound in favour of the lessor by all acts relating to the use and preservation of the leased thing in the form agreed between the lessor and the lessee.
Article 1552.
The sub-contractor is also obliged to the lessor for the amount of the price agreed upon in the sub-lease which is due at the time of the request, considering that the advance payments have not been made, as they have not been verified in accordance with the custom.
Article 1553.
The provisions on reorganisation contained in the title of the sale apply to the lease.
Where the price is refunded, the reduction shall be made in proportion to the time the lessee has enjoyed the thing.
Section 2.a On the rights and obligations of the lessor and the lessee
Article 1554.
The lessor is obliged to:
1. To deliver to the lessee the subject matter of the contract.
2. To make in it during the lease all necessary repairs in order to keep it in a state of service for the use to which it has been destined.
3. To keep the lessee in the peaceful enjoyment of the lease for the entire duration of the contract.
Article 1555.
The tenant is obliged to:
1. To pay the rental price in the agreed terms.
2. To use the thing leased as a diligent father of a household, to use it for the purpose of covenant; and, in the absence of a covenant, to him who infidels himself with the nature of the thing leased according to the custom of the land.
3.o To pay the expenses incurred by the deed of the contract.
Article 1556.
If the lessor or lessee fails to fulfil the obligations set forth in the preceding articles, they may request termination of the contract and compensation for damages, or only the latter, leaving the contract to remain.
Article 1557.
The landlord cannot vary the form of the leased thing.
Article 1558.
If during the lease it is necessary to make some urgent repair on the leased thing that cannot be deferred until the lease is concluded, the tenant has an obligation to tolerate the work, even if it is very annoying to him, and even if during it he is deprived of a part of the property.
If the repair lasts more than forty days, the price of the lease must be reduced in proportion to the time and the part of the estate of the tenant being deprived.
If the work is of such a nature that it makes the part that the tenant and his family need for their room uninhabitable, the tenant may terminate the contract.
Article 1559.
The tenant is obliged to inform the owner, as soon as possible, of any usurpation or new damage that another person has done or openly prepares in the leased thing.
It is also obliged to inform the owner, with the same urgency, of the need for all repairs covered by the second part of article 1,554.
In both cases, the lessee shall be liable for damages caused by his negligence to the owner.
Article 1560.
The lessor is not obliged to respond to the disturbance of mere fact caused by a third party in the use of the leased property; but the lessee shall have direct action against the disturber.
There is no actual disturbance where the third party, whether the Administration or an individual, has acted under a right incumbent upon it.
Article 1561.
The tenant must return the property, at the end of the lease, as it was received, except for what would have perished or been impaired for time or for inevitable cause.
Article 1562.
In the absence of an expression of the state of the estate at the time of renting it, the law presumes that the tenant received it in good condition, unless proof to the contrary.
Article 1563.
The tenant is responsible for the damage or loss of the leased thing, unless it proves to have been caused without his fault.
Article 1564.
The tenant is responsible for the deterioration caused by the people in his home.
Article 1565.
If the lease has been made for a certain time, the prefixed day ends without the need for a requirement.
Article 1566.
If at the end of the contract, the lessee remains enjoying for fifteen days the leased thing with the lessor's acquiescence, it is understood that there is tacit re-conduction for the time set out in articles 1,577 and 1,581, unless it has preceded the request.
Article 1567.
In the case of tacit renewal, the obligations granted by a third party for the security of the main contract cease in respect of the tacit renewal.
Article 1568.
If the leased thing or any of the contracting parties fails to comply with the provisions, the provisions of Articles 1.182 and 1.183 and of Articles 1.101 and 1.124 shall be observed respectively.(*)
(*) In the first editions of the Civil Code the last two articles were not cited, which appear added both in the Spanish Legislative Collection [Tomo CXLIII, 2nd semester 1889, 1st part, marginal 62] and in the last official edition of the original version.
Article 1569.
The lessor may expel the lessee from the courts for any of the following reasons:
1.a The term conventional or fixed for the duration of leases in Articles 1.577 and 1.581 has expired.
2.a Failure to pay at the agreed price.
3.a Infringement of any of the conditions stipulated in the contract.
4.a To use the leased thing for non-agreed uses or services that cause it to be devalued, or not subject to its use as ordered in the second issue of article 1,555.
Article 1570.
Apart from the cases mentioned in the preceding article, the lessee shall have the right to avail himself of the terms set out in articles 1.577 and 1.581.
Article 1571.
The buyer of a leased property is entitled to terminate the lease in force upon verification of the sale, unless otherwise agreed and provided for in the Mortgage Act.
If the buyer uses this right, the lessee may require that he be allowed to harvest the fruits of the crop corresponding to the current agricultural year and that the seller compensate him for the damages caused to him.
Article 1572.
The buyer with a retracting agreement cannot use the power to evict the tenant until the deadline for using the retract has expired.
Article 1573.
The lessee shall have, with respect to useful and voluntary improvements, the same right as is granted to the usufructuary.
Article 1574.
If nothing has been agreed on the place and time of payment of the lease, the place shall be the provisions of article 1.171; and, as for the time, the custom of the land.
Section 3.a Special provisions for leases of rustic properties
Article 1575.
The lessee shall not be entitled to a reduction of the rent due to the sterility of the leased land or to loss of fruit from ordinary fortuitous cases; but, in the event of loss of more than half the fruits, for extraordinary and unforeseen accidental cases, except always the special agreement to the contrary.
Understand extraordinary fortuitous cases: fire, war, pestilence, unusual flooding, locust, earthquake or other equally unaccustomed, and which the contractors were not rationally able to foresee.
Article 1576.
Nor does the tenant have the right to lower income when the fruits have been lost after being separated from their root or trunk.
Article 1577.
The lease of a rustic property, when it is not fixed its duration, is understood to be made by all the time necessary for the collection of the fruits that the entire rented property will give in a year or can give for once, even if it takes two or more years to obtain them.
That of farmlands, divided into two or more leaves, is understood by as many years as these.
Article 1578.
The outgoing tenant must allow the incoming to use the premises and other means necessary for the preparatory work of the following year; and, reciprocally, the incoming person is obliged to allow the outgoing settler the necessary for the collection and exploitation of the fruits, all in accordance with the custom of the people.
Article 1579.
Tenancy by shareholding of agricultural land, livestock or manufacturing and industrial establishments shall be governed by the provisions relating to the partnership contract and the terms of the parties, and, failing that, by the custom of the land.
Section 4.a Special provisions for the rental of urban land
Article 1580.
In the absence of a special pact, it will be the custom of the people to repair the urban estates that must be the owner's account. In case of doubt they shall be deemed to be his office.
Article 1581.
If no term has been set for the lease, it is understood that it is made by years when an annual rent has been fixed, by months when it is monthly, by days when it is daily.
In any event, the lease ceases, without the need for a special order, after the term has been fulfilled.
Article 1582.
Where the lessor of a house, or part thereof, intended for the room of a family, or of a store, or store, or industrial establishment, rents the furniture, the lease of the furniture shall be understood to mean the length of the lease.
CHAPTER III
Lease of works and services
Section 1.a Service of servants and salaried workers
Article 1583.
This kind of service may be contracted without fixed time, for a certain time, or for a particular work. The lease made for a lifetime is null and void.
Article 1584.
A domestic servant assigned to the personal service of his master, or of his family, for a certain period of time, may be dismissed and dismissed before the term expires; but if the master dismisses the servant without just cause, he must compensate him by paying him the salary earned and the salary of another fifteen days.
The master will be believed, except proof to the contrary:
1.o On the salary of the domestic servant.
2. On payment of wages earned in the current year.
Article 1585.
In addition to what is prescribed in the preceding articles, it will be observed about masters and servants as determined by special laws and regulations.
Article 1586.
Farmers, menestrels, artisans and other wage earners may not, for a certain purpose, say goodbye or be dismissed before the contract has been fulfilled, without just cause.
Article 1587.
The dismissal of servants, menestrels, artisans and other salaried workers, referred to in the preceding articles, entitles them to dispossess the tool and buildings they occupy by reason of their position.
Section 2.a Works for adjustment or flat price
Article 1588.
The execution of a work may be contracted by agreeing that the one who executes it will only put his work or his industry, or that he will also supply the material.
Article 1589.
If the person who hired the work was forced to put the material, he must suffer the loss in the event of the destruction of the work before being delivered, unless there had been a delay in receiving it.
Article 1590.
Anyone who has been forced to put only his work or industry, cannot claim any stipend if the work is destroyed before it has been delivered, unless there has been a delay to receive it, or the destruction has come from the poor quality of the materials, provided he has promptly warned the owner of this circumstance.
Article 1591.
The contractor of a building that was ruined by defects of the construction, is liable for damages if the ruin took place within ten years, counted since the completion of the construction; equal responsibility, and for the same time, will have the architect who directs it, if the ruin is due to vice of the ground or the management.
If the cause is the contractor's failure to comply with the terms of the contract, the action for compensation shall last for 15 years.
Article 1592.
A person who is obliged to do a piece or measure work may require the owner to receive it in part and to pay it in proportion. It is presumed approved and received the satisfied part.
Article 1593.
The architect or contractor who is responsible for a flat adjustment of the construction of a building or other work in view of a plan agreed with the owner of the floor, cannot ask for an increase in price even if the price of the wages or materials has been increased; but may do so when some change has been made in the plan that produces an increase of the work, provided that the owner has given his authorization.
Article 1594.
The owner may, by his own will, desist from the construction of the work even if it has begun, compensating the contractor for all its expenses, work and utility that he may obtain from it.
Article 1595.
When a person has been entrusted with a work because of his personal qualities, the contract is terminated by the death of that person.
In this case, the owner must pay to the heirs of the builder, in proportion to the agreed price, the value of the part of the executed work and the prepared materials, provided that of these materials it has any benefit.
The same will be understood if the one who hired the work cannot finish it for any cause independent of his will.
Article 1596.
The contractor is responsible for the work carried out by the persons occupying the site.
Article 1597.
Those who place their work and materials in a work adjusted uphill by the contractor, have no action against the owner of the contractor but up to the amount that the contractor owes to the contractor when the claim is made.
Article 1598.
Where it is agreed that the work should be done to the satisfaction of the owner, approval, in the absence of conformity, is deemed to be reserved for the relevant expert judgement.
If the person who is to approve the work is a third party, he or she will be at his or her discretion.
Article 1599.
If there is no agreement or custom to the contrary, the price of the work shall be paid upon delivery.
Article 1600.
He who has executed a work on a movable thing has the right to hold it in pledge until it is paid.
Section 3.a: Transport by water and land, both people and things
Article 1601.
Drivers of effects by land or by water are subject, in terms of the preservation and preservation of the things entrusted to them, to the same obligations as for innkeepers are determined in Articles 1,783 and 1,784.
The provisions of this article are without prejudice to the provisions of Commercial Code.
Article 1602.
Drivers also respond to the loss and breakdown of the things they receive, unless they prove that the loss or breakdown has come from fortuitous or force majeure.
Article 1603.
The provisions of these articles are without prejudice to the prevention of special laws and regulations.
TITLE VII
From censuses
CHAPTER I
General provisions
Article 1604.
The census is constituted when some real estate is subject to payment of a fee or annual revenue in remuneration of a capital received in money, or of full or less full control that is transmitted of the same property.
Article 1605.
The census is very interesting when one person gives to another the useful domain of a farm, reserving the direct and the right to receive an annual pension from the enfiteuta in recognition of this same domain.
Article 1606.
The census is recorded when the censatario imposes on a property of his property the tax of the canon or pension that is obliged to pay the censualist for the capital that he receives from it in money.
Article 1607.
The census is reserved when a person gives to another person full control of a property, reserving the right to receive an annual pension on the same property to be paid by the censatario.
Article 1608.
It is of the nature of the census that the transfer of capital or of the immovable thing is perpetual or for an indefinite time; however, the censatary may redeem the census at his will even if it is agreed otherwise, being this provision applicable to the censuses that exist today.
It may be agreed, however, that the redemption of the census shall not take place during the life of the censualist or of a particular person, or that it may not be redeemed in a number of years, which shall not exceed twenty in the consignor, nor sixty in the reserve and enphyteutic.
Article 1609.
In order to effect redemption, the censatario must notify the censualist one year in advance or anticipate payment of an annual pension.
Article 1610.
Censuses cannot be partially redeemed except by virtue of an express agreement.
Nor can they be redeemed against the will of the censualist, without being aware of the payment of pensions.
Article 1611.
For the redemption of the censuses constituted before the promulgation of this Code, if the capital is not known, it shall be regulated by the amount resulting from the calculation of the pension at 3 per 100.
If the pension is paid in fruit, the latter shall be estimated, in order to determine the capital, for the average price they would have had in the last five years.
The provisions of this article shall not apply to fora, sub-forums, surface rights and any other similar charges, in which the principle of redemption of domains shall be regulated by a special law.
Article 1612.
The expenses incurred for the redemption and release of the census shall be borne by the censatary, except for those caused by reckless opposition, in the opinion of the Tribunals.
Article 1613.
The pension or registration fee shall be determined by the parties when the contract is awarded.
It may consist of money or fruits.
Article 1614.
Pensions shall be paid within the agreed time limits; and, in the absence of an agreement, if they consist of money, for years expired, from the date of the contract, and, if in fruit, at the end of the collection.
Article 1615.
If the place of payment of the pensions has not been designated in the contract, this obligation shall be fulfilled where the property taxed by the census is located, provided that the census-maker or his proxy has his or her domicile in the municipality of the same town. Not having it, and if the censatary, at the domicile of the censatary will be made payment.
Article 1616.
The censualist, at the time of the receipt of any pension, may require the censatary to give him a receipt stating that the payment has been made.
Article 1617.
Farms taxed with censuses may be transferred for a costly or lucrative purpose, as may the right to receive a pension.
Article 1618.
Farms taxed by census may not be divided between two or more persons without the express consent of the censualist, even if they are acquired by inheritance.
When the census holder permits division, the portion of the census with which each portion will be taxed shall be designated with his consent, constituting so many different censuses as to be the portions in which the estate is divided.
Article 1619.
When an attempt is made to award the land taxed by census to several heirs, and the censualist does not consent to the division, it will be put to tender among them.
In the absence of conformity, or the price of valuation is not offered by any of the interested parties, the estate will be sold with the cargo, the price being divided among the heirs.
Article 1620.
Both the capital and the pensions of the censuses are prescribed, as provided in Title XVIII of this book.
Article 1621.
In spite of Article 1.110, two consecutive pensions will be necessary to assume that all the above have been satisfied.
Article 1622.
The censatary is obliged to pay the contributions and other taxes affecting the estate.
When verifying the payment of the pension, you may deduct from it the part of the taxes corresponding to the censualist.
Article 1623.
Censuses produce real action on the graveled estate. In addition to the actual action, the censualist may exercise the staff for the payment of the arrears, and for damages and interest where such action occurs.
Article 1624.
The censatario may not ask for forgiveness or reduction of the pension due to accidental sterility of the farm, nor for the loss of its fruits.
Article 1625.
If by force majeure or by chance the land is completely lost or disabled, the land taxed by census will be extinguished, with the payment of the pension being terminated.
If it is lost only in part, the censatario will not be exempted from paying the pension, unless he prefers to leave the estate to the censualist.
By taking part in the censatario's fault, he shall be liable, in both cases, to damages.
Article 1626.
In the case of the first paragraph of the preceding article, if the estate is insured, the value of the insurance shall be affected by the payment of the capital of the census and of the expired pensions, unless the censatario prefers to invest it in building the estate, in which case the census will be revived with all its effects, including the payment of unmet pensions. The censualist may require the censatario to ensure the investment of the value of the insurance in the rebuilding of the estate.
Article 1627.
If the land taxed by census is expropriated for public benefit, its price will be affected by the payment of the capital of the census and the expired pensions, which will be extinguished.
The preceding provision also applies to cases where forced expropriation is only on the part of the estate, when its price is sufficient to cover the capital of the census.
If it is not enough, it will continue to tax the rest of the estate, provided its price is sufficient to cover the census capital and 25 per 100 more of it. In another case, the censatary shall be obliged to replace with another guarantee the expropriated party, or to redeem the census, at his choice, except as provided for in article 1,631.
CHAPTER II
From the Enphyteutic Census
Section 1.a Provisions relating to emphyteusis
Article 1628.
The enphyteutic census can only be established on real estate and in public writing.
Article 1629.
The value of the estate and the annual pension to be paid shall be fixed in the contract at the time of the establishment of the enphyteutic census.
Article 1630.
Where the pension consists of a certain amount of fruit, the type and quality of the pension shall be fixed in the contract.
If it consists of an aliquot part of those produced by the estate, in the absence of an express agreement on the intervention to be made by the direct owner, the enfiteuta must give notice, or to its representative, of the day on which it intends to begin the collection of each kind of fruit, in order that it may, by itself or through its representative, witness all operations until it receives the corresponding part.
On notice, the host may harvest, even if neither the direct owner nor his representative or controller is present.
Article 1631.
In the case of forced expropriation, the provisions of the first paragraph of Article 1.627 shall apply, when the entire estate is expropriated.
If it is only in part, the price of the expropriated shall be distributed between the direct owner and the useful, receiving that part of the capital of the census that corresponds proportionally to the expropriated party, according to the value that was given to the whole estate when the census was constituted or that has served as a type for redemption, and the rest shall correspond to the enfiteuta.
In this case, the census on the rest of the estate will continue, with the corresponding reduction in capital and pensions, unless the enfiteuta opts for total redemption or abandonment in favor of the direct owner.
Where, according to the agreement, laudemium is to be paid, the direct owner shall receive what is due for this purpose only from the part of the price belonging to the enfiteuta.
Article 1632.
The enfiteuta owns the products of the farm and its accessions.
It has the same rights as the owner in the treasures and mines discovered on the emphyteutic estate.
Article 1633.
The enfiteuta can dispose of the enphyteutic property and its accessions, both by acts between living and of last will, leaving the rights of the direct owner safe, and subject to what the articles that follow establish.
Article 1634.
Where the pension consists in one aliquot part of the fruits of the enphyteutic farm, no servitude or other burden may be imposed that diminishes the products without the express consent of the direct owner.
Article 1635.
The enfiteuta may freely donate or swap the estate, making it known to the direct owner.
Article 1636.
The right of the owner directly and the beneficial owner of the property is the right of recording and the right of withdrawal, provided that they sell or give in payment their respective domain over the enphyteutic estate.
This provision does not apply to forced disposals for reasons of public utility.
Article 1637.
For the purposes of the preceding article, anyone who tries to alienate the domain of an enphyteutic estate shall notify the other owner, declaring to him the definitive price offered to him, or in which he intends to alienate his domain.
Within twenty days of the notice, the owner may make use of the right of assessment, paying the price indicated. If you do not verify this, you will lose this right and the alienation may take effect.
Article 1638.
Where the direct owner, or the enfiteuta, if any, has not made use of the right of assessment referred to in the preceding article, he may use the right of withdrawal to acquire the estate for the price of the disposal.
In this case, the withdrawal must be used within nine useful days of the granting of the deed of sale. If it is hidden, the said term will be counted from the registration of the same in the Register of the Property.
The concealment is presumed when the deed is not presented in the Register within nine days of its granting.
Regardless of the presumption, concealment can be proved by other legal means.
Article 1639.
If the alienation has been carried out without the prior notice required by article 1.637, the direct owner, and if necessary the useful owner, may take the action of withdrawal at all times until the end of one year, counting from the time the alienation is registered in the Register of Property.
Article 1640.
In the judicial sales of emphyteutic farms, the direct owner and the useful, in their respective cases, may make use of the right of scoring, within the term fixed in the edicts for the auction, paying the price that serves as type for the auction, and of the retraction within nine useful days following the granting of the deed.
In this case, the prior notice required by Article 1.637 shall not be necessary.
Article 1641.
Where there are several alienated farms subject to the same census, neither the right to record nor the right to withdraw from one or the other shall be used.
Article 1642.
Where the direct or useful domain belongs pro undivided to several persons, each person may avail himself of the right of withdrawal subject to the rules established for the community, and preferably the direct owner, if part of the useful domain had been alienated; or the enfiteuta, if the alienation had been of the direct domain.
Article 1643.
If the enfiteuta is disturbed in his right by a third party who contests the direct domain or validity of the enfiteusis, he may not claim the corresponding compensation from the direct owner if he does not cite him of eviction as provided for in article 1,481.
Article 1644.
In the disposals for a consideration of enphyteutic farms, laudemium shall be paid to the direct owner only when expressly stipulated in the enphyteusis contract.
If a fixed amount has not been indicated in the agreement, it shall consist of 2 per 100 of the disposal price.
In the attachments prior to the promulgation of this Code, which are subject to payment by laudemius, even if not agreed upon, this benefit will continue in the usual manner, but will not exceed 2 per 100 of the price of the disposal where no other higher one has been expressly contracted.
Article 1645.
The obligation to pay the laudemium corresponds to the acquirer, unless otherwise agreed.
Article 1646.
If the owner has obtained a direct licence for the alienation from the owner or has given him the prior notice that prevents article 1.637, the owner may not claim, if necessary, the payment of laudemio until within the year following the day on which the deed is registered in the Property Registry. Apart from such cases, such action shall be subject to ordinary statute of limitations.
Article 1647.
Every twenty-nine years the direct owner may demand recognition of his right to hold the enphyteutic estate.
The expenses of recognition shall be borne by the enfiteuta, without any other benefit being required for this purpose.
Article 1648.
The property will fall into commissary, and the direct owner will be able to claim its return:
1o For non-payment of the pension for three consecutive years.
2.o If the enfiteuta does not comply with the condition stipulated in the contract or seriously deteriorates the estate.
Article 1649.
In the first case of the previous article, in order for the direct owner to request the confiscation, he must request payment from the enfiteuta judicially or by means of Notary; and, if he does not pay within thirty days of the request, the right of the latter shall be expedited.
Article 1650.
In any event, the enfiteuta may be released from the confiscation order by rediding the census and paying the pensions due within thirty days of the request for payment or the location of the claim.
The same right may be exercised by the creditors of the host until thirty days after the owner has regained full control.
Article 1651.
The redemption of the enphyteutic census shall consist of the delivery in cash, and at once, to the direct owner of the capital that had been fixed as the value of the estate at the time of the establishment of the census, without any other benefit being required, unless it has been stipulated.
Article 1652.
In the case of confiscation, or in the case of termination for any reason of the enfiteusis contract, the direct owner must pay for improvements that have increased the value of the estate, provided that this increase persists at the time of return.
If it has deterioration due to fault or negligence of the enfiteuta, they will be compensated with the improvements, and in what they do not suffice will remain the enfiteuta personally obliged to their payment, and the same to that of the pensions expired and not prescribed.
Article 1653.
In the absence of heirs, descendants, ascendants, surviving spouse and relatives within the sixth grade of the last enfiteuta, the estate will return to the direct owner in the state in which it is found, if it was not otherwise disposed of by the enfiteuta.
Article 1654.
The subenfiteusis contract is hereby deleted.
Section 2.a Forums and other contracts similar to those of emphyteusis
Article 1655.
Fora and any other charges of a similar nature established since the promulgation of this Code, when they are for an indefinite period, shall be governed by the provisions laid down for the enphyteutical census in the section above.
If they are temporary or limited in time, they shall be estimated as leases and shall be governed by the provisions relating to this contract.
Article 1656.
The contract under which the owner of the soil gives up his use to plant vineyards for the time that the first vines live, paying the assignee an annual income or pension in fruit or money, shall be governed by the following rules:
1.a It shall be extinguished within fifty years of the concession, if no other period has been expressly fixed therein.
2.a It shall also be extinguished by death of the first strains, or by two thirds of the plants being unfruitful.
3.a The transferee or settler may make revelries and mucks during the time of the contract.
4.a This contract does not lose its character by the power to make other plantations on the granted land, provided that the main object is the planting of vineyards.
5.a The transferee may freely transmit his right for a fee or free of charge, but without the possibility of dividing the use of the estate, unless expressly consenting to it by its owner.
6.a The assignor and the assignee shall have the rights of assessment and of withdrawal in respect of each other in respect of disposals for a valuable purpose, as provided for by the enfiteusis and with the obligation to give the notice required by article 1.637.
7.a The settler or transferee may resign or return the estate to the assignor when it suits him, paying for the damage caused by his fault.
8.a The assignee shall not be entitled to any improvements on the estate at the time of termination of the contract, provided that they are necessary or made in compliance with the agreement.
As for the useful and voluntary ones, he shall not be entitled to their fertilisation, unless they have been executed with the written consent of the owner of the land and are obliged to pay them. In this case, these improvements will be paid for the value they have when returning the estate.
9.a The assignor may avail himself of the eviction action for the performance of the contract term.
10. If after the end of the period of fifty years or the period expressly fixed by the persons concerned, the assignee shall continue to use and use the estate by tacit consent of the assignor, the assignor may not be evicted without the prior notice that the latter shall give him one year in advance of the conclusion of the contract.
CHAPTER III
From the census record
Article 1657.
Where payment is made in the form of a contribution from the register, the species, quantity and quality of the funds must be fixed, without being able to consist of a proportion of those produced by the farm.
Article 1658.
The redemption of the consignor's census will consist in the return to the censualist, once and in cash, of the capital that he had given to constitute the census.
Article 1659.
Where the actual action is taken against the estate that is promoted for the payment of pensions, if the remainder of the value of the estate is not sufficient to cover the capital of the census and 25 per 100 more of the census, the census holder may require the censatary, at his choice, to redeem the census or complete the guarantee, or to abandon the rest of the estate in favour of the estate.
Article 1660.
The censualist may also make use of the right set out in the preceding article in other cases where the value of the property is insufficient to cover the capital of the census and 25 per 100 more, if any of the following circumstances occur:
1.a The value of the estate has decreased due to fault or negligence of the censatario.
In such a case he shall also be liable for damages.
2.a The pension has ceased to be paid for two consecutive years.
3.a The censatario has been declared bankrupt, competitive or insolvent.
CHAPTER IV
Reservative census
Article 1661.
The reserve census cannot be validly constituted without prior assessment of the estate by the conforming estimate of the parties or by expert judgement.
Article 1662.
The redemption of this census will be verified by handing over to the censualist, once and in cash, the capital that would have been fixed according to the previous article.
Article 1663.
The provision of article 1.657 applies to the reserve census.
Article 1664.
In the cases provided for in articles 1,659 and 1,660, the debtor of the reserve census may only be obliged to redeem the census, or to leave the estate in favour of the censualist.
TITLE VIII
From society
CHAPTER I
General provisions
Article 1665.
The company is a contract by which two or more people are forced to put together money, goods or industry, in order to divide the profits.
Article 1666.
The company must have a lawful purpose and be established in the common interest of the partners.
When the dissolution of an unlawful company is declared, the proceeds shall be allocated to the charitable establishments of the domicile of the company, and, failing that, to those of the province.
Article 1667.
Civil society may be constituted in any form, except where real property or rights are provided to it, in which case public deed shall be required.
Article 1668.
The company contract is void, provided that real estate is provided, if no inventory is made of it, signed by the parties, which must be attached to the deed.
Article 1669.
Companies whose agreements are kept secret between the partners shall not have legal personality, and each of them contracts in its own name with third parties.
Such companies shall be governed by the provisions relating to the community of property.
Article 1670.
Civil societies, for the purpose to which they are consecrated, may take all forms recognized by the Commercial Code. In such a case, their provisions shall apply to them as soon as they do not oppose those of this Code.
Article 1671.
Society is universal or particular.
Article 1672.
Universal society can be of all present goods or of all profits.
Article 1673.
The society of all the goods present is the one by which the parties share all those who currently belong to them, in order to divide them among themselves, as well as all the profits they acquire with them.
Article 1674.
In the universal society of all present goods, the property belonging to each of the partners, as well as all the profits they acquire with them, becomes the common property of the partners.
The reciprocal communication of any other gains may also be agreed upon in it; but the assets that the partners subsequently acquire by inheritance, legacy or donation, even if their fruits, cannot be understood.
Article 1675.
The universal profit society comprises everything the partners acquire for their industry or work for the duration of the society.
The movable or immovable property that each partner possesses at the time of the conclusion of the contract, continue to be of particular domain, passing only the usufruct to the society.
Article 1676.
The universal partnership contract, concluded without determining its kind, constitutes only the universal profit society.
Article 1677.
The persons to whom it is prohibited to grant one another any donation or advantage cannot contract universal society.
Article 1678.
The private company has only the purpose of specific things, their use, or their fruits, or a specified undertaking, or the exercise of a profession or art.
CHAPTER II
The obligations of the partners
Section 1.a: Obligations of the partners to each other
Article 1679.
Society begins from the very moment of the conclusion of the contract, if nothing else has been agreed.
Article 1680.
The company lasts for the agreed time; in the absence of an agreement, for the duration of the business which has served exclusively as the object of the company, if the company by its nature has a limited duration; and in any other case, for the entire life of the associates, except for the power reserved to them in Article 1,700 and the provisions of Article 1.704.
Article 1681.
Each is liable to the company for what it has promised to contribute to it.
It is also subject to the eviction as to the particular and specific things it has brought to the company, in the same cases and in the same way as the seller in respect of the buyer.
Article 1682.
The partner who has been obliged to contribute a sum in money and has not contributed it, is entitled to the interest from the day on which it was to contribute it, without prejudice to compensation, in addition, for the damages it would have caused.
The same is true of the sums he would have taken from the social fund, beginning to count the interest from the day he took it for his particular benefit.
Article 1683.
The industrial partner owes to the company the profits it has earned during it in the field of industry that serves as object to it.
Article 1684.
Where a member authorized to administer receives an amount due to him in his own name from a person who owed the company another amount also due, it must be charged in the two credits in proportion to his amount, even if he had given the receipt on behalf of only his own; but, if he has taken it on account of his social assets, everything shall be charged to him.
The provisions of this article are without prejudice to the debtor's ability to use the power granted to it in Article 1.172, only if the member's personal claim is more burdensome to the debtor.
Article 1685.
The partner who has received all his share in a social credit without having received his share of the other partners, is obliged, if the debtor later falls into insolvency, to bring to the social estate what he received, even if he had given the receipt for his own part.
Article 1686.
Every partner must answer to the company for the damages it has suffered because of it and cannot compensate them with the benefits that its industry has provided.
Article 1687.
The risk of certain and determined, non-expendable things, which are provided to society so that only their use and fruits are common, is borne by the owner partner.
If the goods are consumable, or cannot be stored without deterioration, or if they were provided for sale, the risk is from society. It will also be so, in the absence of a special agreement, that of the items provided with an estimate made in the inventory, and in this case the claim will be limited to the price at which they were assessed.
Article 1688.
The company is responsible to any partner of the amounts it has paid for it and the corresponding interest; it also responds to the obligations it has undertaken in good faith for the social business and the inseparable risks of its management.
Article 1689.
Losses and gains shall be shared in accordance with the agreement. If only each of the profits had been agreed, their share in the losses will be equal.
In the absence of an agreement, each partner's share of the profits and losses must be proportionate to what it has contributed. The partner who is only an industry member shall have a share equal to that of the partner who has contributed the least. If, in addition to its industry, it has contributed capital, it will also receive the proportionate share it owes.
Article 1690.
If the partners have agreed to entrust a third party with the designation of each party's share in the profits and losses, the designation made by the third party may be challenged only if it has clearly failed to meet the requirements of equity. In no case may the partner who has begun to execute the decision of the third party, or who has not contested it within three months, counted since it was known to him, claim.
The designation of profit and loss cannot be entrusted to one of the partners.
Article 1691.
The agreement that excludes one or more partners from any party in profits or losses is null and void.
Only the industry partner can be relieved of any liability for losses.
Article 1692.
The member appointed as administrator in the social contract may exercise all administrative acts however of the opposition of his companions, unless it proceeds in bad faith; and his power is irrevocable without legitimate cause.
The power granted after the contract, without having agreed in the contract to confer it, may be revoked at any time.
Article 1693.
Where two or more partners have been responsible for the social administration without determining their functions, or where it has not been stated that they cannot act without the consent of each other, each may exercise all administrative acts separately; but either of them may oppose the operations of the other before they have produced legal effect.
Article 1694.
If it has been stipulated that the managing partners are not to operate without the consent of the others, the competition of all is necessary for the validity of the acts, without the possibility of claiming the absence or impossibility of any of them, unless there is imminent danger of serious or irreparable damage to the society.
Article 1695.
Where the method of administration has not been stipulated, the following rules shall be observed:
1. All members shall be deemed to be holders of the contract, and what any of them does alone shall bind the company; but each may oppose the operations of the others before they have produced legal effect.
2. Each partner can use the things that make up the social background according to the custom of the land, provided that it does not do so against the interest of society, or in such a way as to prevent the use to which his companions are entitled.
3.a Every partner may oblige others to pay with him the expenses necessary for the preservation of common things.
4.a None of the partners can, without the consent of the others, make new in the social real estate, even if they claim that it is useful to society.
Article 1696.
Each partner may associate a third party on its own; but the associate shall not join the partnership without the unanimous consent of the partners, even if the partner is an administrator.
Section 2.a: Obligations of partners towards a third party
Article 1697.
In order for the company to be bound by the acts of one of the partners with a third party, it is required:
1. or that the partner has acted in his character as such, on behalf of the society.
2. Who has the power to bind the company by virtue of an express or tacit mandate.
3. That he has acted within the limits indicated to him by his power or mandate.
Article 1698.
The members are not jointly and severally bound by the company's debts; and none can bind the others by a personal act, if they have not conferred power to do so.
The company is not obliged in respect of a third party for acts which a partner has performed in its own name or without the power of the company to execute it, but is obliged to the partner as soon as such acts have been in its interest.
The provisions of this article are without prejudice to rule 1a of Article 1.695.
Article 1699.
The creditors of the company are preferred to the creditors of each partner over the social assets. Without prejudice to this right, individual creditors of each partner may request the attachment and termination of the share of the partner in the social fund.
CHAPTER III
The way society is extinguished
Article 1700.
Society is extinguished:
1.o When the term by which it was constituted expires.
2. When you lose the thing, or you finish the business that serves you as an object.
3. Death or competition of any of the members and in the case provided for in Article 1699.
4. By the will of any of the partners, subject to the provisions of Articles 1,705 and 1,707.
5.o Where support measures involving full representation powers in the field of property have been provided for any of the partners.
The companies referred to in Article 1670 shall be excluded from the provisions of points 3o, 4o and 5o of this Article, where they are to be subsisting in accordance with the Commercial Code.
Article 1701.
When the specific thing, which a partner had promised to bring to society, perishes before the delivery has been made, its loss results in the dissolution of the society.
The company is also dissolved in any case by the loss of the thing when, with its property being reserved by the partner that contributes it, only the use or enjoyment of it has been transferred to the society.
But society is not dissolved by the loss of the thing when it happens after the society has acquired ownership of it.
Article 1702.
The company established for a fixed period of time may be extended by the consent of all the members.
Consent may be express or tacit, and shall be justified by ordinary means.
Article 1703.
If the company is extended after the expiry of the term, it is understood that a new company is constituted. If the term is extended before the expiry of the term, the primitive society continues.
Article 1704.
The pact is valid that, if one of the partners dies, society will continue among those who survive. In this case, the heir of the deceased shall have the right to partition only, by fixing it on the day of the death of the deceased; and he shall not participate in any subsequent rights and obligations except as a necessary consequence of what has been done before that day.
If the agreement is to be continued by the company with the heir, it shall be kept, without prejudice to the provisions of article 1,700 (4).
Article 1705.
The dissolution of the company by the will or resignation of one of the partners only takes place when no term has been indicated for its duration, or it does not result from the nature of the business.
For the resignation to take effect, it must be done in good faith in a timely manner; it must also be brought to the attention of the other partners.
Article 1706.
Renunciation is in bad faith when the one who does it intends to appropriate for himself the benefit that should be common. In this case the renouncer does not fight with his partners, and they have the power to exclude him from society.
It is reputedly done in a timely manner to renounce, when, not finding the whole things, society is interested in dilated its dissolution. In this case the company will continue until the completion of the pending business.
Article 1707.
A member cannot claim the dissolution of the company which, either by the provision of the contract, or by the nature of the business, has been constituted for a certain time, not to intervene just reason, such as the failure of one of the partners to his obligations, the inability to disallow himself for the social business, or another similar, in the opinion of the Tribunals.
Article 1708.
Partition between partners is governed by the rules of inheritance, as well as in the form and obligations resulting from it. No part of the goods supplied may be applied to the industry partner, but only their fruits and profits, as provided for in Article 1.689, unless expressly agreed otherwise.
TITLE IX
Mandate
CHAPTER I
Nature, form and species of the mandate
Article 1709.
The mandate contract obliges a person to provide some service or do something, on behalf of another.
Article 1710.
The mandate may be express or tacit.
The express may be given as a public or private instrument and even as a word.
Acceptance may also be express or tacit, deduced the latter from the acts of the president.
Article 1711.
In the absence of a pact to the contrary, the mandate is assumed to be free of charge.
However, if the president is occupied by the performance of the services of the species to which the mandate refers, the obligation to pay is presumed.
Article 1712.
The mandate is general or special.
The first one understands all the business of the principal.
The second, one or more determined businesses.
Article 1713.
The mandate, generally conceived, covers nothing more than acts of administration.
In order to compromise, alienate, mortgage or enforce any other act of rigorous control, express command is required.
The ability to compromise does not authorize to engage in referees or friendly composing.
Article 1714.
The president may not exceed the limits of the mandate.
Article 1715.
The limits of the mandate are not considered to have been exceeded if it is carried out in a more advantageous manner for the principal than that indicated by the latter.
Article 1716.
The emancipated minor may be a president but the principal shall have only action against him in accordance with the provisions concerning the duties of the minors.
Article 1717.
When the president acts in his own name, the president has no action against the persons with whom the president has hired, nor does they against the president.
In this case, the president is the one directly obliged in favour of the person with whom he has hired, as if the matter were his own personal. Except for the case in which it is a matter of the principal's own.
The provisions of this article are without prejudice to actions between the principal and the agent.
CHAPTER II
Obligations of the President
Article 1718.
The representative is obliged by the acceptance to fulfil the mandate, and is liable for any damages that, if not executed, may be caused to the principal.
It must also end the business that was already begun at the death of the principal, if there is danger in the delay.
Article 1719.
In the execution of the mandate, the president must comply with the instructions of the principal.
In the absence of them, he will do everything that, according to the nature of the business, would make a good family father.
Article 1720.
Every agent is obliged to account for his operations and to pay to the principal whatever he has received under the mandate, even if the receipt of the latter is not due to the latter.
Article 1721.
The representative may appoint a substitute if the principal has not forbidden him; but he is responsible for the management of the substitute:
1. When he was not given the power to appoint him.
2. When he was given this power, but without designating the person, and the appointed one was notoriously incapable or insolvent.
What is done by the substitute appointed against the ban of the principal shall be null and void.
Article 1722.
In cases covered by the two issues of the previous article, the principal may also direct his action against the substitute.
Article 1723.
The responsibility of two or more agents, even if they have been instituted simultaneously, is not in solidarity if it has not been expressed in this way.
Article 1724.
The president owes interest on the amounts he applied to his own uses from the day he did so, and on those that he owes after the expiration of the mandate, since he has been in arrears.
Article 1725.
The representative who acts as such is not personally responsible to the party with whom he contracts, but when he expressly commits himself or transfers the limits of the mandate without giving him sufficient knowledge of his powers.
Article 1726.
The president is responsible not only for the wrong, but also for the guilt, which must be assessed more or less rigorously by the Tribunals depending on whether the mandate has been paid or not.
CHAPTER III
From the obligations of the principal
Article 1727.
The principal must fulfil all the obligations that the agent has undertaken within the limits of the mandate.
In what the president has exceeded, the principal is not obliged to do so but when he expressly or tacitly ratifies it.
Article 1728.
The principal must anticipate to the president, if he so requests, the amounts necessary for the execution of the mandate.
If the president has anticipated them, the principal must reimburse them, even if the business has not gone well, provided that the president is exempt from guilt.
The refund shall include interest on the advance amount, to be counted from the day the advance was made.
Article 1729.
The principal must also compensate the agent for all damages caused by the fulfilment of the mandate, without the fault or recklessness of the same agent.
Article 1730.
The agent may retain in pledge the things that are the subject of the mandate until the principal makes the compensation and reimbursement that the two preceding articles deal with.
Article 1731.
If two or more persons have appointed a president for a common business, they are jointly and severally obliged for all purposes of the mandate.
CHAPTER IV
Ways to end the mandate
Article 1732.
The term of office expires:
1. For its revocation.
2. For the resignation of the president.
3. By death or by contest of the principal or of the president.
4. The establishment in relation to the representative of support measures affecting the act in which he is to intervene in this condition.
5. The constitution in favour of the principal of the representative curatorship as a measure of support for the exercise of his legal capacity, except as provided for in this Code with respect to preventive mandates.
Article 1733.
The president may revoke the mandate at his will and compel the president to return the document on which the mandate is based.
Article 1734.
Where the mandate has been given to hire certain persons, their revocation may not prejudice them if they have not been made known.
Article 1735.
The appointment of a new representative for the same business results in the revocation of the previous mandate from the day on which the person who had received it was informed, except as provided in the preceding article.
Article 1736.
The president may resign from the mandate by making it known to the principal. If the person concerned suffers damage from the resignation, he shall be compensated by the agent, unless he or she bases his or her resignation on the impossibility of continuing to carry out the mandate without serious prejudice to him or her.
Article 1737.
The president, even if he renounces the mandate with just cause, must continue his administration until the principal has been able to take the necessary steps to occur to this fault.
Article 1738.
What the president did, ignoring the death of the principal or any of the causes that cause the mandate to cease, is valid and will have all its effects with respect to third parties who have contracted with him in good faith.
Article 1739.
In the event of the death of the president, his heirs must inform the principal and provide in the meantime what the circumstances require in his interest.
TITLE X
Loan
General provision
Article 1740.
By the loan contract, one of the parties delivers to the other, or something that is not expendable to use for a certain time and return it, in which case it is called a co-date, or money or other expendable, provided that it returns another of the same kind and quality, in which case it simply retains the name of the loan.
Commodate is essentially free.
The simple loan can be free or with an interest-paying agreement.
CHAPTER I
Of the comodate
Section 1.a Of the nature of the comodate
Article 1741.
The comodant retains the property of the borrowed thing. The co-donor acquires the use of it, but not the fruits; if any emoluments are involved that the person who acquires the use will pay, the convention ceases to be co-date.
Article 1742.
The obligations and rights arising from the comodate are passed on to the heirs of both parties, unless the loan has been made to the person of the comodator, in which case the heirs of the comodator have no right to continue in the use of the thing borrowed.
Section 2.a: Obligations of the co-donor
Article 1743.
The co-donor is obliged to meet the ordinary expenses necessary for the use and preservation of the thing borrowed.
Article 1744.
If the co-dator assigns the thing to a use other than that for which it was lent, or retains it in his possession for longer than the agreed, he shall be liable for its loss, even if it happens by chance.
Article 1745.
If the thing was delivered with appraisal and is lost, even if it is fortuitous, the co-dator of the price will answer, in the absence of an agreement in which he is expressly relieved of responsibility.
Article 1746.
The co-modator does not respond to the deteriorations that occur to the thing borrowed by the mere effect of the use and without his fault.
Article 1747.
The co-modator cannot retain the thing borrowed on the pretext of what the co-modator owes him, even if it is for reasons of expense.
Article 1748.
All co-dators to whom a thing is jointly lent respond jointly to it, in accordance with the provisions of this section.
Section 3.a On the obligations of the co-modant
Article 1749.
The comodant cannot claim the thing borrowed but after the end of the use for which he lent it. If, however, the urgent need for such a convenor arises before these deadlines, it may claim restitution.
Article 1750.
If the duration of the comodate or the use to which the thing was to be borrowed was not agreed, and this is not determined by the custom of the earth, the comodant may claim it at his will.
In case of doubt, it is the co-dator who bears the burden of proof.
Article 1751.
The comodant must pay the extraordinary expenses caused during the contract for the preservation of the thing borrowed, provided that the comodator puts it in his knowledge before making them, except when they are so urgent that the result of the notice cannot be expected without danger.
Article 1752.
The comodant who, knowing the vices of the thing borrowed, has not made them known to the co-modator, shall answer the co-modator for the damage he suffered for that reason.
CHAPTER II
From the simple loan
Article 1753.
Anyone who receives money or other expendable property on loan acquires its property, and is obliged to return to the creditor both of the same kind and quality.
Article 1754.
The obligation of the borrower shall be governed by the provisions of article 1.170 of this Code.
If the loan is otherwise expendable, or a quantity of non-currency metal, the debtor owes an amount equal to that received and of the same species and quality, even if it suffers an alteration in its price.
Article 1755.
Interest should not be owed except when expressly agreed upon.
Article 1756.
The borrower who has paid interest without being stipulated, cannot claim or charge it to the capital.
Article 1757.
In addition, clothing lending establishments are subject to the regulations that concern them.
TITLE XI
From the warehouse
CHAPTER I
The general deposit and its various species
Article 1758.
The deposit is constituted from the moment one receives the other's thing with the obligation to keep it and to restore it.
Article 1759.
The deposit may be made either judicially or out of court.
CHAPTER II
The deposit itself
Section 1.a The nature and essence of the deposit contract
Article 1760.
The deposit is a free contract, unless otherwise agreed.
Article 1761.
Only furniture can be the object of the deposit.
Article 1762.
Extrajudicial deposit is necessary or voluntary.
Section 2.a Voluntary deposit
Article 1763.
Voluntary deposit is that in which delivery is made by the will of the depositor. The deposit may also be made by two or more persons who are created to be entitled to the thing deposited, in a third party, who will make the delivery, if appropriate, to the corresponding one.
Article 1764.
A deposit made by a minor or by a person with a disability without the intended support measure shall bind the depositary to all obligations arising from the deposit contract.
Article 1765.
If the deposit has been made in a minor, the depositor shall have only action to claim the deposit as long as it exists in the depositary's possession, or to have it paid him the amount in which it was enriched with the thing or with the price. This rule shall also apply where the deposit has been made to a person with disabilities who has dispensed with the support measures envisaged when necessary and the depositor is aware of the existence of support measures at the time of recruitment or otherwise has taken advantage of the disability situation by obtaining an unfair advantage from it.
Section 3.a: Obligations of the depositary
Article 1766.
The depositary is obliged to keep the item and return it, when requested, to the depositor, or to his successors, or to the person designated in the contract. Their responsibility for the custody and loss of the thing shall be governed by the provisions of Title I of this book.
Article 1767.
The depository cannot use the depository without the depositor's express permission.
Otherwise, he shall be liable for damages.
Article 1768.
When the depositary has permission to use or use the deposited thing, the contract loses the concept of deposit and becomes a loan or co-date.
Permission is not presumed, and its existence must be proved.
Article 1769.
When the deposited thing is delivered closed and sealed, it must be returned by the depositary in the same manner, and it shall be liable for damages if the seal or lock has been forced because of it.
Blame is presumed in the depositary, except the evidence to the contrary.
As to the value of the deposit, where the force is attributable to the depositary, the depositor's declaration shall be placed, unless proved otherwise.
Article 1770.
The deposited thing will be returned with all its products and accessions.
Consisting of the deposit in money, the provisions of Article 1.724 shall apply to the depositary with respect to the agent.
Article 1771.
The depositary cannot require the depositor to prove ownership of the deposit.
However, if you discover that the thing has been stolen and who is its true owner, you must let the deposit know to this one.
If the owner, despite this, does not claim within a month, the depositary will be free of all responsibility, returning the deposit to the one from whom it was received.
Article 1772.
When two or more depositors are depositors, if they are not in solidarity and the thing admits division, each one of them can only ask for its share.
Where there is solidarity, or the thing does not admit division, the provisions of Articles 1.141 and 1.142 of this Code shall apply.
Article 1773.
Where the depositor, after making the deposit, has support measures, the refund of the deposit shall be in accordance with what results from those measures.
Article 1774.
When the deposit is made, the depositor must bring the deposit to the depository; however, the expenses incurred by the transfer shall be borne by the depositor.
In the absence of a designated place of return, the deposit shall be made in which the deposit is located, even if it is not the same as the deposit, provided that no malice has been made by the depositary.
Article 1775.
The deposit must be returned to the depositor when he claims it, even if the contract has set a specified time limit for the refund.
This provision shall not take place where the deposit with the depositary has been seized by a court or where the depositary has been notified of the opposition of a third party to the restitution or transfer of the deposit.
Article 1776.
A depositary who has just reason not to keep the deposit may, even before the term designated, return it to the depositor; and if the depositor resists, he may obtain from the judge its entry.
Article 1777.
A depositary who by force majeure has lost the deposit and received another in its place shall be obliged to surrender the depositor.
Article 1778.
The heir of the depositary who in good faith sold the thing that was unknown to be deposited is only obliged to refund the price he received or to surrender his shares against the buyer in the event that the price has not been paid to him.
Section 4.a: Obligations of the depositor
Article 1779.
The depositor is obliged to reimburse the depositary for the costs it has incurred for the preservation of the deposit and to compensate it for all the damage that has been caused to it by the deposit.
Article 1780.
The depository may retain the deposit in pledge until the deposit is fully paid.
Section 5.a of the required deposit
Article 1781.
The deposit is required:
1. When done in fulfilment of a legal obligation.
2. When it occurs in the event of a calamity, such as fire, ruin, plunder, shipwreck or other similar.
Article 1782.
The deposit included in number 1 of the preceding article shall be governed by the provisions of the law establishing it and, failing that, by those of the voluntary deposit.
The one under number 2 shall be governed by the rules of voluntary deposit.
Article 1783.
The necessary deposit of the effects introduced by the passengers in the fondas and inns is also recognized. The fondists or waiters respond to them as such depositaries, provided that they have been informed, or their dependants, of the effects introduced into their home, and that the travellers, for their part, observe the precautions that the innkeepers or their substitutes have made to them about care and monitoring of the effects.
Article 1784.
The liability referred to in the preceding article includes damage to the effects of travellers, both by servants or dependents of fondists or waiters and by strangers; but not by those who come from armed robbery, or are caused by another event of force majeure.
CHAPTER III
Abduction
Article 1785.
The judicial deposit or kidnapping takes place when the seizure or securing of disputed property is ordered.
Article 1786.
Abduction may thus be aimed at movable property such as immovable property.
Article 1787.
The depositary of the confiscated property or objects may not be released from its commission until the dispute that led to it has ended, unless the judge orders it for consenting to it by all concerned or for another legitimate cause.
Article 1788.
The depository of confiscated property is obliged to fulfil all the obligations of a good family father in respect of them.
Article 1789.
Where this Code does not provide for, judicial abduction shall be governed by the provisions of the Civil Procedure Act.
TITLE XII
Random or lucky contracts
CHAPTER I
General provision
Article 1790.
By the random contract, one or both of the parties undertake to give or do something in equivalence with what the other party is to give or do in the case of an uncertain event, or which is to occur in an undetermined time.
CHAPTER II
From the maintenance contract
Article 1791.
Under the maintenance contract one of the parties is obliged to provide housing, maintenance and assistance of any kind to a person during his or her lifetime, in exchange for the transfer of capital in any kind of property and rights.
Article 1792.
In the event of the death of the person liable to provide maintenance or any serious circumstance preventing the peaceful coexistence of the parties, either party may request that the agreed maintenance allowance be paid by means of the updated pension to be paid in advance of the contract or, if not provided for, by means of a court order.
Article 1793.
The length and quality of the provision of maintenance shall be those resulting from the contract and, in the absence of a contract to the contrary, shall not depend on the vicissitudes of the person liable and the flow of the person receiving them.
Article 1794.
The obligation to provide maintenance shall not cease for the reasons referred to in Article 152, except as provided for in its first paragraph.
Article 1795.
Failure to comply with the maintenance obligation shall entitle the feeder, without prejudice to the provisions of article 1792, to choose between requiring compliance, including payment of the advance payment of the claim, or termination of the contract, with application, in both cases, of the general rules of reciprocal obligations.
In the event that the food-seeker chooses the decision, the debtor of the maintenance shall immediately return the goods he received under the contract, and the judge may, in the circumstances, agree that the refund which, in respect of the provisions of the following article, corresponds to the food-seeker shall be wholly or partially deferred, for the benefit of the food-seeker, for the time and with the guarantees to be determined.
Article 1796.
From the consequences of the termination of the contract, it must be sufficient for the dietist, at least, to constitute a surplus sufficient to constitute, once again, a similar pension for the remainder of his life.
Article 1797.
Where the goods or rights transmitted in exchange for maintenance are registrable, the right of the feeder with the agreement entered in which the non-payment of payment is made to the third party may be guaranteed, in addition to the mortgage right regulated by the Article 157 of the Mortgage Act.
CHAPTER III
From the game and the bet
Article 1798.
The law does not grant action to claim what is earned in a game of luck, treat or chance; but he who loses cannot repeat what he has paid voluntarily, unless he has mediated wrong, or was less, or was disqualified to administer his property.
Article 1799.
The provisions of the previous article regarding gambling are applicable to bets.
Betting that has an analogy with forbidden games is considered prohibited.
Article 1800.
Games that contribute to the exercise of the body are not considered prohibited, such as those aimed at training in the handling of weapons, race on foot or on horseback, racing cars, ball games and others of a similar nature.
Article 1801.
Anyone who loses in a game or bet of the non-prohibited is bound by civil law.
The judicial authority may, however, not estimate the claim when the amount that was crossed in the game or in the bet is excessive, or reduce the obligation in excess of the uses of a good family parent.
CHAPTER IV
Lifeline income
Article 1802.
The random life income contract obliges the debtor to pay an annual pension or income during the life of one or more persons determined by a capital in movable or immovable property, whose domain is of course transferred to him with the burden of the pension.
Article 1803.
Income on the life of the person giving the capital, on the life of a third party or on the life of several persons may be constituted.
It may also be constituted in favour of the person or persons on whose behalf it is granted, or in favour of another person or persons other than him.
Article 1804.
The income constituted on the life of a dead person on the date of the bestowal is null and void, or at the same time he is suffering from a disease that will cause his death within twenty days of that date.
Article 1805.
Failure to pay expired pensions does not authorize the recipient of the life income to demand repayment of the capital or to re-enter the possession of the alienated property; he will only have the right to claim judicially the payment of the arrears and the insurance of the future.
Article 1806.
The income for the year in which the person who enjoys it dies shall be paid in proportion to the days he had lived; if it was to be paid in advance, the full amount of the period which he had begun to run during his life shall be paid.
Article 1807.
The person who makes up an income on his property free of charge may, at the time of the grant, provide that the income shall not be subject to an attachment by the pensioner.
Article 1808.
Income cannot be claimed without justifying the existence of the person on whose life it is constituted.
TITLE XIII
Transactions and commitments
CHAPTER I
Transactions
Article 1809.
The transaction is a contract by which the parties, giving, promising or holding each one something, avoid the provocation of a lawsuit or put an end to the one that had begun.
Article 1810.
In order to compromise the property and rights of children under parental authority, the same rules shall apply as to alienate them.
Article 1811.
The guardian and curator with representational powers shall require judicial authorization to compromise on matters relating to the interests of the person whose representation they hold, unless such matters are of limited economic relevance.
Article 1812.
Corporations with legal personality may compromise only in the form and with the requirements they need to dispose of their assets.
Article 1813.
It can be compromised on civil action arising out of a crime; but that is not why the public action for the imposition of the legal penalty will be extinguished.
Article 1814.
It is not possible to compromise on the marital status of persons, on marriage issues, or on future maintenance.
Article 1815.
The transaction includes only objects expressed in it, or that, by a necessary induction of their words, must be recognized as falling within it.
The general waiver of rights is understood only to be those relating to the dispute over which the transaction has occurred.
Article 1816.
The transaction has the authority of the res judicata for the parties; however, it will not proceed with the procedure of constraint but with respect to the execution of the judicial transaction.
Article 1817.
Transactions involving error, misconduct, violence or misrepresentation of documents are subject to the provisions of article 1.265 of this Code.
However, one party may not oppose the error of fact to the other party provided that the other party has departed for the transaction of a suit initiated.
Article 1818.
The discovery of new documents is not a cause for nullifying or terminating the transaction, if there has been no bad faith.
Article 1819.
If a final decision is taken, a settlement is concluded on the ground that any of the parties concerned is unaware of the existence of the final decision, the latter may request that the settlement be terminated.
Ignorance of a sentence that can be revoked is no reason to attack the transaction.
CHAPTER II
Commitments
Article 1820.
(No content)
Article 1821.
(No content)
TITLE XIV
Bail
CHAPTER I
The nature and extent of the bond
Article 1822.
The bond requires a third party to pay or perform, in the event that the third party fails to pay.
If the guarantor is jointly and severally bound by the principal debtor, the provisions of Section 4a, Chapter III, Title I of this book shall be observed.
Article 1823.
Bail may be conventional, legal or judicial, free of charge or for a fee.
It may also be constituted, not only in favour of the principal debtor, but of the other guarantor, by consenting to it, ignoring it and even contradicting it.
Article 1824.
Bail cannot exist without a valid obligation.
It may, however, fall under an obligation whose invalidity may be claimed by virtue of a purely personal exception from the obligation, such as that of the minor.
Except for the provision in the preceding paragraph, the case of a loan made to the child of the family.
Article 1825.
Bonds may also be secured for future debts, the amount of which is not yet known, but may not be claimed against the guarantor until the debt is liquid.
Article 1826.
The guarantor may be required to pay less, but not more than the principal debtor, both in the quantity and in the onerous of the conditions.
If the debtor has been obliged to do more, the obligation shall be reduced to the limits of the debtor.
Article 1827.
Bail is not presumed: it must be express and cannot be extended to more than what is contained in it.
If it is simple or indefinite, it shall include not only the principal obligation, but all its accessories, including the expenses of the trial, it being understood, in respect of these, that it shall not be liable but to those accruing after the guarantor has been required for payment.
Article 1828.
The person obliged to give guarantor must present a person who has the capacity to be bound and assets sufficient to meet the obligation it guarantees. The guarantor shall be deemed to be subject to the jurisdiction of the judge of the place where this obligation is to be fulfilled.
Article 1829.
If the guarantor comes to the state of insolvency, the creditor may request another creditor to meet the qualities required in the preceding article. Except in the case of the creditor being given the right to rely on a particular person.
CHAPTER II
The effect of the bond
Section 1.a Effects of the bond between the guarantor and the creditor
Article 1830.
The guarantor may not be compelled to pay the creditor without prior termination of all assets of the debtor.
Article 1831.
Excusion does not take place:
1. When the guarantor has expressly renounced it.
2. Where he has been jointly and severally bound by the debtor.
3.o In the event of bankruptcy or bankruptcy of the debtor.
4o When the latter cannot be sued within the Kingdom.
Article 1832.
In order for the guarantor to take advantage of the benefit of the waiver, he must object to the creditor after the latter requires it to pay, and must identify assets of the debtor that are realizable within the Spanish territory, sufficient to cover the amount of the debt.
Article 1833.
If the guarantor fulfils all the conditions of the preceding article, the negligent creditor in the discharge of the assets in question is liable, as far as they can, for the insolvency of the debtor resulting from such neglect.
Article 1834.
The creditor may summon the guarantor when he sues the principal debtor, but the benefit of termination shall always be protected, even if the judgement is given against the two.
Article 1835.
The transaction made by the guarantor with the creditor has no effect on the principal debtor.
Nor does the latter act against the guarantor, against his will.
Article 1836.
The guarantor of a guarantor enjoys the benefit of exemption, both from the guarantor and from the principal obligor.
Article 1837.
As several guarantors of the same debtor and for the same debt, the obligation to answer for it is divided among all. The creditor cannot claim from each guarantor but the party to satisfy, unless solidarity has been expressly stipulated.
The benefit of division against the co-trusters ceases in the same cases and for the same reasons as that of termination against the principal debtor.
Section 2.a Effects of the bond between the debtor and the guarantor
Article 1838.
The guarantor who pays for the debtor must be compensated by the debtor.
The compensation includes:
1.o Total amount of debt.
2. The legal interests of the debtor since the payment has been made known to the debtor, even if they were not produced for the creditor.
3. The expenses incurred by the guarantor after making the guarantor aware of the debtor who has been required for payment.
4o Damage, where appropriate.
The provision of this article takes place even if the bond has been given by the debtor.
Article 1839.
The guarantor is subrogated by payment in all the rights that the creditor had against the debtor.
If you have compromised with the creditor, you cannot ask the debtor for more than you have actually paid.
Article 1840.
If the guarantor pays without notice of the debtor, the debtor may invoke against the debtor any defences that might have been made against the creditor at the time of payment.
Article 1841.
If the debt was due in time and the guarantor paid it before its expiry, it may not require repayment from the debtor until the deadline has expired.
Article 1842.
If the guarantor has paid without notice of the debtor, and the debtor, ignoring the payment, repeats it for his part, there is no appeal against the second, but against the creditor.
Article 1843.
The guarantor, even before paying, may proceed against the principal debtor:
1o When you are sued for payment.
2. In the event of bankruptcy, competition or insolvency.
3. Where the debtor has been obliged to relieve him of the security within a specified period of time, and this period has expired.
4. Where the debt has become due, having met the time limit by which it must be paid.
5. o After ten years, when the principal obligation has no fixed term for its expiry, unless it is of such a nature that it cannot be extinguished except within a period of more than ten years.
In all these cases, the guarantor's action tends to obtain relief from the bond or a security to cover it in the creditor's proceedings and the risk of insolvency in the debtor.
Section 3.a The effects of the bond between the co-owners
Article 1844.
Where two or more guarantors of the same debtor and for the same debt are the same, the guarantor of the same debt may claim from each of the other the proportionate share of the debtor's share.
If any of them are insolvent, the share of the latter will fall on all in the same proportion.
In order for the provision of this article to take place, payment must have been made on the basis of a legal claim, or the principal debtor must be found to be in competition or bankruptcy.
Article 1845.
In the case of the preceding article, the co-sponsors may object to the one who paid the same defences that would have been made by the principal debtor against the creditor and that were not purely personal of the same debtor.
Article 1846.
In the event of the insolvency of the guarantor by whom he was forced, the sub-trustor is liable to the co-trustors on the same terms as the guarantor.
CHAPTER III
Expiry of bail
Article 1847.
The obligation of the guarantor is extinguished at the same time as that of the debtor, and for the same reasons as other obligations.
Article 1848.
The confusion that occurs in the person of the debtor and in that of the guarantor when one inherits the other does not extinguish the obligation of the subfiator.
Article 1849.
If the creditor voluntarily accepts a property, or any other effects on the payment of the debt, even if he loses it by eviction, the guarantor is released.
Article 1850.
The release by the creditor of one of the guarantors without the consent of the others benefits everyone as far as the portion of the guarantor to which it has been granted.
Article 1851.
The extension granted to the debtor by the creditor without the consent of the guarantor extinguishes the bond.
Article 1852.
The guarantors, even if they are in solidarity, are free from their obligation provided that by some act of the creditor they cannot be subrogated in the rights, mortgages and privileges of the creditor.
Article 1853.
The guarantor may oppose to the creditor all exceptions that are binding on the principal obligor and are inherent in the debt; but not those that are purely personal to the obligor.
CHAPTER IV
Legal and judicial bail
Article 1854.
The guarantor to be given by law or by court order must have the qualities prescribed in article 1.828.
Article 1855.
If the person liable to provide security in the cases of the preceding article does not find it, he or she shall be admitted instead to a pledge or mortgage which is deemed sufficient to cover his or her obligation.
Article 1856.
The guarantor of the court may not request the discharge of the assets of the principal debtor.
In the same case, the sub-trustor may not request either the debtor or the guarantor.
TITLE XV
Of the contracts of pledge, mortgage and anti-cresis
CHAPTER I
Provisions common to the pledge and mortgage
Article 1857.
The following are essential requirements of the pledge and mortgage contracts:
1. To be constituted to ensure the performance of a principal obligation.
2. That the pledged or mortgaged thing belongs in property to which it pawns or mortgages.
3. The persons who constitute the pledge or mortgage are free to dispose of their property or, if they do not, are legally authorized to do so.
Third persons who miss the main obligation can secure it by pledgeing or mortgageing their own property.
Article 1858.
It is also the essence of these contracts that, having expired the principal obligation, the things in which the pledge or mortgage is to pay the creditor can be disposed of.
Article 1859.
The creditor cannot appropriate or dispose of the things given in pledge or mortgage.
Article 1860.
The pledge and mortgage are indivisible, even if the debt is divided between the debtor's or creditor's successors.
Therefore, the debtor's heir who has paid part of the debt cannot request that the pledge or mortgage be extinguished proportionately until the debt has been fully satisfied.
Nor may the heir of the creditor who received his share of the debt repay the pledge or cancel the mortgage to the detriment of other heirs who have not been satisfied.
Except for these provisions, the case in which, with several things given in mortgage or pledge, each of them guarantees only a certain portion of the credit.
The debtor, in this case, shall be entitled to extinguish the pledge or mortgage as it satisfies the debt portion of each particular response.
Article 1861.
Garment and mortgage contracts can secure all kinds of obligations, whether pure, whether they are subject to suspensive or resolutory conditions.
Article 1862.
The promise to create a pledge or mortgage only produces personal action among the contracting parties, without prejudice to the criminal liability incurred by anyone who defrauds another by offering in pledge or mortgage as free the things that he knew were taxed, or by pretending to own those that do not belong to him.
CHAPTER II
Of the garment
Section 1.a of the garment
Text added, published on 16/12/1941, in force from 05/01/1942.
Article 1863.
In addition to the requirements laid down in article 1857, the contract of pledge requires the possession of the creditor or a third party by mutual agreement.
Article 1864.
All the movable things that are in commerce can be given in pledge, provided that they are susceptible to possession.
In no case may pet animals be the subject of pledge.
Article 1865.
A pledge against a third party shall not take effect unless the date is confirmed by a public instrument.
Article 1866.
The pledge contract entitles the creditor to retain the thing in its possession or that of the third person to whom it was delivered, until the credit is paid.
If, while the creditor retains the pledge, the debtor incurs another debt due before the first debt has been paid, the debtor may extend the retention until both claims have been satisfied, even if the pledge has not been made subject to the security of the second debt.
Article 1867.
The creditor must take care of the thing given in pledge with the diligence of a good father of family; he is entitled to the payment of the expenses made for its preservation, and is responsible for its loss or deterioration according to the provisions of this Code.
Article 1868.
If the pledge produces interest, the creditor shall compensate the creditor for those owed to him; and, if they are not owed to him, or as soon as they exceed those legitimately due, he shall charge them to the capital.
Article 1869.
As long as the thing given in pledge is not expropriated, the debtor still owns it.
However, the creditor may pursue actions that are the responsibility of the owner of the pledged thing to claim it or defend it against a third party.
Article 1870.
The creditor may not use the thing given in pledge without permission of the owner, and if he does or abuses it in another way, the latter may request that it be made into deposit.
Article 1871.
The debtor may not seek restitution of the pledge against the will of the creditor until the debtor pays the debt and its interest, at the expense of the debtor.
Article 1872.
The creditor to whom his claim has not been satisfied in due course may proceed to the disposal of the pledge before the Notary. Such disposal shall be carried out precisely by public auction and by subpoena of the debtor and the owner of the pledge where appropriate. If the pledge has not been disposed of at the first auction, a second auction may be held with the same formalities; and, if it does not work, the creditor may own the pledge. In this case you will be obliged to give a letter of payment of the entire claim.
If the pledge consists of quoted securities, they shall be sold in the form provided by the Commercial Code.
Article 1873.
With regard to the Mounts of Pietà and other public establishments, which by institute or profession lend on garments, the special laws and regulations concerning them and, subsidiarily, the provisions of this title shall be observed.
Section 2.a. Of the garment without displacement
Text added, published on 16/12/1941, in force from 05/01/1942.
Arts. 1863 bis to 1873 bis.
(Repealed)
Text added, published on December 18, 1954, in force from August 15, 1955.
CHAPTER III
From the mortgage
Article 1874.
The mortgage contract may only apply to:
1. The real estate.
2. Real rights alienable under the laws, taxes on property of that kind.
Article 1875.
In addition to the requirements of article 1,857, it is essential, in order for the mortgage to be validly constituted, that the document in which it is constituted be registered in the Register of Property.
Persons in whose favour the mortgage is established by law have no other right than to demand the granting and registration of the document in which the mortgage is to be formalized, except as provided for in the Mortgage Act in favour of the State, the provinces and the peoples, for the amount of the last annuality of the taxes, as well as of the insurers for the insurance prize.
Article 1876.
The mortgage directly and immediately subjects the property on which it is imposed, whatever its holder, to the fulfilment of the obligation for whose security it was constituted.
Article 1877.
The mortgage extends to natural accessions, improvements, outstanding fruits and rents not received upon expiration of the obligation, and to the amount of compensation granted or owed to the owner by the insurers of the mortgaged property, or by virtue of expropriation on the grounds of public utility, with the declarations, extensions and limitations established by law, as well as in the case of the estate remaining in the possession of the mortgager, as in the case of passing into the hands of a third party.
Article 1878.
The mortgage credit may be disposed of or transferred to a third party in whole or in part, with the formalities required by law.
Article 1879.
The creditor may claim from the third holder of the mortgaged property payment of the secured portion of credit with which the latter possesses, in the terms and with the formalities established by law.
Article 1880.
The form, extent and effects of the mortgage, its constitution, modification and termination and the rest not covered by this chapter shall be subject to the requirements of the Mortgage Act, which remains in force.
CHAPTER IV
Antichresis
Article 1881.
By the anticress the creditor acquires the right to collect the fruits of a property of its debtor, with the obligation to apply them to the payment of interest, if due, and then to the capital of its claim.
Article 1882.
The creditor, unless otherwise agreed, is obliged to pay the contributions and charges on the estate.
It is also doing the necessary costs for its maintenance and repair.
The quantities used in both objects shall be deducted from the fruit.
Article 1883.
The debtor cannot reacquire the enjoyment of the property without first having paid in full what it owes its creditor.
However, in order to avoid the obligations imposed on it by the preceding article, the debtor may always be obliged to re-enter the estate unless otherwise agreed.
Article 1884.
The creditor does not acquire ownership of the property due to non-payment of the debt within the agreed time frame.
Any covenant to the contrary shall be null and void. But the creditor in this case may request, in the form that prevents Civil Procedure Actpayment of the debt or sale of the property.
Article 1885.
Contracting parties may stipulate that the interest on the debt shall be offset against the fruits of the estate given in anticresis.
Article 1886.
The last paragraph of article 1,857, article 1,866, paragraph 2, and articles 1,860 and 1,861 apply to this contract.
TITLE XVI
Obligations entered into without a convention
CHAPTER I
Of quasi-contracts
Article 1887.
Legal and purely voluntary acts are quasi-contracts, of which the perpetrator is obliged to engage a third party and sometimes a reciprocal obligation between the parties concerned.
Section 1.a on the management of other people's business
Article 1888.
The person who voluntarily takes charge of the agency or administration of the business of another person, without his mandate, is obliged to continue his management until the end of the matter and its consequences, or to require the person concerned to replace him in the management, if he is in a position to do so himself.
Article 1889.
The informal manager must carry out his task with all the diligence of a good parent, and compensate for any damage caused by his fault or negligence to the owner of the property or business he manages.
The Tribunals may, however, moderate the importance of compensation according to the circumstances of the case.
Article 1890.
If the manager delegates to another person all or some of the duties of his office, he shall be liable for the actions of the delegate, without prejudice to the direct obligation of the delegate to the owner of the business.
The responsibility of managers, when two or more, will be shared.
Article 1891.
The business manager will be responsible for the accidental case when he undertakes risky operations that the owner did not have the habit of doing, or if he has postponed the interest of the owner to his own.
Article 1892.
Ratification of the management by the owner of the business produces the effects of the express mandate.
Article 1893.
Even if it had not expressly ratified the management of others, the owner of the property or business that takes advantage of it shall be liable for the obligations incurred in his interest, and shall compensate the manager for the necessary and useful expenses he has incurred and for the damage he has suffered in the performance of his duties.
The same obligation shall apply to him where the management has been designed to avoid any imminent and manifest injury, even if it does not benefit from it.
Article 1894.
If, without the knowledge of the person liable to provide food, he gives them a stranger, he shall have the right to claim them from him, unless it is established that he gave them out of mercy and without the intention of claiming them.
The funeral expenses provided for the quality of the person and the uses of the locality must be satisfied, even if the deceased had not left property, by those who in life would have had the obligation to feed him.
Section 2.a. Collection of wrongs
Article 1895.
When something that was not entitled to be collected is received and has been wrongly handed over, the obligation to return it arises.
Article 1896.
The person who accepts an undue payment, if in bad faith, shall pay the legal interest in the case of capital, or the fruits received or due to be received when the thing received produces them.
He shall also be responsible for the damage suffered by the thing for any cause, and for the damage to the one who delivered it, until he recovers it. The fortuitous case will not be rendered when it could have affected things in the same way by being in the hands of the one who delivered them.
Article 1897.
Anyone who in good faith has accepted an undue payment of certain and certain things will only be liable for the shortcomings or losses of it and its accessions, as soon as they have enriched him. If it has alienated it, it will refund the price or assign the share to make it effective.
Article 1898.
With regard to the payment of improvements and expenses made by the person who misreceived the item, the provisions of Title V of Book II shall be applied.
Article 1899.
It is exempt from the obligation to reinstate anyone who, believing in good faith that payment was made on behalf of a legitimate and continuing claim, would have rendered the title useless, or let the action be prescribed, or abandoned the garments, or cancelled the guarantees of his right. The person who paid improperly may only appeal against the true debtor or guarantors in respect of whom the action was still pending.
Article 1900.
The proof of payment rests with the person who claims to have done so. He is also responsible for the error with which he made it, unless the defendant denies having received the claim. In this case, justified by the plaintiff, he is relieved of any other evidence. This does not limit the defendant's right to prove that he was owed what he was supposed to receive.
Article 1901.
It is presumed that there was a mistake in payment when something was delivered that was never due or that was already paid; but the person to whom the return is requested can prove that the delivery was made as a liberality or for another just cause.
CHAPTER II
Obligations arising out of fault or negligence
Article 1902.
Anyone who by action or omission causes harm to another, by taking fault or negligence, is obliged to repair the damage caused.
Article 1903.
The obligation laid down in the preceding article is enforceable not only by the acts or omissions of one's own, but by those of whom one must respond.
Parents are responsible for damage caused by children under their care.
Guardians are guardians of the harm caused by minors under their authority and living in their company.
Curators with full powers of representation are the healers of the damage caused by the person they support, provided they live with it.
Likewise, the owners or directors of an establishment or enterprise in respect of the damage caused by their dependants in the service of the branches in which they were employed, or in the course of their duties.
Persons or entities holding a non-higher education teaching centre shall be liable for damages caused by their underage pupils during periods of time in which they are under the supervision or supervision of the teachers of the centre, and shall carry out school or extracurricular and complementary activities.
The responsibility dealt with in this article shall cease when the persons referred to therein prove that they used all the diligence of a good parent to prevent harm.
Article 1904.
He who pays the damage caused by his dependants can repeat from them what he would have satisfied.
In the case of non-superior educational establishments, their holders may require the teachers to pay the amounts paid, if they have committed serious wrong or fault in the performance of their duties which caused the damage.
Article 1905.
The owner of an animal, or the one who uses it, is responsible for the damage it causes, even if it escapes or is misled. This liability shall cease only if the damage was of force majeure or of the fault of the person who suffered it.
Article 1906.
The owner of a hunting estate shall be liable for the damage caused by it to neighbouring farms, where he has not done what is necessary to prevent its multiplication or when he has made it difficult for the owners of such farms to pursue it.
Article 1907.
The owner of a building is liable for damage resulting from the ruin of all or part of it, if it occurs for lack of necessary repairs.
Article 1908.
The owners of the damage shall also be liable for:
1. The explosion of machines that have not been properly handled and the inflammation of explosive substances that are not placed in a safe and adequate place.
2. For excessive smokes, which are harmful to people or property.
3.o By falling trees placed in transit sites, when not caused by force majeure.
4. For the emanations of sewers or deposits of infecting materials, constructed without adequate precautions to the place where they were.
Article 1909.
If the damage dealt with by the two preceding articles will result by default from construction, the third party who suffers from it may only repeat against the architect, or, where appropriate, against the builder, within the legal time.
Article 1910.
The head of the household who inhabits a house or part of it is responsible for the damage caused by the things that are thrown or fallen from it.
TITLE XVII
The competing and priority of claims
CHAPTER I
General provisions
Article 1911.
The debtor is responsible for the performance of its obligations with all its present and future assets.
Arts. 1912 to 1920.
Repeal
Text added, published on 10/07/2003, in force from 01/09/2004.
CHAPTER II
Classification of appropriations
Article 1921.
Credits shall be classified, for graduation and payment, in the order and in the terms set out in this chapter.
In the event of competition, the classification and graduation of credits shall be governed by the provisions of the Law of the Court.
Article 1922.
With respect to certain movable assets of the debtor, they are preferred:
1. Credits for the construction, repair, preservation or sale price of movable property held by the debtor, to the extent that they reach the value of such assets.
2. Guaranteed persons with a pledge held by the creditor, on the part of the creditor and to the extent that it reaches its value.
3.o Guaranteed securities or securities, constituted in a public or commercial establishment, on the bond and for the value of the effects of the bond.
4. Credits for transport, on the effects carried, for the price of the same, expenses and rights of driving and conservation, until delivery and for thirty days after delivery.
5.o The lodging, on the furniture of the debtor existing in the inn.
6.o Credits for seeds and cropping and collection expenses anticipated to the debtor, on the fruits of the harvest for which they served.
7. Credits for rents and rents of one year, on the movable property of the tenant existing on the rented property and on the fruits thereof.
8.o Credits for covered bond holders, in respect of loans and loans, and other collateralised assets, integrated into the hedging package, in accordance with the Royal Decree-Law 24/2021 of 2 November, transposing European Union directives on covered bonds, cross-border distribution of collective investment undertakings, open data and re-use of public sector information, copyright and related rights applicable to certain on-line transmissions and broadcasting of radio and television programmes, temporary exemptions to certain imports and supplies, to consumers and to the promotion of clean and energy efficient road transport vehicles, to their value.
If the movable property on which the preference rests has been removed, the creditor may claim it from those who had it, within thirty days, counted since the theft occurred.
This amendment enters into force on 8 July 2022 as determined by final provision 10.a) of the said Royal Decree-Law.
Article 1923.
In respect of certain immovable property and rights of the debtor, they are preferred to:
1. Credits in favour of the State, on the assets of the taxpayers, for the amount of the last, expired and unpaid annuity of the taxes they charge on them.
2. The claims of the insurers, on the insured property, for the two-year insurance awards; and, if it is mutual insurance, for the last two dividends that would have been distributed.
3. Mortgages and refactionary claims, recorded and registered in the Register of Property, on mortgaged property or property that has been the subject of the refaction.
4. The claims pre-emptively entered in the Property Registry, by court order, by seizure, abduction or enforcement of sentences, on the assets recorded, and only in respect of subsequent claims.
5. The non-noted and registered refacearies on the buildings to which the refabrication relates and only with respect to other claims other than those expressed in the previous four issues.
6.o Credits to covered bond holders, in respect of mortgage loans and loans, and other collateralised assets, integrated into the hedge package, in accordance with the Royal Decree-Law 24/2021 of 2 November, transposing European Union directives on covered bonds, cross-border distribution of collective investment undertakings, open data and re-use of public sector information, copyright and related rights applicable to certain on-line transmissions and broadcasting of radio and television programmes, temporary exemptions to certain imports and supplies, to consumers and to the promotion of clean and energy efficient road transport vehicles, to their value.
This amendment enters into force on 8 July 2022 as determined by final provision 10.a) of the said Royal Decree-Law.
Article 1924.
In relation to the debtor's other movable and immovable property, they have the following preference:
1. Credits in favour of the province or municipality, for taxes of the last expired and unpaid annuity, not covered by article 1,923, number 1.o
2nd Accruals:
A) (Repealed)
(B) For funerals of the debtor, according to the use of the place, and also of his spouse and of his children, established under his parental authority, if they did not have property of their own.
(C) Expenses for the last illness of the same persons, caused in the last year, counted until the day of death.
D) For wages and salaries of employed and domestic workers for the last year.
(E) For the quotas for compulsory schemes of subsidies, social insurance and mutual labour for the same period of time as referred to in the preceding paragraph, provided that they do not have a higher preference under the preceding Article.
(F) For anticipations made to the debtor, to himself and his family, constituted under his authority, in groceries, clothing or footwear, in the same period of time.
G) (Repealed)
3. Credits without special privilege consist of:
(A) In public writing.
(B) By final judgment, if they have been the subject of litigation.
These credits shall be preferred to each other by the order of seniority of the dates of the deeds and the judgments.
Article 1925.
Credits of any other kind, or any other title, not covered by the preceding articles shall not be preferred.
CHAPTER III
Priority of claims
Article 1926.
Credits that are preferred in respect of certain movable property exclude all other assets to the extent that they reach the value of the furniture to which the preference refers.
If two or more items of furniture are involved, the following rules shall be observed as to priority for payment:
1.a Pignoratium credit excludes others as far as it reaches the value of the thing given in pledge.
2.a In the case of security, if the security is legitimately constituted in favour of more than one creditor, the priority between the creditors shall be determined by the order of the dates of the performance of the security.
3.a Credits for seed advances, crop and harvest expenses shall be preferred to those for rent and rent over the fruits of the harvest for which they served.
4.a In other cases, the price of furniture shall be distributed on a pro rata basis among the credits that enjoy special preference in relation to furniture.
Article 1927.
The claims that are preferred in relation to certain immovable property or rights, exclude all others by their amount to the extent of the value of the immovable property or the real right to which the preference relates.
If two or more claims arise in respect of certain real estate or rights, the following rules shall be observed as to their respective priority:
1.a Those in Article 1,923 (1) and (2) shall be preferred, in their order, to those in the other numbers thereof.
2.a Mortgages and refactionaries, annotated or registered, which are expressed in article 1,923 (3) and those falling under article 4, shall have priority over each other by the order of seniority of the respective inscriptions or entries in the Register of Property.
3.a Refacearies not annotated or registered in the Register referred to in article 1,923 (5) shall have priority over each other in the reverse order of their seniority.
Article 1928.
The remainder of the debtor's proceeds, after payment of the claims that are preferential in relation to certain assets, movable or immovable, shall be accumulated to the assets free of that debtor for the payment of the other claims.
Those who, having preferred certain goods, movable or immovable, would not have been fully satisfied with the amount of the goods, shall be satisfied, as regards the deficit, in the order and place corresponding to their respective nature.
Article 1929.
Credits that do not enjoy preference in respect of certain assets, and claims that enjoy preference in respect of the amount not realized or where the right to preference has been prescribed, shall be satisfied in accordance with the following rules:
1.a By the order set out in article 1,924.
2.a Preferences by dates, in the order of dates, and those who had a common date, on a pro rata basis.
3.a The common appropriations referred to in Article 1.925, without regard to their dates.
TITLE XVIII
From the prescription
CHAPTER I
General provisions
Article 1930.
By statute of limitations, domain and other rights are acquired in the manner and under the conditions determined by law.
Rights and actions of any kind are also extinguished by statute of limitations.
Article 1931.
Persons capable of acquiring property or rights through prescription may acquire property or rights in other legitimate ways.
Article 1932.
The rights and actions are extinguished by the statute of limitations to the detriment of all kinds of persons, including legal ones, in the terms provided by law.
Persons prevented from administering their property are always protected from the right to claim against their legitimate representatives whose negligence would have been the cause of the statute of limitations.
Article 1933.
The prescription won by a co-owner or community owner takes advantage of others.
Article 1934.
The statute of limitations produces its legal effects in favour of and against the inheritance before it has been accepted and during the time granted to make inventory and to deliberate.
Article 1935.
Persons with the capacity to alienate may waive the prescription gained but not the right to prescribe for the future.
The prescription is tacitly understood to be waived when the waiver results from acts which lead to the abandonment of the acquired right.
Article 1936.
All things that are in the trade of men are subject to prescription.
Article 1937.
Creditors, and any other person interested in enforcing the statute of limitations, may use it despite the express or tacit waiver of the debtor or owner.
Article 1938.
The provisions of this Title are without prejudice to what is provided for in this Code or in special laws in respect of certain cases of statute of limitations.
Article 1939.
The statute of limitations that began before the publication of this Code shall be governed by the laws before it; but if, since it is put into compliance, it is applicable for the entire period of time required for the statute of limitations, it shall have its effect, even if by those earlier laws it requires a longer period of time.
CHAPTER II
Limitation of the domain and other rights
Article 1940.
For the ordinary prescription of the domain and other real rights it is necessary to possess things in good faith and fair title for the time determined by law.
Article 1941.
Possession must be as owner, public, peaceful and undisturbed.
Article 1942.
Acts of a possessory nature carried out under a licence or merely by tolerance of the owner do not take advantage of the possession.
Article 1943.
Possession is interrupted, for the purposes of prescription, either naturally or civilly.
Article 1944.
Possession is naturally interrupted when for any reason it ceases there for more than a year.
Article 1945.
The civil interruption is caused by the summons made to the possessor, even if it is on the order of the incompetent judge.
Article 1946.
The summons shall be deemed not to have been made and shall cease to be interrupted:
1. If it is null and void due to lack of legal solemnities.
2. If the actor withdraws from the claim or leaves the instance to expire.
3. If the possessor is acquitted of the claim.
Article 1947.
There is also a civil interruption to the conciliation act, provided that within two months of the conclusion of the proceedings, the application for possession or control of the contested thing is brought before the judge.
Article 1948.
Any express or tacit recognition that the owner makes of the owner's right also interrupts the possession.
Article 1949.
Against a title registered in the Register of Property, the ordinary limitation of the domain or rights to the detriment of a third party shall not take place, but by virtue of another title equally registered, and the time must begin to run from the registration of the second.
Article 1950.
The good faith of the possessor consists in the belief that the person from whom the thing was received owned it, and could convey its dominion.
Article 1951.
The conditions of good faith required for possession in articles 433, 434, 435 and 436 of this Code are also necessary for the determination of that requirement in the limitation of the domain and other rights in rem.
Article 1952.
The legal title of the transfer of the domain or royal right of which the statute of limitations is concerned is understood to be a fair title.
Article 1953.
The title for the statute of limitations must be true and valid.
Article 1954.
The right title must be proved; never be presumed.
Article 1955.
The control of movable property is prescribed by the uninterrupted possession of three years in good faith.
It also prescribes the domination of movable things by the uninterrupted possession of six years, without any other condition.
With regard to the right of the owner to claim the lost movable property or to have been illegally deprived, as well as those acquired for public sale, in stock exchange, fair or market, or as a legally established trader and habitually engaged in the traffic of similar objects, the provisions of article 464 of this Code shall be applied.
Article 1956.
Furniture stolen or stolen may not be prescribed by those who stole or stolen it, or by accomplices or concealers, unless the offence or offence or its penalty has been prescribed, and the action to demand civil liability, arising from the offence or offence.
Article 1957.
Domain and other rights in real estate are prescribed by possession for ten years between present and twenty between absentees, in good faith and fair title.
Article 1958.
For the purposes of the prescription, the person residing abroad or overseas is considered absent.
If part of the time was present and part absent, every two years of absence will be regarded as one to complete the ten present.
Absence other than one full and continuous year shall not be taken into account for computation.
Article 1959.
Domain and other rights in real estate by possession not interrupted for thirty years, without the need for title or in good faith, and without distinction between present and absent, are also prescribed, except for the exception set out in article 539.
Article 1960.
The following rules shall be observed in computing the time required for prescription:
1.a The current possessor may complete the time required for the prescription, joining his or her own.
2.a It is presumed that the present possessor, who would have been so in the previous epoch, has continued to be so during the intermediate time, unless proof to the contrary.
3.a The day when time begins to be counted is taken entirely; but the last must be fulfilled in its entirety.
CHAPTER III
Restriction of shares
Article 1961.
Actions are prescribed for the mere length of time set by law.
Article 1962.
Actions in rem concerning movable property are time-barred six years after possession is lost, unless the possessor has acquired ownership in a shorter period under Article 1955, and subject to the exceptions for loss and public sale and for theft and robbery, to which paragraph 3 of that Article applies.
Article 1963.
Real shares in real estate are prescribed at age 30.
This provision is understood without prejudice to the provisions for the acquisition of the domain or rights by prescription.
Article 1964.
1. Mortgages are prescribed at the age of 20.
2. Personal actions that do not have a special period of time prescribe five years after the obligation can be demanded. In continuing obligations to do or not to do, the time limit shall begin each time they are breached.
See transitional provision 5 of the above-mentioned Law for existing relationships.
Article 1965.
It does not prescribe between co-heirs, keepers or owners of adjoining estates the action to ask for the partition of the inheritance, the division of the common thing or the detachment of the adjoining properties.
Article 1966.
For five years, they prescribe actions to enforce the following obligations:
1.a The payment of maintenance.
2.a To satisfy the price of leases, whether of rustic farms or urban farms.
3.a Any other payments that must be made for years or in shorter instalments.
Article 1967.
For three years, they prescribe actions to fulfil the following obligations:
1. To pay judges, lawyers, registrars, notaries, scribes, experts, agents and curials their fees and fees, and expenses and disbursements incurred in the performance of their duties or offices in matters to which the obligations relate.
2.a To satisfy the Pharmacists with the medicines they supplied; to the Teachers their fees and stipends for the teaching they gave, or for the exercise of their profession, art or trade.
3.a To pay the menestrels, servants and hired laborers the amount of their services, and the amount of supplies or disbursements they have made concerning them.
4.a To pay the innkeepers the food and the room, and the merchants the price of the genera sold to others other than them, or that only they engage in different traffic.
The time for the limitation of the actions referred to in the above three paragraphs will be counted from the time the respective services are no longer provided.
Article 1968.
Prescribe for the course of one year:
1. The action to regain or retain possession.
2nd The action for civil liability for insult or slander and for the obligations arising from the fault or negligence referred to in article 1,902, since the aggrieved party learned of it.
Article 1969.
The time for prescribing all kinds of actions, when there is no special provision to be determined otherwise, shall be counted from the day on which they could be exercised.
Article 1970.
The time for the limitation of shares that are intended to claim the fulfilment of capital obligations, with interest or income, runs from the last payment of income or interest.
The same is true of the capital of the census.
The time of prescription from the last payment of the pension or income is also counted in the enphyteutic and reserve census.
Article 1971.
The time of limitation of actions to demand compliance with obligations declared by judgement begins after the sentence has been final.
Article 1972.
The end of the statute of limitations for accountability actions runs from the day when those who were required to discharge them ceased to hold office.
The action for the result of the accounts, from the date on which it was recognised by the parties concerned.
Article 1973.
The limitation of actions is interrupted by their exercise before the Tribunals, by extrajudicial claim of the creditor and by any act of recognition of the debt by the debtor.
Article 1974.
The interruption of the limitation of shares in the joint and several obligations benefits or damages all creditors and debtors alike.
This provision also applies to the debtor ' s heirs in all kinds of obligations.
In the case of joint obligations, where the creditor does not claim from one of the debtors more than its share, the limitation period for the other co-debtors is not interrupted.
Article 1975.
The interruption of the limitation period against the principal debtor for the judicial claim of the debt also has effect against its guarantor; but it shall not prejudice the debtor for extrajudicial claims of the creditor or private recognition of the debtor.
FINAL PROVISIONS
Article 1976.
All the legal bodies, customs and customs that constitute the common civil law in all matters covered by this Code are repealed and will be without force and force, as well as in their concept of directly binding laws and that of supplementary law. This provision does not apply to laws that are declared to be subsisting in this Code.
TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS
The changes introduced by this Code, which prejudice rights acquired under previous civil law, shall not have retroactive effect.
The following rules shall be applied to the application of the relevant legislation in cases not expressly determined by the Code:
First.
According to the law before the Code, the rights arising from acts carried out under its regime shall be governed, even if the Code otherwise regulates them or does not recognize them. But if the right is first declared in the Code, it will certainly have effect even if the fact that it originates it is verified under the previous legislation, provided that it does not prejudice another acquired right of equal origin.
Second.
Acts and contracts entered into under and valid under the previous legislation shall have all their effects under the same law, subject to the limitations laid down in these rules. As a result, wills, even if pooled, will be valid, the powers to test and the testamentary memories that were granted or written before the Code, and will produce the effect of the clauses ad cautiam, the trusts to apply the goods according to the instructions reserved by the testator and any other acts permitted by the previous legislation; but the revocation or modification of these acts or of any of the clauses contained therein may not be verified, after the Code is in force, but by testing under it.
Third.
The provisions of the Code that punish acts or omissions that were not sanctioned in previous laws with civil penalty or deprivation of rights do not apply to those who, when they were in force, had committed the omission or carried out the act prohibited by the Code.
Where the offence is also punishable by the previous legislation, the most benign provision shall apply.
Fourth.
Actions and rights born and not exercised before the Code are governed shall be extended and in accordance with the terms recognized by the previous legislation, but subject to the provisions of the Code as to their exercise, duration and procedures for enforcing them. If the exercise of the right or action is pending formal proceedings initiated under the previous legislation, and these are different from those established by the Code, the persons concerned may choose one or the other.
Fifth.
Children who had reached the age of twenty-three at the beginning of the Code were emancipated and out of parental authority; but if they continued to live in the house and at the expense of their parents, they could retain the usufruct, the administration and other rights they were enjoying over the property of their parent until the time when the children should leave parental authority under the previous legislation.
Sixth.
A parent who voluntarily emancipated a child, reserving any right over his or her adventitious property, may continue to enjoy it until such time as the child should leave parental authority under the previous legislation.
Seventh.
Fathers, mothers and grandparents who are serving as wards for their descendants may not withdraw or be obliged to make up their bonds if they have not provided them, or to supplement them if the bonds are insufficient.
Eighth.
Guardians and curators appointed under and subject to the previous legislation shall retain their office but subject to the provisions of the Code as to their exercise.
This rule also applies to holders and interim administrators of other persons ' property, where they are established by law.
Ninth.
Guardianship and wardship, the final constitution of which is pending before the courts at the beginning of the Code, shall be constituted in accordance with the previous legislation, without prejudice to the provisions of the preceding rule.
Tenth.
The judges and municipal prosecutors shall not appoint family councils on their own initiative, but in respect of minors whose guardianship is not yet definitively established at the beginning of the Code. Where the guardian or curator has already begun to exercise his or her position, the council shall not be appointed until such time as one of the persons to be included in the council or the existing guardian or curator so requests, and the appointment of the advocate shall be suspended.
Eleventh.
Adoption, voluntary emancipation and waiver of laws pending before the Government or the courts will continue to be pursued under the previous legislation, unless parents or applicants for pardon desist from following this procedure and prefer the procedure established by the Code.
Twelfth.
The rights to inheritance of the deceased, with or without a will, before the Code is in force, shall be governed by the previous legislation. The inheritance of those who died afterwards, whether or not with a will, shall be awarded and distributed in accordance with the Code; but, as soon as the Code so permits, in compliance with the testamentary provisions. Legitimate, improvements and legacies will therefore be respected, but their amount will be reduced, if otherwise it is not possible to give each shareholder in the inheritance his or her share of the inheritance according to the Code.
Thirteenth.
Cases not directly covered by the above provisions shall be resolved by applying the principles that serve as the basis for them.
ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS
First.
At the end of each year, the President of the Supreme Court and those of the Territorial Courts shall submit to the Ministry of Grace and Justice a report in which, referring to the affairs of which they have been acquainted during the same period, they indicate the shortcomings and doubts they have encountered in the application of this Code. It shall set out in detail the questions and points of law at issue and the articles or omissions of the Code which have given rise to the doubts of the Court.
Second.
The Ministry of Grace and Justice will pass on these reports and a copy of the Civil Statistics of the same year to the General Codification Commission.
Third.
In view of these data, the progress made in other countries that are usable in our country and the jurisprudence of the Supreme Court, the Codification Commission will formulate and submit to the Government every 10 years any reforms that may be appropriate.
Fourth.
The reference to disability in articles 96, 756, 7th, 782, 808, 822 and 1041 shall be understood to mean disability as defined in the Law 41/2003 of 18 November 2003the protection of the property of persons with disabilities and the modification of Civil Code, of Civil Procedure Act and the Tax Regulations for this purpose, and to persons who are in a position of dependence of grade II or III according to the Act No. 39/2006 of 14 December 2006, to promote personal autonomy and care for people in dependent situations.
For the purposes of the other provisions of this Code, unless otherwise provided for in the article in question, any reference to disability shall be understood to include a reference to disability which requires the provision of support measures for the exercise of legal capacity.
Text added, published on 19/11/2003, in force from 20/11/2003.
Governs civil proceedings. It is relevant to related family, maintenance and compensation matters, whose civil procedural route must be distinguished from a possible criminal case.
This summary was prepared from the Spanish BOE text retrieved on 7 November 2026.